BOUND  BY 
HAYNES  &  FEHR 
PHiLA.,  PA. 


Digitized  by  the  internet  Archive 
in  2015 


https://archive.org/details/illustrateddescrOOjafa 


ILLUSTRATED 

Descriptive  Catalogue 


PRIZE  MEDALS  AWARDED 


Patent  fool-forking  MaeMnery 


••  • 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO, 


Corner  Front  and  John  Streets, 


CINCINNATI,  OHIO,  U.  S.  A. 


1878. 


Bound  Copies  of  this  Catalogue  can  be  v)roeurecl  by  sending  directions  and  remittance 
for  same  as  follows:    Paper  Cover,  $1.00;    Boards,  $  1. SO  ;    Cloth,  $2.00. 


tlA  CJ.WA  TI: 

JiNE  Printing  Works, 
8  E.  Fou  y-th  Street. 


TO  ALL  WHO  ARE  INTERESTED 

IN 

WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY 

IN 

America,  Europe,  Asia,  and  Australia, 

BY 


Copyrighted  1878,  by  J.  A   FAY  &  CO, 


s-^~6  /sr 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

Medals,   ^ 

Suggestions  to  Purchasers,      ...  5 

Introductory,   6 

General  Remarks  on  Wood-Working  Ma- 
chinery,       ......  8 

Rules  for  Calculating  Speed,      .        .  9 

SHAFTING,  HANGERS,  AND  PULLEYS. 

Line  Shafting,   10 

Couplings,         .....  11 

Hangers,       ......  12 

Journal  Boxes,  .....  1*^ 

Pulleys — Straight  Arm       .        .        .  13 

Directions  for  Laying  out  Line  Shafting,  14 

Directions  for  Placing  Line  Shafting,      .  15 

Bevel  Flange  Loose  Pulleys,       .       .  16 

SURFACE  PLANING  MACHINES. 

General  Remarks,        .       .       .  .17 

Daniels  Planing  Machine — Wood  Frame,  18 

Daniels  Planing  Machine — Iron  Frame,  20 

Dimension  Planing  Machine,      .       .  22 

Surface  Planing  Machine — No.  2,    .  24 

Surface  Planing  Machine — No.  3,  .  25 
Surface  Planing  Machine — Hand  and 

Power  Feed,     ....  26 

Surface  Planing  Machine — Double  Roll,  28 

Endless  Bed  Surfacer — Medium,         .  30 

Endless  Bed  Surfacer — Large,       .        .  32 

Endless  Bed  Surfacer — Double,          .  34 

Car  Sill  Dressing  Machine,     ...  36 

PLANING  AND    MATCHING  MACHINES. 

General  Remarks,  ...  .38 
Planing  and  Matching  Machine—No.  1 

Four  Roll,   40 

Planing  and  Matching  Machine— No.  2 

Four  Roll,   42 

Planing  and  Matching  Machine— No.  2>4 

Single  Cylinder,  Six  Roll,  .  .  44 
Planing  and  Matching  Machine— No.  3, 

Four  Roll,  Single  and  Double  Cyl.,  46 
Planing  and  Matching  Machine— No.  4, 

Four  Roll,  Single  and  Double  Cyl,  48 


PAGE. 


Planing  and  Matching  Machine — No.  4, 

Six  Roll,  Double  Cylinder,  .  50 
Planing  and  Matching  Machine — No.  4^ 

Six  Roll,  Double  Cylinder,  .  .  52 
Planing  and  Matching  Machine — No.  5, 

Four  Roll,  Single  Cylinder,  .  54 
Planing  and  Matching  Machine — No.  5, 

Four  Roll,  Double  Cylinder,    .        .  56 

Planing  and  Matching  Machine — No.  5, 

Six  Roll,  Double  Cylinder,         .  58 

Planing  and  Matching  Machine — No.  6, 

Six  Roll,  Double  Cylinder,       .        .  60 

Pov\'er  and  Hand  Feed  Matcher,  .        .  62 

MOLDING  MACHINES. 

General  Reniarks,    .       .        -       .  .66 

Milled  Sash  and  Door  Cutters,      .        .  68 

Molding  Cutters,  ....  69 
Molding  Heads,  etc.,      .        .       .  .70 

Double  Panel  Raising  Machine,  .       .  71 

Molding  and  Sash  Machine — No.  1,       .  72 

Moi  ling  and  Sash  Machine— No.  2.    .  73 

Molding  and  Sash  Machine — No.  3,       .  74 

Molding  and  Sash  Machine— No.  3>^,   .  76 

Molding  and  Sash  Machine — No.  4,  .  78 
Inside  Molder— No.  1,  .        .        .  .80 

Inside  Molder— No.  2,       .       .        .  82 

UNIVERSAL  AND  VARIETY  WOOD 
WORKERS. 

General  Remarks,       ....  84 

Variety  Wocd  Worker — No.  1,  .  .  86 
Variety  W^ood  Worker— No.  2,  .  .88 
Universal  Wood  Worker  —^'  D,"  Molder 

Side,   90 

Universal  Wood  Worker — "  D,"  Wood 

Worker  Side,         ....  91 

Universal  Wood  Worker — Specifications,  92 
Universal  Wood  Worker — '•  E,"  Molder 

Side,   94 

Universal  Wood  Worker — "  E,"  Wor.d 

Worker  Side,  ....  96 
Universal  Wood  Worker — Method  of 

Operating,      .        .        .        .       .  97 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


EDGE  MOLDING  AND  SHAPING 
MACHINES. 

PAGE. 

Edge  Molding  and  Friezing  Machine,  103 
Edge  Molding  and  Shaping  Machine — No. 

2,  Wood  Table,  ....  104 
Edge  Molding  and  Shaping  Machine — No. 

2,  Iron  Table,  ....  105 
Edge  Molding  and  Shaping  Machine — No. 

3,  Wood  Table,  ....  106 
Edge  Molding  and  Shaping  Machine— No. 

3,  Iron  Table,  .  .  .  .107 
Carving,  Paneling,  and  Molding  Machine,  108 
Cutters  for  Use  on  Carver,     .        .  .110 

TENONING  MACHINES. 

General  Remarks,  .  .  .  .112 
Tenoning  Machine — No.  0,  .  .  114 
Tenoning  Machine — No,  1,  .  .115 

Tenoning  Machine — No.  2,  .  .  116 
Tenoning  Machine — No.  3,  .  .118 

Tenoning  Machine — No.  4,  .  .  120 
Tenoning  Machine — Vertical  Car,  .  122 
Car  Gaining  Machine,  .  .  .  124 
Tenoning  Machine — Self  Feed,  Blind  Sla*^,  126 
Tenoning  Machine — Hand  Feed  Blind  Slat,  127 

MORTISING  MACHINES. 

General  Remarks,         .     '  .       .  .132 

Mortising  Machine — Foot,         .        .  134 

Mortising  and  Boring  Machine — Chair,  136 

Mortising  Machine — No.  1,   .       .       .  137 

Mortising  Machine— No.  2,  Straight  Bed,  138 
Mortising  Machine — No.  2,  Compound 

Bed,   140 

Mortising  and  Boring  Machine — No.  3 

Cabinet,   142 

Mortising  and  Boring  Machine — No.  3}^ 

Cabinet,   144 

Mortising  and  Boring  Machine — No.  4 

Agricultural,  .....  146 
Mortising  and  Boring  Machine — No.  3^ 

Hub,   148 

Mortising  and  Boring  Machine — No.  4 

Hub,  150 

Mortising  and  Boring  Machine — No.  6 

Car,  152 


SAWING  MACHINERY. 


PAGE 

General  Remarks,  .  .  .  .  154 
Scroll  Saws— No.  1  Fret,  .  .  .155 
Scroll  Saws—No.  2  Fret,  .        .  156 

Scroll  Saws — No.  3  Unstrained,  .  .  158 
Scroll  Saws — No.  4  Unstrained,  .  160 

Scroll  Saws — No.  5  Unstrained,  .  .  162 
Scroll  Saws — No.  h^o.  Unstrained,  .  164 
Shape  and  Gauges  of  Circular  Saws,  .  185 
Saw  Arbors — Self-oiling,  .        .  186 

Swing  Cut-off  Saw,  ....  188 
Railway  Cutting-Off  Saw— No.  1,  .  189 


Railway  Cutting-Off  Saw— No.  2,  without 
;  Table,      .        .        .        -       .  190 

i    Railway  Cutting-Off  Saw— No.  2,  with 


Table,   191 

Railway  Cutdng-Off  Saw— No.  3,  .  192 

Bracket  Cutting-Off  Saw,      .        .  .194 

Carriage  Cuttin--Off  Saw,         .  .  195 

Rip  Saw  Tables— No.  1  and  No.  2,  .  196 

Rip  Saw  Table— Column,          .  .  197 

Standard  Saw  Table— No.  2,         .  .  198 

Double  Revolving  Saw  Table,    .  .  199 

Rip  Saw  Table— No.  3,.  .  .  .  200 
Standard  Saw  Table— No.  2,  Self-Feeding,  201 

Carriage  Edging  Saw  Table,         .  .  202 

Edging  Saw — Improved,       .        .  .  203 

Shingle  Machine,     ...  .  204 


BAND  SAWING  MACHINERY. 


General  Remarks,         ....  166 

Band  Saw — ''Gem,"         .       .       .  168 

Band  Saw— No.  0  and  No.  1,  .        .        .  170 

Band  Saw— No.  2,     ....  172 

Band  Saw— No.  3,        ....  174 

Band  Re-Saw— No.  4,        .       .       .  176 

Band  Re-Saw — Large,  ....  178 

Band  Saw  Mdl,  ....  180 

Band  Saw  Blades — Special  Announcement,  182 

Band  Saw  Blades — Perin,      .       .       .  183 


Band  Saw  Setting  and  Filing  Machine,  .  184 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


iii 


RE-SAWING  MACHINERY. 


PAGE. 

Band  Re-Saw— No.  4,  . 

.  176 

Band  Re-Saw — Large, 

178 

Circular  Re-Savving  Machine- 

-No.  1, 

.  205 

Circular  Re-Sawing  Machine- 

-No.  2, 

206 

Circular  Re-Sawing  Machine- 

-No.  4, 

.  208 

Vertical  Re-Saw,  without  Pit, 

210 

Vertical  Re-Saw,  Pitman  Below  the  Floor,  212 

HAND  PLANING  MACHINES. 

Column  Hand  Planer  and  Jointer,      .  214 

Universal  Hand  Planer  and  Jointer,  215 

SAND-PAPERING  MACHINES. 

Sand  Papering  Machine— Bracket,         .  216 

Sand  Papering  Machine — Door,         .  217 

Sand  Papering  Machine — Drum,            .  218 

Sand  Papering  Machine — Power  Feed,  219 

BORING  MACHINES. 

Boring  Machine — Small,        •       .        .  220 

Boring  Machine — Radial  Chair,  .  221 
Boring  and  Mortising  Machine — Blind 

Stile,   222 

Boring  Machine — Universal  Horizontal,  223 

Boring  Machine — Vertical  Single  Spindle,  224 

Boring  Machine — Vertical  Three  Spindle,  226 

Boring  Machine — Horizontal  Car,  .        .  228 

Boring  Machine — Radial  Car,    .        .  229 

WOOD  TURNING  LATHES. 

General  Remarks,       ....  232 

Wood  Turning  Lathe — Pattern  Makers',  234 

Automatic  Gauge  Lathe,       .        .       .  235 

Wood  Turning  Lathe — Broom  Handle,  236 

CLAMPING  MACHINES. 

Sash  Clamping  Machine,    .        •        •  237 

Door  Clamping  Machine,       .       .       .  238 

Belt  Clamping  Machine,     ...  239 

Sash  and  Door  Clamps,         .        .        .  239 


WHEEL  MACHINERY. 


Wheel  Machinery — General  Remarks,  240 

Blanchard  Spoke  Lathe,         .        .        .  242 

Spoke  Driving  Machine — Hosier's,         .  244 

Wheel  Machine — Automatic,      .        .  246 

Spoke  Tenon  Trueing  Machine,     .        .  248 

Spoke  Throating  Machine,          .       .  249 

Spoke  Jointing  and  Facing  Machine,  250 
Spoke  Bevel  Tenoning  and  Facing  Machine,  251 

Wheel  Tenoning  Machine — Automatic,  252 

Oval  Tenon  Forming  Machine,   .       .  253 

Felloe  Sawing  Machine,         .        .        .  254 

Wood  Bending  Machine,  .  .  .  255 
Inside  and  Outside  Rim  Planing  Machine,  256 

Bevel  Felloe  Planer,  ....  257 
Vertical  Felloe  Planer,          .        .  .258 

Cornering  and  Rounding  Machine,        .  259 

Felloe  Rounding  Machine,         .        .  260 

Felloe  Boring  and  Cutting-Off  Machine,  261 

Universal  Wheel  Finishing  Machine,      .  262 

Hollow  Augers — Corr's,    .        .        .  264 

Wheel  Screwing  Machine,      .        .       .  265 

Hub  Boring  Machine,    ....  266 

MISCELLANEOUS  MACHINES. 

Solid  Milled  Tongue  and  Groove  Cutters,  63 
SoUd  Milled  Sash  and  Door  Cutters,        .  68 

Matcher  Bit  Setter,       .       .        •       .  64 

Knife  Grinding  Machine,         .        .  64 

Planing  Knives,            ....  64 

Knife  Grinding  Machine — Automatic,  65 

BHnd  Wiring  Machine— No.  1,  .       .  128 

Blind  Wiring  Machine— Double,         .  128 

Blind  Wiring  Machine— No.  2,      .        .  129 

Dovetailing  Machine,    ....  130 

Groover  Heads,         ....  131 

Mitering  Machine,        ....  220 

Rod  Machine— Power  Feed,      .       .  230 

Rod  Machine— Hand  Feed,           .        .  231 

Concentric  Slide,       ....  231 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY 
Has  Been  Awarded  over  300  Gold,  Silver,  and  Bronze  Medals. 

The  International  Expositions  of  United  States,   France,  Vienna,  Chili,  Australia,  the  American  Institute, 
N.  Y.  ;  also,  the  Industrial  Expositions  of  Cincinnati,  Boston,  Chicago,  St.  Louis,  Pittsburgh,  New 
Orleans,  and  San  Francisco  have  awarded  Special  Premiums  of  Gold,  Silver,  and  Bronze,  and 
Complimentary  Medals  of  Gold,  and  Honorable  Mention. 


Suggestions  to  Purchasers  and  Correspondents. 


 ».  ■»  

When  ordering  machinery,  specify  distinctly  the  articles  wanted,  and  also  your  full 
address — town,  county,  and  state. 

Remittances  may  be  made  either  by  Draft,  Express,  or  (if  in  small  amounts)  by 
Postal  Orders.  Drafts  should  be  made  payable  to  our  order,  and  drawn  either  on 
Cincinnati  or  New  York.  Express  remittances  should  be  plainly  marked,  and  in  all 
cases  prepaid. 

Sterling  Drafts  are  invariably  sold  at  the  highest  premium  attainable,  and  the  amount 
placed  to  the  customers  credit. 

In  the  absence  of  instructions,  machines  will  in  all  cases  be  understood  to  require 
boxing,  which  will  be  charged  at  cost. 

Preferred  routes  of  shipment  should  be  plainly  designated;  otherwise  they  will  be 
forwarded  by  the  cheapest  and  most  expeditious  route. 

Insurance  and  freight  contracts,  by  the  best  route,  will  be  secured  at  the  lowest 
possible  rates,  when  so  desired. 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  tools  complete  as  specified  in  description. 

Describe  parts  of  machines  wanted  for  repairs  as  explicitly  as  possible,  and  in  all 
cases  where  practicable  return  the  old  parts,  or  send  us  sketches  of  same,  in  order  to 
obviate  liability  of  mistakes. 

In  ordering  pulleys,  state  the  diameter,  width  of  face,  and  exact  size  of  bore 
wanted,  also  whether  they  should  have  flat  or  crowning  face. 

In  ordering  gearing,  the  exact  diameter,  width  of  face,  number  of  teeth,  and  size 
of  hole  should  be  given. 

When  circular  saws  are  wanted,  state  whether  for  ripping  or  cross-cutting,  and 
give  diameter,  size  of  hole,  gauge,  and  style  of  tooth. 

In  ordering  scroll  saws,  state  the  length  and  width,  and  whether  required  for  the 
fret  or  unstrained  scroll  saw. 

In  ordering  band  saws,  specify  the  length  and  width,  what  machine  they  are  for, 
and  whether  or  not  they  should  be  filed,  set  and  brazed. 

In  ordering  auger  bits,  state  the  diameter  and  length  of  the  twist  and  shank, 
respectively. 

5 


6 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Introductory. 


In  offering  this  catalogue  of  our  manufactures  to  the  users  of  wood-working 
machinery,  we  deem  it  essential  to  state  that  we  have,  as  occasion  required,  issued 
circulars  of  special  machines  at  the  time  of  their  production,  or  catalogues  of  classes,  to 
meet  the  wants  of  the  respective  trades  to  which  they  were  adapted.  These  methods  of 
information  we  will  continue  when  necessary,  as,  from  past  experience,  we  are  aware  that 
changes  and  improvements  must  continue  while  machinery  is  in  use,  as  new  methods  and 
systems  are  adopted  by  operators,  necessitating  new  combinations  to  produce  the 
desired  result. 

Since  issuing  our  last  large  illustrated  catalogue,  the  number  of  our  machines  has  been 
increased  to  about  two  hundred.  These  will  be  found  in  detail  in  this  enlarged  illustrated 
and  descriptive  volume,  with  information  regarding  their  function  and  product.  With 
the  aid  of  this  catalogue  parties  desiring  to  purchase  wood-working  machinery  can  select 
intelligibly  sets  for  use  in  almost  any  branch  of  wood  production,  and  attention  will  be  given 
to  suggestions  for  the  completion  of  any  special  operation  in  any  of  such  sets. 

In  manufacturing  we  have  spared  no  expense  in  increasing  our  facilities ;  and  in 
designing,  improving  and  constructing;  the  best  methods  are  adopted,  and  systems 
established  for  uniformity  of  sizes.  Particular  attention  is  given  to  perfectly  balancing  the 
revolving  parts,  and  thoroughly  fitting  the  journal  bearings. 

Our  workmen  being  in  special  corps,  under  the  supervision  of  men  accustomed  to 
their  class  of  work,  and  from  long  experience  and  particular  attention  to  each  detail, 
enables  us  to  provide  machinery  constructed  upon  the  most  approved  plans,  and  with  a 
certainty  that  it  will  operate  in  the  most  perfect  manner. 

Our  experimental  department  is  in  the  charge  of  competent  experts,  who  are  required 
to  test  in  the  most  critical  manner  every  machine  and  process,  and  assurance  is  given  that 
each  article  is  as  nearly  as  possible  in  perfect  working  condition. 

While  we  ask  no  one  to  purchase  patent  rights,  but  include  in  our  prices  the  right  to 
use  in  any  section  of  the  country,  we  find  it  necessary  to  protect  ourselves  with  letters 
patent  against  parties  who  scruple  not  to  use  the  designs  and  improvements  of  others 
without  permission,  so  far  as  they  can  do  so  without  incurring  the  penalty  of  the  laws 
While  upon  the  whole  our  rights  have  been  respected,  we  have,  in  some  instances,  been 
compelled  to  appeal  to  the  law  for  protection,  a  course  that  will  uniformly  be  pursued  in 
all  cases  where  our  patent  rights  are  infringed. 

We  invite  special  attention  to  the  improvements  we  have  effected  in  special  machinery 
for  car   manufacturers  and  wheel  work ;    also    in   our  patent  planing  and  matching 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


7 


machines,  molding  and  mortising  machines,  band  saws  and  sawing  machinery,  universal 
and  variety  wood-workers,  wheel  machinery,  etc.,  full  descriptions  of  which  will  be 
found  in  their  appropriate  places.  We  are  proud  to  state  that  every  machine  described 
in  this  catalogue  is  of  our  own  manufacture. 

The  world-wide  reputation  attained  by  our  machinery  is  one  of  the  many  evidences 
of  its  superior  excellence,  and  its  appreciation  everywhere  will  be  seen  from  the  fact  that 
it  is  now  in  use,  and  shipments  constantly  made  to.  Great  Britain,  Ireland,  Germany, 
Switzerland,  Sweden  and  Norway,  Russia,  Australia,  New  Zealand,  Japan,  South  America, 
West  India  Islands,  and  all  the  States  and  Territories  of  the  United  States. 

In  our  competition  for  excellence  at  the  numerous  Expositions  that  we  have  attended 
with  our  machinery,  we  have,  in  all  cases,  received  the  highest  awards,  and  especially  at 
the  World's  Expositions  at  Vienna,  1873,  at  Santiago,  Chili,  1875,  at  the  Centennial  Ex- 
position of  the  United  States,  at  Philadelphia,  1876,  also  the  New  South  Wales  Exposi- 
tion, Australia,  1877.  We  have  at  the  World's  Exposition  at  Paris  a  large  display  of  new 
wood-working  tools,  to  which  the  attention  of  visitors  there  is  called,  and  the  result,  as  to 
the  award,  by  the  world  at  large. 

With  unequalled  designs,  new  patterns  and  tools,  complete  systems  in  our  works,  long 
experience  and  careful  attention  to  business,  we  hope  in  the  future,  as  in  the  past,  to 
maintain  the  high  reputation  of  our  machines  at  home  and  abroad,  and  merit  a  continuance 
of  the  very  generous  patronage  hitherto  received. 


)N.  H.  DOANE,  President 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO., 


D.  L  LYON,  Secretary. 


Cincinnati,  Ohio,  U.  S.  A. 


June  1st,  1878. 


8 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Wood  Working  Machinery. 


In  no  kind  of  machinery  is  perfect  construction  more  essential  than  in  wood-working 
machinery.  The  high  speed  of  movement  requires  all  parts  to  be  finished  in  the 
best  manner  to  prevent  friction  and  the  ruinous  results  to  the  parts  affected.  Wood- 
working machinery  cutters  act  in  true  geometrical  lines,  and  with  a  power  and  speed 
limited  only  to  the  safety  of  the  tool  and  machine,  and  with  an  accuracy  of  result  not 
attainable  by  hand  labor,  which  is  limited  in  its  force,  easily  exhausted  in  its  power, 
and  unreliable  in  the  accuracy  of  the  product;  the  production  from  the  machine  being 
duplicates,  that  from  hand  labor  only  approximates. 

"Labor  Saving"  is  the  profitable  result  of  the  use  of  wood-working  machinery,  and 
relieves  man  from  some  of  the  most  exhaustive  labor  in  the  development  of  the  produc- 
tions from  wood,  leaving  to  him  the  manipulation  of  the  machine  and  the  more  artistic 
portions  of  the  work,  placing  the  artisan  more  in  the  field  of  intellectual  than  physical 
labor.  Wood-working  machines  should  be  complete  in  detail,  and  have  every  conven- 
ience for  carrying  their  functions  into  operation  ;  they  should  do  the  largest  amount  of 
work  in  the  best  manner  and  without  loss  of  time.  Machinery  possessing  the  reverse  of 
these  qualities,  or  the  above  qualities  in  an  inferior  degree,  being  incomplete  in  construc- 
tion and  imperfect  in  action,  possess  little,  if  any,  advantages  over  hand  labor. 

The  value  of  a  machine  in  its  results,  as  compared  with  the  results  of  hand  labor,  is 
the  measure  of  value  of  such  machines;  and,  considering  the  quantity  and  quality  of  work 
produced  by  either  system,  gives  a  true  basis  whereby  their  relative  values  may  be  esti- 
mated. It  is  not  only  essential  that  a  machine  should  perform  a  specific  work,  but  that 
it  should  be  performed  in  the  best  manner  and  in  the  shortest  time,  giving  a  maximum  of 
product  for  a  minimum  of  labor. 

In  making  an  estimate  of  the  economy  in  the  use  of  wood-working  machinery,  it  is 
difficult  to  establish  a  basis  of  calculation  ;  yet  if  the  result  from  one  machine  and  one  man 
is  more  than  that  from  the  labor  of  three  men,  unaided  by  machinery,  it  is  evident  that 
the  labor  of  two  men  is  saved,  and  from  this  it  will  be  seen  that  a  machine  will  soon  repay 
its  original  cost;  and  from  the  cheapening  of  the  product  there  will  result  a  greater 
demand. 

It  is  desirable  to  consider  the  motives  governing  parties  when  purchasing  machinery. 
It  is  difficult  for  a  purchaser  to  see  that  a  small  extra  cost  at  first,  may,  in  procuring  for 
him  a  superior  machine,  be  beneficial  in  the  subsequent  profit  by  the  superior  excellence 
of  its  action  and  small  cost  for  repairs.  It  is,  therefore,  apparent  that  the  worth  of  a  ma- 
chine is  according  to  the  cost  of  its  operation  and  maintenance  ;  and  the  relative  value  with 
any  other  must  be  contrasted  and  compared  upon  this  basis. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


9 


Evidently,  machines  sold  at  small  prices  can  not  always  embody  all  the  desirable 
excellencies  of  first-class  machines;  hence,  it  will  also  be  evident  that  a  first-class  price 
must  be  paid  for  first-class  machinery;  and  when  we  consider  that  they  embody  the  result 
of  long  experience  and  thorough  knowledge  of  the  requirements,  and  contain  not  only 
the  completeness  of  detail,  but  also  substantial  and  perfect  construction  to  produce  the 
best  results,  it  will  be  seen  that  machinery  constructed  upon  this  basis  can  not  be  sold 
at  prices  which  will  not  insure  these  features  in  their  production. 


Rules  for  Ascertaining  the  Speed  of  Pulleys. 

PROBLEM  L 

The  diameter  of  the  driven  being  given,  to  find  its  number  of  revolutions: 

Rule: — Multiply  the  diameter  of  the  driver  by  its  number  of  revolutions,  and  divide 
the  product  by  the  diameter  of  the  driven;  the  quotient  will  be  the  number  of  revolutions 
of  the  driven. 


PROBLEM  II. 

The  diameter  and  revolutions  of  the  driver  being  given,  to  find  the  diameter  of  the 
driven,  that  shall  make  any  given  number  of  revolutions  in  the  same  time  : 

Rule: — Multiply  the  diameter  of  the  driver  by  its  number  of  revolutions,  and  divide 
the  product  by  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  driven;  the  quotient  will  be  its  diameter. 


PROBLEM  III. 
To  ascertain  the  size  of  the  driver: 

Rule: — Multiply  the  diameter  of  the  driven  by  the  number  of  revolutions  you  wish 
it  to  make,  and  divide  the  product  by  the  revolutions  of  the  driver ;.  the  quotient  will  be 
the  size  of  the  driver. 


10 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Section  of  Line  Shafting. 

(with  patent  self-adjusting  pivot  hangers,  patent  compression 
coupling  and  pulleys.) 

The  second  element  in  machinery  is  the  means  for  the  transmission  of  power  from 
the  motor  to  the  machines.  This  is  almost  universally  accomplished  by  lines  of  shafting 
extending  through  the  different  rooms  and  stories  of  mills  and  manufactories,  and  con- 
stituting, as  a  single  article,  one  of  the  most  important  of  machinery  manufacture.  As 
originally  made  it  was  clumsy,  with  solid  couplings,  keyed  on  firmly,  and  with  rigid 
bearings  that  were  with  difficulty  got  into  line,  supported  by  hangers  and  brackets  con- 
taining an  amount  of  metal  not  required  for  the  strain  upon  them. 

But  a  more  scientific  mechanism  has  now  replaced  these  rude  appliances,  and  shafting, 
to  meet  the  conditions  of  modern  improvement,  must  be  turned  perfectly  true,  fitted  to 
standard  gauges,  the  bearings  must  pivot  in  all  directions,  and  have  vertical  and  lateral 
adjustment  upon  their  supports,  and  contain  self-lubricating  devices. 

The  hangers  and  supports,  constructed  with  variety  of  design,  are  so  arranged  as  to 
give  the  greatest  strength  with  the  least  amount  of  metal. 

The  couplings  must  be  so  constructed  as  to  be  readily  attached  and  removed  without 
drifting  out  keys,  and  replaced  without  injury  to  the  shaft  or  coupling. 

Pulleys  must  be  turned  and  balanced,  and  contain  the  right  amount  of  metal  in  the 
right  place. 

Persons  purchasing  shafting  should  see  that  all  of  these  conditions,  and  which  are  all 
found  in  J.  A.  Fay  &  Co.'s  patent  hangers,  couplings,  pulleys,  etc.,  are  filled,  for  shafting, 
like  all  other  machinery,  has  a  price  to  correspond  with  its  character. 

The  pulleys  should  be  light  and  of  the  most  approved  construction,  designed 
especially  for  wood-working  machinery. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


11 


Patent  Adjustable  Compression  Couplings. 

The  above  engraving  gives  a  correct  representation  of  our  finished  coupHng,  ready  to 
go  on  the  shaft,  and  also  of  the  different  parts  which  form  the  whole,  thus  plainly  showing 
the  simple  plan  of  its  construction.  The  advantages  over  the  ordinary  coupling  will 
seen  by  a  comparison. 

By  the  aid  of  special  tools  we  are  enabled  to  manufacture  and  furnish  them  at  about 
the  same  price  as  the  ordinary  style  coupling.  With  the  convenience  of  being  easily 
attached  or  removed,  they  have  the  following  advantages  over  others  of  the  same  class : 

1st.  The  strength  of  the  couplings  is  in  its  outer  shell,  where  it  can  best  withstand 
the  strain. 

2d.  It  is  formed  with  less  metal  than  any  other  coupling,  and  is  symmetrical  in 
its  appearance. 

3d.  The  coupling  force  is  the  same  on  each  end  of  the  shaft. 

4th.  The  cones  being  moved  by  a  ring-nut,  keeps  the  shaft  in  a  true  line. 

5th.  The  sleeve  is  thin  and  flexible,  and  closes  concentrically  upon  the  shaft,  and  not 
as  two  semi-circles  in  couplings  where  a  heavy  cone  is  used. 

This  coupling  consists  of  four  pieces ;  its  plan  of  construction  being  plainly  shown  in 
above  cut.  In  attaching  the  coupling,  where  great  strain  is  required,  the  cones  should 
be  driven  up  in  addition  to  the  power  of  the  nut.  To  remove,  turn  off  the  ring-nut  and 
drive  a  wedge  between  the  flanges. 

These  couplings  are  bored  to  fit  U.  S.  standard  calliper  gauges,  and  consequently 
we  are  able  to  duplicate  any  parts  of  shafting,  pulleys,  hangers,  or  couplings  at  any 
subsequent  time,  and  guarantee  perfect  fits. 

They  hold  the  shafts  perfectly  secure,  are  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order,  and  in  the 
numerous  large  establishments  where  we  have  furnished  them  they  have  not  once  failed 
to  give  entire  satisfaction. 

In  addition  to  the  sizes  enumerated  hereinafter,  we  are  prepared  to  furnish  our  patent 
couplings,  adapted  for  2,  ly^,  2^,  and  3-inch  cold  rolled  shafting,  at  .same  prices  as  the 
corresponding  sizes  for  turned  shafting. 

Sizes  of  Patent  Compression  Couplings. 

11^       11^       2fe       2/e       2}J       2}^       3/e       3/6  in.  diameter. 


12  J.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


DROP  HANGER. 


Patent  Self- Adjusting  Pivot  Hangers. 

The  above  engravings  clearly  show  the  advantages  of  our  patent  self-adjusting  pivot 
drop  and  post  hangers,  which  are  so  constructed  as  to  secure  the  greatest  strength. 

They  are  conceded  to  be  the  most  perfect  adjustable  hangers  in  use,  having  heavy 
bearings  pivoted  in  all  directions,  so  that  the  shaft  can  be  adjusted  vertically  or  laterally  by 
means  of  screws,  independent  of  the  hanger  plate.  This  enables  the  shaft,  when  out  of 
line,  to  be  almost  instantly  adjusted  without  moving  the  hangers. 

The  bearings  are  self-lubricating,  and  drilled  to  receive  oil  globes,  and  will  save  nearly 
four-fifths  the  usual  cost  of  oil  over  the  old  style  of  hangers.  These  several  improve- 
ments are  found  only  in  the  J.  A.  Fay  &  Co.  hangers,  and  are  secured  to  us  by  letters 
patent. 

By  reason  of  their  peculiar  construction,  and  having  added  special  tools  for  making 
them,  we  are  enabled  to  furnish  these  patent  self-oiling  adjustable  hangers  with  our 
patent  couplings,  pulleys,  and  shafting  at  the  lowest  market  prices. 

We  can  furnish  the  following  sizes  of  these  hangers,  viz :  drop  hangers,  with  22, 
18,  16,  13,  and  11  inch  drop;  post  hangers  for  3l§,  3,'«,  3^^,  2'4  2i;,  H„  2^6,  shafts. 


Rigid  Journal  Boxes  or  Pillow  Blocks. 

These  boxes  are  designed  for  use  where  a  line  of  shafting  is  to  be  placed  on  the  floor 
or  under  the  floor  on  beams,  or  in  any  position  where  a  support  can  be  furnished.  They 
can  be  used  in  many  positions  where  the  drop  or  post  hanger  would  not  be  practical. 
They  are  furnished  with  the  same  lubricating  device  as  our  drop  and  post  hanger  boxes, 
and  have  large  oil  cups  on  the  caps  to  receive  tallow.  They  are  furnished  for  the  same 
sizes  of  shafts  as  the  drop  and  post  hangers,  viz:  1},^,  11^,  2i;,  2/«,  21J,  2}^,  3^6,  3^6,  3}^ 
diameter. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


13 


Straight  Arm  Pulleys. 

Three  forms  of  our  pulleys  are  represented  in  the  above  engraving,  viz  :  with  double 
arms  for  heavy  main  drivers;  made  in  halves  for  appliance  without  removing  the  shafts; 
and  with  single  arms  for  all  ordinary  requirements. 

Our  pulleys  are  constructed  from  new  patterns  of  improved  design,  made  from  our 
own  formula  for  correct  proportion  and  weight,  have  straight  arms,  are  of  symmetrical 
shape,  and  especially  adapted  for  fast-running  wood-working  machinery. 

They  are  made  from  the  best  quality  of  iron,  are  bored  to  accurately  fit  shafts  of 
standard  gauges,  perfectly  balanced,  turned,  and  set-screwed  ;  and  the  metal  being  distri- 
buted in  proper  proportion,  are  unequaled  as  regards  accuracy  and  strength. 

Pulleys  of  each  size  are  made  with  different  sizes  of  hubs,  according  to  the  diameter 
of  the  shaft  upon  which  they  are  to  run,  thus  avoiding  superfluous  weight  of  metal  when 
designed  for  shafts  of  small  diameter. 

Pulleys  for  shifting  belts  should  have  a  flat  face,  and  rounding  face  for  stationery 
belts.  In  ordering  pulleys,  the  diameter,  width  of  face,  and  exact  size  of  bore  should  be 
stated ;  also,  whether  they  are  wanted  with  flat  or  rounding  face. 


List  of  Sizes  of  Pulleys. 


Diam. 

Fac3. 

Diam. 

Face. 

Diam. 

Face. 

Diam. 

Face. 

Diam. 

Face. 

Diam. 

Face. 

6 

3'/> 

10 

4K 

15 

8>^ 

20 

14>4 

28 

^Y 

1  36 

10>^ 

6 

4^ 

10 

hYz 

}5 

10>^ 

22 

^Yz 

28 

6>^ 

36 

12>^ 

6 

^% 

10 

^Y2 

lo 

12>^ 

22 

^Y 

28 

SY 
lOY 

12Y 

1  36 

14>^ 

6 

^Yz 

10 

8>^ 

16 

3K 

22 

^Y 

28 

1  36 

16>^ 

6 

8>^ 

10 

10>^ 

16 

^Y 

22 

6^2 

28 

1  38 

SYz 

7 

10 

12>^ 

16 

hYz 

22 

SYz 

28 

UY 

38 

lOY 

7 

^% 

12 

3>^ 

16 

^Y 

22 

lOY 

30 

4K 

38 

nY 

7 

h% 

12 

^Y 

16 

^Y 

22 

12Y 

30 

^Y 

38 

UYz 

7 

^% 

12 

5>^ 

16 

lOY 

22 

UY 

30 

SY 

38 

IQY 

7 

i  12 

16 

i^Y 
^Y 

24 

^Y 

30 

lOY 

40 

SY 

8 

3K 

i  12 

8>^ 

18 

24 

4^ 

30 

12Y 

'  40 

lOY 

8 

i  12 

lOYz 

18 

^Y 

24 

QY 

30 

UYz 

40 

12Y 

8 

I  12 

nYz 

18 

5>^ 

QY 

24 

SY 

32 

QY 

40 

UYz 

8 

14 

SYz 

18 

24 

lOY 

32 

SY 

40 

iQY 

8 

8K 

14 

4K 

18 

SY 

24 

^2Y 

32 

loY 

42 

^Y 

8 

lOYz 

14 

^Y 

18 

lOY 

24 

UY 

32 

12Y 

42 

SY 

9 

^Yz 

14 

QY 

18 

12Y 

24 

I6K 

3'^ 

UYz 

42 

lOY 

9 

14 

SY 

20 

'^Y 

26 

4^ 

34 

sYz 

42 

12Y 

9 

hYz 

14 

lOY 

20 

^Y 

26 

^Y 

34 

lOY 

42 

UYz 

9 

14 

12/2 

20 

hY 

26 

QY 

34 

viYz 

42 

i^Y 

9 

8K 

!  15 

SY 

20 

(^Y 

26 

SY 

34 

UYz 

9 

15 

^Y 

20 

SY 

26 

lOY 

34 

I6K 

9 

VlY^ 

15 

hY 

20 

lOY 

26 

12Y 

36 

6^ 

10 

^Yz 

!  15 

^Yz 

20 

Wz 

26 

UYz 

36 

14 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Directions  for  Laying  Out  and  Ordering  Shafting. 

In  the  above  illustration  — 

Fig.  1  shows  proper  relative  position  of  couplings  and  bearings. 
Fig.  2  shows  sectional  view  of  our  patent  couplings. 
Fig.  3  shows  our  turned  collars. 

In  laying  out  lines  of  shafting,  the  first  section  should  be  larger  than  the  remainder 
of  the  shaft;  this  rule  is  to  be  considered  with  relation  to  the  length  of  the  line.  The 
distance  between  the  bearings  that  receive  the  motive  power  should  be  as  short  as  con- 
venience of  placing  them  will  allow. 

By  placing  the  bearings  close  together  on  the  first  length,  it  will  be  necessary  to  have 
three  bearings  for  that  length,  unless  it  is  very  short,  and  the  larger  shaft  should  be  turned 
down  on  the  end  to  receive  the  coupling  fitting  the  smaller  size. 

The  couplings  should  be  placed  so  that  their  centers  are  the  length  of  the  coupling 
from  the  end  of  the  bearing — this  is  for  convenience  of  removal  of  the  couplings. 

The  bearings  should  not  be  more  than  seven  or  eight  feet  apart,  and  should  be  rigidly 
supported,  to  insure  perfect  alignment  of  the  shaft;  the  collars,  of  which  there  should  be 
at  least  two  on  the  line,  should  be  on  the  side  of  the  hanger  next  outside  of  the  last 
coupling  on  each  end  of  the  line  of  shafting,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1. 

In  ordering  the  lengths  of  shaft,  they  should  be  made  to  conform  to  the  above  con- 
ditions, or  a  diagram  may  be  sent  showing  the  position  of  the  bearings,  and  the  lengths 
will  be  made  in  accordance  with  such  instructions. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


15 


On  Selecting  and  Placing  Line  Shafting. 

In  the  purchase  of  a  Hne  of  shafting,  it  is  of  paramount  importance  that  the  habihty 
of  wrought  iron  shafts  to  spring  when  improperly  weighted,  inadequately  supported,  or  of 
insufficient  size,  should  not  be  overlooked. 

Shafting  should  be  of  a  size  proportional  to  the  amount  of  work  imposed  upon  it, 
and  the  weight  of  the  pulleys  it  is  intended  to  bear,  and  should  have  a  sufficient  number 
of  bearings  to  insure  its  rigidity.    Otherwise  it  will  be  liable  to  spring,  requiring  frequent 
fining  up,  and  causing  trouble  and  expense,  which  will  more  than  balance  the  first  saving 
in  cost  of  a  light  and  cheap  line  of  shafting. 

Where  practicable,  bearings  should  be  placed  at  distances  not  to  exceed  seven  or 
eight  feet  from  each  other,  and  the  main  driving  pulleys  should  be  placed  between  two 
bearings  not  further  apart  than  four  or  five  feet ;  and  the  different  lengths  of  the  whole 
line  of  shaft  should  be  so  estimated  that,  when  coupled  together,  each  coupling  will  come 
close  to  a  bearing,  as  shown  in  the  diagram  on  the  opposite  page. 

In  regard  to  the  placing  of  pulleys,  the  usual  and  safest  practical  method  is  to  place 
the  heaviest  strains  nearest  the  bearings,  leaving  the  unsupported  parts  to  the  lighter 
strains.  The  pulleys  should  be  turned  and  balanced,  and  contain  the  right  amount  of 
metal  in  the  right  place. 

Two  or  more  collars  should  be  placed  on  each  line  inside  of  the  bearings  nearest  the 
coupHngs  at  each  end,  to  prevent  any  end  motion  of  the  shaft.  Bearings  should  be  so 
constructed  as  to  afford  a  constant  supply  of  oil,  and  should  be  pivoted  for  lateral  and 
vertical  adjustments. 

A  line  of  shafting  fulfilling  these  conditions  will  give  entire  satisfaction  at  all  times, 
and  require  little  or  no  repairing  or  replacing. 


16 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Bevel  Flange  Loose  Pulleys, 

PATENTED  SEPT.    25,  1877. 

We  have  recently  patented  the  arrangement  of  the  tight  and  loose  pulleys  shown  in 
the  above  illustration,  and  desire  to  call  attention  to  the  advantages  to  be  derived  from 
the  method  of  their  construction,  and  the  economy  in  the  wearing  of  both  the  loose  pulley 
and  the  belt  in  their  use.  In  the  use  of  tight  and  loose  pulleys  of  the  same  size,  the  ten- 
sion of  the  belt  is  constant,  and  consequently  the  pressure  produced  upon  the  bearing  of 
the  loose  pulley  is  so  great  as  to  make  it  practically  impossible  to  keep  the  shaft  properly 
oiled  to  prevent  the  results  of  friction  upon  the  pulley  and  shaft. 

This  is  especially  true  of  loose  pulleys  used  on  wood-working  machinery,  owing  to 
the  high  speeds  and  great  power  required  to  operate  the  machines  to  which  they  may  be 
attached.  The  arrangement  shown  above  entirely  obviates  these  difficulties.  The  loose 
pulley  is  made  smaller  in  radius  than  the  tight  pulley,  having  a  beveled  flange  on  the  side 
toward  the  tight  pulley,  to  guide  the  belt  easily  from  one  to  the  other. 

The  loose  pulley  being  less  in  diameter  than  the  tight  one,  relieves  the  belt  from  all 
strain  while  running  on  the  loose  pulley,  and  reduces  the  friction  on  the  shaft  of  the 
loose  pulley  to  that  resulting  from  the  weight  of  the  belt  only.  This  reduction  of  the 
amount  of  friction  on  the  shaft  from  the  pressure  of  the  loose  pulley,  relieves  the  surface 
from  the  crushing  effect  to  such  an  extent  that  the  oil  remains  in  the  bearings,  and  the 
pulley  remains  in  good  condition  with  an  ordinary  amount  of  attention. 

The  benefits  obtained  by  the  belt  are  of  value,  as,  in  relieving  it  from  the  strain  con- 
sequent upon  a  continued  tension,  the  belt  is  given  an  opportunity  to  recover  its  elastic 
force,  thus  preventing  the  belt  from  so  soon  reaching  the  limit  of  elasticity,  as  after  it  has 
reached  that  point  it  deteriorates  very  rapidly.  The  belt  is  easier  moved  from  the  tight 
to  the  loose  pulley,  thus  making  it  more  easy  to  stop  the  machine  when  under  full  motion. 

We  are  prepared  to  furnish  any  size  that  may  be  wanted  to  run  either  on  new  or  old 
machines.  Parties  ordering  will  please  give  diameter,  and  width  of  face,  and  size  bore  of 
pulleys,  when  we  can  send  the  proper  sizes  ready  to  apply.  All  pulleys  warranted  to  give 
satisfaction. 

List  of  Sizes  and  Prices  of  Patent  Loose  Pulleys. 


Diam. 

Face. 

Price. 

Diam. 

Face. 

Price. 

Diam. 

Face. 

Price. 

Diam. 

Face. 

Price. 

Diam. 

Face. 

Price. 

6 

$3  68 

1  12 

hYz 

$5  50 

16 

10>^ 

$9  00 

~~22"" 

SY 

$11  10 

26 

12^ 

$17  15 

6 

5 

4  15 

12 

6K 

5  85 

18 

^Y 

6  75 

22 

lOY 

12  80 

26 

14>^ 

19  25 

6 

6 

4  28 

12 

8K 

6  60 

18 

^Y 

8  25 

22 

12Y 

14  05 

28 

(iY 

13  30 

8 

4  00 

i  12 

x^Yz 

7  30 

18 

^Y 

9  85 

22 

UY 

15  30 

28 

SY 

14  30 

8 

4  25 

14 

^Y 

5  65 

18 

lOY 

10  37 

24 

4M 

9  50 

28 

lOY 

15  80 

8 

4  35 

i  14 

^Y2 

6  20 

18 

12Y 

10  90 

24 

^Y 

10  30 

28 

12Y 

18  40 

8 

^Yz 

4  50 

14 

QYz 

6  90 

20 

4K 

7  80 

24 

SY 

11  90 

28 

UY 

21  50 

10 

4  68 

14 

^Y 

7  50 

20 

QY 

9  85 

24 

lOY 

13  45 

30 

^Y 

14  50 

10 

^Y^ 

4  84 

i  14 

lOY 

8  35 

20 

SY 

11  10 

24 

12Y 

15  00 

30 

SY 

17  20 

10 

5  00 

16 

^Y 

6  70 

20 

lOY 

11  92 

24 

UY 

17  80 

30 

lOY 

19  30 

10 

5  50 

16 

6Y 

7  00 

20 

12Y 

12  75 

26 

QY 

10  90 

30 

12Y 

21  40 

10 

8>^ 

6  00 

16 

^Y 

7  35 

22 

^Y 

8  30 

26 

SY 

12  70 

30 

UY 

24  60 

12 

5  10 

1  16 

SYz 

8  00 

22 

QY 

9  70 

26 

lOY 

15  00 

OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


17 


Surface  Planing  Machines. 

These  machines  are  designed  for  producing  planed  surfaces,  and  for  reducing  material 
to  any  desired  dimensions.  They  are  the  primary  machines  in  wood  finishing,  and  are 
indispensable.  The  styles  and  sizes  of  these  are  numerous,  as  the  work  they  are  intended 
to  do  is  of  great  variety.  The  methods  of  feeding  the  timber  and  the  methods  of  using 
the  cutters  vary  with  the  character  of  the  work  to  be  done. 

The  Daniels  Planer  has  a  horizontal  arm  with  a  cutter  fixed  in  each  end  of  it,  the  arm 
revolving  over  the  timber  as  it  is  carried  on  a  table  driven  by  appropriate  gearing. 

The  Dimension  Planer  has  a  table  upon  which  the  timber  is  placed,  but  the  cutting  is 
performed  by  a  rotating  cylinder  carrying  two  or  more  knives.  This  class  of  planers  is 
designed  for  heavy  timbers,  or  combined  work,  where  heavy  work  is  to  be  done  occa- 
sionally, they  being  also  adapted  for  lighter  work. 

These  machines  are  designed  for  trimming  and  squaring  up  lumber,  or  timber  where 
it  is  desirable  to  have  it  perfectly  out  of  wind.  In  all  the  lighter  and  cheaper  machines 
the  feeding  is  done  by  rollers,  and  in  the  heavier  machines,  after  the  Farrar  design,  the 
feeding  is  done  by  an  endless  revolving  apron,  which,  presenting  a  large  surface  to  the 
lumber,  makes  this  one  of  the  strongest  powers  for  feeding  in  use  on  this  class  of  planing 
machines. 

The  surface  planers,  hereafter  more  particularly  described,  have  been  designed  to 
perform  each  its  special  class  of  work,  in  the  most  perfect  manner.  In  the  care  taken  in 
their  erection,  and  the  improvements  incorporated  into  them  for  the  production  of  the 
best  work  with  the  least  trouble  to  the  operator,  it  has  been  our  study  to  produce 
machines  which  will  be  in  all  particulars  what  the  requirements  of  wood-manufacturers 
may  demand. 

The  capacity  of  these  machines  is  from  the  thinnest  boards  to  eight  inches  thick,  and 
from  twenty  to  thirty  inches  wide  on  one  or  both  sides;  the  largest  surfacers  being  strong 
enough  in  their  construction  to  endure  the  strains  incident  to  planing  the  heaviest  lumber 
used. 

Considering  the  probable  work  to  be  executed,  a  selection  can  be  made  from  these 
machines  to  give  entire  satisfaction  to  all  users  of  them,  either  for  thin  or  short  stuff, 
hard  or  soft,  green  or  dry;  and  for  the  heavier  class  of  manufacturers,  who  use  the  strongest 
machines,  they  will  perform  their  work  without  failure,  even  upon  snowy  or  icy  material, 
having  been  thoroughly  tested  and  not  found  deficient  in  any  particular. 

Different  styles  and  sizes  will  be  found  illustrated  on  the  following  pages,  and 
appended  to  each  specific  description,  with  details  of  sizes  and  capacity  for  work,  to  which 
we  invite  the  careful  examination  of  those  desiring  to  purchase,  as  the  wants  of  almost 
every  kind  of  wood  producer  will  be  found  to  have  been  fully  anticipated. 

Special  surfacers  are  made  to  order  from  the  heavier  planers  and  matchers,  by 
leaving  off  the  matching  attachments  and  parts  for  that  work.  These  machines  are  of 
special  utility  where  there  is  first  class  work  to  be  done  in  great  quantities,  their  great 
weight  and  strength  enabling  them  to  endure  the  continuous  strain  incident  to  heavy 
work. 


18 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


19 


Improved  Daniels  or  Traverse  Planing  Machine. 

(with  wood  framing.) 

The  Daniels  Planer  has  the  peculiarity  of  cutting  the  surface  at  right  angles  to  the 
grain  of  the  wood ;  and  for  heavy  timbers  which  are  to  be  trued  and  squared  there  is  no 
machine  superior  in  its  operation,  the  manner  of  cutting  being  such  that  the  w^ood  is  not 
strained  or  displaced,  and  a  perfectly  true  and  straight  face  is  produced  by  one  cut. 
The  material  to  be  surfaced  is  laid  upon  a  table,  and  held  in  place  by  dogs  or  clamps  at 
each  end,  and  carried  under  the  cutter  arm  by  the  action  of  the  table  moving  in  either 
direction. 

The  feed  motion  is  convenient  and  under  the  control  of  the  operator,  who  can 
change  it  from  fast  to  slow,  and  reverse  the  movement  of  the  table  instantly,  the 
same  levers  being  used  for  starting,  reversing,  or  stopping  the  table.  The  cutting  is 
done  while  the  table  is  traveling  in  either  direction  ;  and  by  means  of  the  crank  attached 
to  the  feed  pinion  the  table  can  be  moved  in  either  direction  by  hand. 

The  cutters  are  placed  in  an  arm,  which  revolves  in  a  horizontal  plane,  the  cutters 
being  easily  removed  for  sharpening  or  adjustment. 

A  dead  weight  is  furnished  when  desired,  for  the  purpose  of  preventing  the  lighter 
timber  from  being  lifted  by  the  action  of  the  cutters.  Rolls  are  sometimes  used  where 
thin  boards  are  to  be  planed;  they  press  the  lumber  closely  to  the  table,  preventing  any 
irregularities  from  warps  or  twists.  They  are  easily  put  on  or  taken  off,  and  are  essential 
on  some  classes  of  work. 

This  machine  is  recommended  for  use  in  railway,  bridge,  wagon,  or  furniture  works, 
where  timbers  are  to  be  dressed,  or  lumber  is  to  be  trued  up  and  taken  out  of  wind. 

The  wooden  framing  of  this  machine  is  glued  up,  and  made  from  the  best  material  to 
be  procured  for  the  purpose.  The  table  runs  upon  planed  cast-iron  ways,  which  give  it 
perfect  guidance,  and  insures  straight  work. 

The  pinion  that  drives  the  table  runs  in  the  top  of  the  rack ;  the  force  being  down- 
ward keeps  the  table  in  its  position,  with  no  tendency  to  lift  into  the  cutters.  The  rack 
is  under  the  table,  and  is  perforated,  which  prevents  the  circulation  of  shavings  in  it. 

The  dog  or  clamp  is  arranged  at  the  head  of  the  table,  so  that  varying  lengths  of 
lumber  can  be  placed  on  the  table ;  and  the  tightening  screw  is  worked  by  a  hand  crank. 

The  tail  clamp  is  adjustable  to  the  lengths  of  timber,  and  is  held  in  position  by 
hooks  fastening  into  racks  on  each  side  of  the  whole  length  of  the  table,  and  require  no 
other  fastening.    There  are  also  side  clamps  to  the  table. 

The  main  spindle  is  of  steel,  of  large  diameter,  and  with  the  cutter  arm  and  bearing 
frame  is  raised  and  lowered  by  means  of  a  crank  connected  with  the  raising  screw.  The 
cutter  arm  is  made  of  malleable  or  wrought  iron,  of  such  form  as  to  make  the  least  noise 
while  revolving,  and  will  cut  the  full-rated  width  under  the  dead  weight. 

All  the  working  parts  are  strong  and  well  fitted,  and  embody  our  latest  improve- 
ments, every  precaution  being  taken  to  make  this  one  of  the  most  perfect  machines  for 
truirg  up,  planing  and  surfacing  out  of  wind. 

The  dead  weight  and  rolls  are  furnished  at  a  small  additional  cost  when  wanted. 
The  machines  are  constructed  of  any  length  and  width  desired. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  counter-shaft  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  five- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  500  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


21 


Improved  Daniels  or  Traverse  Planing  Machine. 

(with  iron  framing). 

The  Machine  illustrated  and  described  on  the  preceding  pages  is  the  same  in  operation 
and  appearance  of  the  work  produced  as  this,  but  the  details  of  construction  are  materially 
different,  although  they  each  embody  the  same  principles. 

This  machine  is  constructed  entirely  of  iron  and  steel,  excepting  the  face  of  the 
table,  which  is  of  yellow  pine.  The  sides  of  the  machine  are  cast  in  sections,  according 
to  the  length. 

The  ways  upon  which  the  table  slides  are  cast  with  the  sides,  and  planed  to  fit  the 
slides  of  the  table,  which  are  continuous,  and  form  a  perfect  bearing  at  all  points. 

The  supports  for  the  cutter  head  and  spindle  are  constructed  in  a  very  rigid  manner, 
the  arrangement  of  the  levers  for  starting,  reversing,  or  stopping  the  motion  of  the  table 
with  the  hand  wheel  for  raising  and  lowering  the  cutters,  all  are  within  easy  reach  of 
the  operator,  and  the  tab^e  can  be  moved  by  means  of  a  hand  wheel  when  the  machine  is 
not  in  operation. 

This  machine,  being  especially  strong,  is  adapted  to  the  purposes  of  railway,  bridge 
and  car  builders,  mill  wrights,  carriage  and  cabinet  manufacturers,  where  lumber  or  timber 
is  to  be  taken  out  of  wind,  or  reduced  to  square  dimensions. 

There  are  several  important  improvements  in  this  machine  over  any  hitherto  offered 
to  the  public,  viz  : 

The  improved  feed  works  with  three  changes  of  feed,  admitting  of  planing  while  the 
table  moves  in  either  direction. 

The  rack  being  under  the  table,  and  its  pinion  vertical,  there  is  no  danger  of 
lodgement  of  shavings,  nor  tendency  to  raise  the  table  by  the  force  required  to  move  it. 

The  main  driving  belt  is  not  a  quarter-twist.  The  counter-shaft  is  attached  over  the 
machine  to  the  building,  and  parallel  to  the  main  shaft,  giving  a  straight  belt,  the  driving 
belt  for  the  cutter  acting  at  a  right  angle  to  the  counter-shaft ;  by  this  means  the  old 
vertical  counter-shafts  are  entirely  avoided,  with  all  the  annoyance  of  quarter-twist  belt,  and 
the  tendency  of  the  main  belt  to  draw  the  machine  out  of  line. 

The  clamp  for  holding  the  timber  is  perfect  in  its  working,  and  is  furnished  with  all 
machines.  All  the  improvements  are  added,  and  every  precaution  is  taken  to  make  this 
machine  as  perfect  as  possible  for  the  purposes  for  which  it  is  designed. 

It  is  supplied  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  twelve  inches  in 
diameter,  five-inch  face,  and  should  make  500  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


23 


Combination  Dimension  Planing  Machine. 

(WITH   FEED   ROLL  ATTACHMENT.) 

This  combination  of  the  travehng  bed  planer  with  the  feeding  rollers  of  the  fixed 
bed  machines,  will  be  found  to  be  one  of  great  utility.  The  time  consumed  from  chang- 
ing from  one  method  of  planing  to  the  other  is  very  short,  and  the  efficiency  of  its  action 
is  perfect. 

The  machine  is  adapted  to  the  use  of  car  and  agricultural  implement  builders,  cabinet 
and  carriage,  organ  and  piano-forte  manufacturers,  etc. 

The  surface  produced  by  this  machine  is  similar  to  that  of  the  ordinary  surface  planer, 
having  a  horizontal  rotating  cylinder,  and  is  perfect  enough  to  be  used  for  glue  jointing. 

The  material  to  be  planed  is  placed  upon  a  movable  platen  and  passed  underneath  the 
cylinder  by  a  rack  and  pinion  feeding  arrangement. 

The  cylinder  is  supported  in  its  frame  upon  two  standards  having  planed  surfaces, 
upon  which  the  cylinder  frame  is  moved  vertically,  and  at  an  angle,  to  retain  the  belts 
at  the  same  tension.  There  are  two  screws  for  raising  the  cylinder  frame,  which  are 
operated  simultaneously  by  means  of  a  hand-wheel. 

There  is  a  pressure  roller  at  the  front  and  back  of  the  cylinder,  which  holds  the 
lumber  solidly  to  the  platen,  or  they  can  be  lifted  up  so  that  there  will  be  no  pressure, 
which  is  the  condition  when  planing  dimension  stuff  or  lumber  out  of  wind. 

The  machine  when  fitted  with  the  feed  roller  attachment  for  surface  dressing,  combines 
the  essential  peculiarities  of  both  the  Daniels  and  the  Woodworth  surfacing  machines,  viz. 
of  surface  dressing  as  fast  as  the  Woodworth,  and  planing  out  of  wind  three  times  as  fast 
as  the  Daniels  Planer. 

The  machine  is  constructed  to  suit  any  length  of  stuff  which  it  is  desired  to  work, 
and  the  cylinder  has  a  vertical  adjustment  on  planed  standards,  sufficient  to  allow  stuff  up 
to  twenty-four  inches  thick  to  be  dressed  out  of  wind. 

The  platen  is  furnished  with  the  necessary  dogging  apparatus  for  securely  holding  the 
stuff,  so  constructed  that  with  one  motion  any  length  of  stuff  is  firmly  secured  to  the  platen. 

The  feed  rolls,  when  not  in  use,  are  quickly  moved  back  out  of  the  way  on  planed 
slides.  The  rolls  are  connected  by  expansion  gearing,  and  take  in  lumber  up  to  five 
inches  in  thickness,  and  when  used  for  surface  planing,  the  table  is  placed  with  its  end 
under  the  cylinder  and  pressure  rollers,  and  has  a  heavy  plate  for  the  lumber  to  pass  over 
as  it  is  being  planed. 

The  feed  works  for  the  platen  have  three  speeds  for  forward  motion,  and  a  quick 
return  movement  so  arranged  that  the  platen  is  relieved  of  all  shocks  from  sudden  changes 
of  direction.  The  reversing  lever  for  the  return  movement  is  in  the  most  convenient 
position  for  the  operator,  and  is  retained  in  its  place  by  a  friction  clamp. 

The  cylinder  is  lipped  with  steel,  carries  three  knives,  and  runs  in  long  patent  self- 
oiling  bearings,  and  the  parts  most  liable  to  wear  are  constructed  of  iron  and  steel.  The 
feed  works  are  protected  from  dust,  and  it  is  made  throughout  in  the  most  durable  and 
substantial  manner. 

Two  classes  of  this  machine  are  made  for  heavy  and  light  work,  and  are  offered  to 
the  public  in  the  confident  belief  that  they  will  be  found  unequaled  for  the  purposes 
intended. 

The  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and 
should  make  900  revolutions  per  minute. 


24 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUh 


No.  2 

Centennial  Surface  Planing  Machine. 

This  machine  is  made  to  surface  16,  20,  and  24  inches  wide  and  is  intended  for  h'ght 
work,  viz  :  panel  stuff,  cigar  box  lumber,  and  the  general  requirements  of  sash  and  door, 
carriage,  box  shops,  etc. 

In  designing  the  machine,  we  have  endeavored  to  meet  the  wants  of  all  the  above- 
named  classes,  and  produce  a  machine  which  will,  with  very  little  power,  surface  in  a 
superior  manner  all  kinds  of  hard  and  soft  wood  lumber. 

The  frame  being  cast  in  one  solid  piece,  secures  great  strength  and  solidity  over  the 
old  way  of  bolting  together.  The  cylinder  is  made  of  wrought  iron,  with  steel  lips  ;  the 
journals  are  long,  of  large  diameter,  and  run  in  patent  self-oiling  bearings,  lined  with  the 
very  best  lining  material  that  can  be  procured. 

There  are  pressure  bars  on  each  side  for  planing  thin  or  short  stuff  The  cylinder 
boxes  being  cast  to  the  side  of  the  machine,  makes  them  exceedingly  rigid  and  strong 
and  not  liable  to  vibration  or  disarrangement.  It  can  be  belted  either  from  a  countershaft 
placed  on  the  floor  or  overhead,  as  may  be  most  convenient. 

The  arrangement  for  changing  the  machine  from  different  thicknesses  is  very  simple. 
The  turning  of  a  single  hand-wheel  adjusts  the  cutter-head  and  feed  rolls  together,  pre- 
serving the  same  relative  positions  with  the  bed-plate,  which  is  not  always  the  case  where 
the  rolls  and  cylinder  have  independent  adjustments.  An  index  gauge  shows  the  thick- 
ness to  be  planed. 

The  feeding  rolls  are  large  and  heavily  geared  ;   the  table  or  platen  is  long,  provided 
with  friction  rolls,  and  every  part  is  built  in  the  most  thorough  and  substantial  manner,  all 
joints  being  planed,  holes  reamed,  and  bolts  turned.    The  countershaft,  when  ordered, 
will  have  tight  and  loose  pulleys  ten  inches  in  diameter,  and  four-inch  face,  and  should 
>ake  900  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


25 


No.  3 

Large  Surface  Planing  Machine. 

(single  or  double  belted.) 

This  machine  is  made  to  surface  from  one-eighth  to  five  or  six  inches  thick,  and 
from  twenty-four  to  twenty-eight  inches  wide,  as  may  be  ordered,  and  is  intended  espe- 
cially for  cabinet  shops,  sash,  door  and  box  makers,  and  for  planing  hard  wood,  either  thin 
or  short,  and  produces  perfectly  smooth  surfaces. 

This  machine  is  capable  of  doing  its  work  in  the  most  thorough  mannner,  being 
built  entirely  of  iron  and  steel,  heavy  and  substantial  in  all  its  parts,  the  proportions 
being  such  as  to  insure  the  greatest  durability  and  strength. 

The  rolls  for  feeding  are  large  and  strongly  geared,  with  two  changes  of  feed,  easily 
regulated  and  under  control  of  the  operator,  and  derive  their  pressure  from  weighted 
levers  and  springs,  folded  transversely  and  out  of  the  way  of  the  operator,  and  always 
reliable.  The  ends  of  the  table  are  adjustable  and  can  be  raised  vertically,  reducing  the 
machine  much  in  size  when  not  in  use. 

The  table  is  always  retained  parallel  with  the  cylinder  at  any  point  it  may  be  placed, 
and  quickly  adjusted  either  while  operating  or  not  by  the  hand  wheel  which  moves  the 
raising  screws.  The  cylinder  has  three  cutters  with  steel  lips,  and  has  a  flexible  pressure 
bar  to  prevent  any  tearing  out  in  cross-grained  lumber.  It  is  made  to  belt  on  one  or  both 
sides,  as  may  be  ordered,  usually  the  former.  The  ^bearings  are  long,  self-oiling,  lined  with 
very  best  metal,  and  perfectly  fitted  by  scraping. 

The  cylinder  pulley  is  five  inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make 
3,600  revolutions  per  minute. 


26  /.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Hand  and  Power  Feed  Surface  Planer. 

This  machine  is  a  combination  of  the  power  surfacing  machine  and  the  hand  planer, 
and  designed  to  save  the  expense  of  two  separate  machines  in  furniture  and  cabinet 
and  coffin  manufactories,  etc.,  wherever  the  hand  planer  and  jointer  has  been  found  of 
service  and  value.  Superior  capacity,  economy  of  shop  room,  facility  of  adjustment  are 
among  its  chief  characteristics. 

When  arranged  for  planing  under  the  cylinder  by  feed  rollers,  as  shown  above,  it  will 
surface  long  and  short  pieces  up  to  24  inches  wide,  and  from  \  inch  to  6  inches  thick. 
The  feed  rolls  are  of  large  diameter  and  strongly  geared,  ensuring  a  positive  feed. 

The  cylinder  has  three  knives,  arranged  at  an  angle,  to  give  a  shearing  cut,  avoiding, 
in  connection  with  the  flexible  pressure  bar  before  the  cut,  any  tendency  to  tear  in  cross- 
grained  lumber,  and  produces  a  very  smooth  surface.  The  bed  has  a  vertical  adjustment 
to  suit  different  thicknesses  of  lumber.  The  end  tables  are  planed  perfectly  true,  and  have 
both  lateral  and  vertical  adjustment.  The  feed  is  convenient  to  the  operator,  and  governed 
by  a  hand  lever  and  belt  tightener. 

When  arranged  for  planing  over  the  cylinder  by  hand,  as  shown  on  the  next  page, 
the  bonnet  and  pressure-bar  are  removed,  and  the  end  tables  elevated  to  the  proper  height 
b}'  means  of  a  hand  wheel,  requiring  only  about  three  minutes  time  to  make  the  changes. 
These  end  tables  have  a  lateral  adjustment  in  planed  grooves  to  regulate  the  opening  over 
the  cylinder.  The  cylinder  pulley  is  five  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should 
make  4,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


27 


Patent  Hand  and  Power  Feed  Surface  Planer. 

The  above  machine  is  the  same  as  that  illustrated  on  the  preceding  page,  con- 
verted into  a  twenty-four-inch  planer  for  planing  out  of  wind,  surfacing  straight  or  tapering 
work,  jointing,  chamfering,  beveling,  making  glue  joints,  squaring  up  bed  posts,  table  legs, 
newels,  etc.,  and  performing  all  the  functions  of  the  ordinary  hand  planer. 

The  cylinder  carries  three  knives  arranged  at  an  angle  to  give  a  shearing  cut,  revolves 
in  self-oiling  boxes,  and  is  provided  with  steel  lips,  whereby  very  smooth  work  is  produced. 

A  fence  is  furnished  with  each  machine  for  use  in  hand  planing,  which  can  be  adjusted 
across  the  table  or  to  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees  to  the  face  of  the  table. 

The  machine  is  constructed  on  a  strong  and  substantial  column,  is  fitted  in  every  part 
in  the  most  accurate  manner,  receives  a  thorough  practical  test  before  leaving  the  shop, 
effects  a  great  saving  of  labor,  and  for  the  purposes  for  which  it  is  intended  we  guarantee 
it  to  give  entire  satisfaction. 

The  cylinder  pulley  is  five  inches  in  diameter,  five-inch  face,  and  should  make  4,000 
revolutions  per  minute. 


28 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  4 

Improved  Double  Roll  Surface  Planing  Machine. 

(with  upper  and  lower  driven  feed  rolls,  chip  breakers,  etc.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY.  29 


No.  4 

Improved  Double  Roll  Surface  Planing  Machine. 

(with  upper  and  lower  driven  feed  rolls,  chip  breaker,  etc.) 

The  surface  planing  machine  illustrated  on  the  opposite  page  has  been  recently 
designed  by  us,  and  intended  for  general  classes  of  work,  both  light  and  heavy.  It  con- 
tains many  improvements  which  are  essential  in  the  operation  of  surfacing  wood. 

The  capacity  of  the  machine  is  to  four  inches  in  thickness  and  to  twenty-four  inches 
in  width. 

It  will  plane  perfectly  hard  or  soft  wood,  and  is  adapted  to  the  wants  of  carriage  and 
agricultural  implement  makers,  wagon  and  car  works,  and  general  surfacing  in  other 
establishments. 

The  column  or  support  of  the  machine  is  constructed  with  sides  and  ends  of  continu- 
ous plates  of  cast  iron.  The  bearings  for  the  cylinder  journals  and  pockets  for  the  roller 
boxes  being  cast  with  the  sides,  the  gibs  for  the  direction  of  the  table  in  its  vertical 
motion  are  also  cast  in  the  sides. 

The  table  has  guides,  which  correspond  to  the  gibs  in  the  sides,  they  being  planed  to 
fit  and  to  retain  the  table  in  its  horizontal  position.  The  table  is  raised  and  lowered  by  a 
hand  wheel  operated  by  screw  and  bevel  gears. 

The  rollers,  four  in  number,  in  two  pairs,  one  of  each  pair  being  in  the  table,  are  all 
driven  by  a  system  of  gearing  arranged  to  operate  expansively  as  the  table  is  lowered 
from  the  cylinder.  The  rollers  are  large,  the  upper  pair  are  heavily  weighted  and  regulated 
by  adjusting  screws. 

The  cylinder  has  two  knives,  long  steel  journals,  and  there  is  a  flexible  weighted 
pressure  bar  before  the  cut  to  prevent  tearing  out  or  loosening  knots. 

The  feeding  arrangement  is  controlled  by  a  lever  and  tightener,  which  are  convenient 
to  the  operator. 

A  counter-shaft  and  pulleys  are  furnished  when  wanted,  having  the  patent  tight  and 
loose  pulleys  which  are  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should  make  1,000 
revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


31 


No.  5 

Medium  Size  Endless  Bed  Surface  Planer. 

(with  steel  lip  cylinder  and  weighted  pressure  roll.) 

This  machine  is  from  new  designs,  and  combines  in  its  construction  the  well-known 
features  of  the  revolving  bed  planers,  with  improvements  developed  by  experience  in 
their  use.  It  will  plane  in  a  superior  manner  hard,  soft,  green,  dry,  wet,  or  icy  lumber  of 
any  kind. 

The  capacity  of  this  machine  is  to  twenty-four  inches  in  width  and  to  eight  inches  in 
thickness,  and  it  is  built  in  such  proportions  as  to  insure  its  durability,  it  being  strong, 
heavy,  and  compact  in  the  arrangement  of  its  parts. 

There  is  an  endless  apron  or  bed  of  slats  connected  together  in  the  most  approved 
manner,  and  driven  by  heavy  gearing,  forming  a  very  powerful  method  of  feeding  lumber 
in  planing. 

The  slats  are  cast  from  the  best  cold  blast  iron,  and  arranged  to  avoid  any  variation  in 
the  wearing  surface,  and  the  runners  over  which  they  slide  are  of  the  same  material,  ground 
and  finished  in  the  best  manner  on  their  wearing  surfaces. 

The  cylinder  has  three  knives,  with  steel  lip  chip  breakers,  heavy  steel  journals,  self- 
oiling  boxes,  with  large  oil  cavities  in  the  bearing,  and  a  bonnet  which  can  be  easily 
removed  for  adjustment  of  the  knives. 

The  pressure  rollers  are  of  wrought  iron,  movable  at  each  end,  and  w^eighted  with  our 
patent  folding  weighted  levers,  which  are  hung  transversely  across  the  machine,  and  so 
arranged  as  to  readily  adapt  themselves  to  uneven  thicknesses  of  lumber  being  worked. 

The  cylinder  has  a  chip-breaking  pressure  bar  before  the  cut,  arranged  to  make  but 
little  friction  on  the  lumber,  and  to  prevent  any  tearing  out  during  the  planing. 

The  bed  is  raised  and  lowered  by  screws  connected  with  gearing  and  operated  by  a 
hand  wheel  convenient  to  the  operator.  The  feed  is  governed  by  an  idler  lever,  with  a 
spring  catch  to  hold  it  in  position. 

There  are  two  speeds  of  feed,  which  can  be  easily  changed  as  may  be  desired. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  all  kinds  of  surface  planing  of  a  medium  character,  and 
operates  in  a  superior  manner  on  hard,  soft,  knotty,  and  cross-grained  lumber. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and 
six-inch  face,  and  should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


32 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


33 


Large  Size  Endless  Bed  Surface  Planer. 

The  machine  illustrated  on  the  opposite  page  is  very  heavy,  strong,  and  powerful, 
intended  for  surfacing  lumber  of  any  kind  required,  for  planing  mills,  bridge,  boat,  and 
ship  builders,  agricultural  shops,  etc.,  and  wherever  a  heavy  surfacer  is  required. 

It  has  a  great  range  and  capacity  for  work,  from  one-fourth  to  twelve  inches  in  thick- 
ness, and  to  any  width  desired,  either  twenty-four,  twenty-six,  twenty-eight  or  thirty  inches. 
It  will  plane  car  sills,  decking,  scantling,  or  any  kind  of  hard  or  soft  lumber,  not  only  with 
the  greatest  ease,  but  with  wonderful  rapidity  and  in  the  very  best  manner. 

The  frame  of  the  machine  is  very  heavy  and  massive.  The  cylinder  is  stationary, 
making  it  convenient  to  have  the  countershaft  placed  on  the  floor,  or  overhead,  as  may  be 
desired.  It  carries  three  cutters  with  steel  lips,  heavy  steel  journals  running  in  patent 
self-oiling  bearings,  so  arranged  as  to  flood  the  journals  constantly  with  oil,  and  has  pulleys 
for  two  driving  belts. 

It  is  provided  with  a  chip  breaker  for  holding  the  fibre  of  the  wood  during  the  process 
of  cutting,  and  has  a  pressure  roll  in  front  weighted  with  our  patent  folding  levers,  so  ar- 
ranged that  either  end  will  work  independently  of  the  other,  which  is  indispensable  on 
unevenly  sawed  lumber.  This  allows  the  rolls  to  adjust  to  the  different  thicknesses  of 
lumber  without  causing  any  undue  strain  on  any  of  its  parts. 

The  bed  plate  sustaining  the  apron  or  carriage  is  made  of  the  very  best  chilled  iron, 
also  the  slats  over  which  it  runs.  The  method  of  constructing  is  such  as  to  secure  a  sur- 
face as  hard  as  tempered  steel. 

All  the  bearing  points  have  perfectly  ground  faces.  The  apron  slats  are  very  heavy, 
the  bearing  points  being  upon  the  outer  ends,  the  links  attaching  close  to  the  bearing,  and 
a  heavy  rib  extending  lengthwise  the  slat  from  one  end  to  the  other.  This  form  of  slat 
reduces  the  tendency  to  wear  in  the  center,  and  the  bed  remains  at  one  level,  an  improved 
feature  in  this  class  of  machinery. 

It  has  a  power  elevating  arrangement  for  raising  and  lowering  the  bed,  operated  and 
controlled  by  the  hand  lever  at  the  side  of  the  machine.  It  works  very  rapidly,  without 
noise,  and  is  one  of  the  most  convenient  attachments  to  be  found  for  the  purpose.  It 
has  a  straight  feed  belt,  our  improved  self-acting  belt  tightener  for  starting  and  stopping 
the  feed,  changes  of  feed,  etc. 

A  countershaft  and  pulleys  is  furnished  when  desired  at  a  small  extra  charge,  and 
includes  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  for  relieving  the  strain  upon  the  belt  when 
not  in  use.  They  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  eight  inch  face,  and  should  make 
875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


35 


LARGE  SIZE 
Double  Cylinder  Endless  Bed  Surface  Planer. 

(with  patent  folding  weighted  levers.) 

The  accompanying  engraving  represents  the  largest  of  a  new  series  of  double  surfacing 
planers,  of  the  heaviest  class  now  built,  and  will  surface  from  one-fourth  to  eight  inches  in 
thickness,  and  up  to  twenty-six,  twenty-eight,  thirty,  or  thirty-six  inches  in  width. 

Care  has  been  taken  to  embrace  every  improvement  which  our  long  experience  in  the 
manufacture  of  this  class  of  machinery  has  found  to  be  necessary  in  order  to  produce  the 
greatest  quantity  of  work  with  the  least  amount  of  power  and  in  the  shortest  space  of 
time. 

It  is  intended  for  large  planing  mills,  bridge,  railroad  and  car  shops,  and  wherever 
a  heavy  and  substantial  machine  of  large  capacity  is  desired,  and  is  constructed  on  nearly 
the  same  general  principle  as  the  endless  bed  surface  planers  illustrated  on  the  preceding 
pages. 

The  cylinders  are  belted  on  both  sides,  have  three  knives,  steel  lipped  chip  breakers 
and  wearing  edges,  large  steel  journals  with  long  and  self-oiling  bearings  all  perfectly  bal- 
anced. The  line  of  the  bed  being  in  a  fixed  position,  the  upper  cylinder  is  made  to 
adjust  to  the  thickness  of  the  lumber. 

The  slats  of  the  bed  are  made  from  cold  blast  iron,  with  bearings  on  ways  of  the 
same  material,  with  all  surfaces  ground  and  finished  in  the  best  manner.  The  upper  cylinder 
is  carried  in  stands,  planed  in  and  gibbed  to  the  sides  of  the  machine,  and  is  raised  and 
lowered  by  screws,  connected  by  gearing  worked  by  a  hand  wheel.  The  pressure  rolls 
are  raised  and  lowered  with  the  cylinder,  and  supplied  with  our  patent  folding  and 
weighted  levers,  allowing  the  rolls  to  operate  independently  or  together,  to  accommodate 
the  thickness  of  the  lumber. 

The  under  cylinder  carries  three  cutters,  has  combined  boxes,  secured  to  a  heavy  yoke, 
which  can  be  instantly  raised  or  lowered  to  suit  the  work,  by  simply  turning  a  crank,  and 
is  made  easy  of  access  by  swinging  the  table  in  front  entirely  out  of  the  way  by  the 
removal  of  one  bolt,  both  upper  and  lower  pressure  bars  having  independent  adjustment. 

The  entire  machine  is  constructed  of  iron  and  steel,  substantial  in  all  its  parts,  and 
fitted  together  in  the  very  best  manner;  all  joints  are  planed,  holes  bored,  and  bolts  turned. 

The  feed  is  not  surpassed  in  power  by  any  machine  of  its  capacity,  and  for  every  kind 
of  work,  even  wet,  green,  or  icy  lumber  it  is  unequaled. 

It  is  supplied  with  a  countershaft,  having  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  upon  it, 
which  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and  should  make  900  revolu- 
tions per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


37 


Car  Sill  Dressing  Machine. 

The  machine,  illustrated  on  the  opposite  page,  as  its  name  indicates,  has  been  spe- 
cially designed  for  the  heaviest  descriptions  of  work,  and  is  recommended  for  railway,  car, 
and  bridge  builders.  It  will  surface  to  twenty-four  inches  wide,  or  square  up  on  three  or 
four  sides,  sixteen  inches  wide  by  eight,  ten,  or  twelve  inches  thick  at  one  operation,  as 
may  be  desired. 

The  bed  of  the  machine  is  fixed,  the  cylinder  and  rolls  being  adjustable  to  the  various 
thicknesses  of  lumber  to  be  planed.  This  is  a  great  advantage,  as  it  gives  the  operator 
greater  convenience  and  facilities  in  handling  the  heavy  timber  to  be  planed.  The  feeding 
arrangement  is  powerful,  consisting  of  a  revolving  endless  bed,  made  of  slats  cast  from 
the  best  cold  blast  iron,  the  slides  on  which  they  travel  being  of  the  same  material,  with 
accurately-ground  faces;  auxiliary  to  this,  a  pair  of  large  feeding  rolls,  expansively  geared, 
are  added,  to  draw  the  timber  from  the  side  cutters. 

The  cylinder  has  three  knives,  steel-lipped  chip  breakers,  long  and  heavy  cast-steel 
arbors  running  in  self-oiling  boxes,  and  pulleys  for  two  belts,  and  is  raised  and  lowered  by 
power.  It  has  a  wrought-iron  bonnet  to  direct  the  shavings,  which  are  turned  out  of  the 
way  of  the  cutters.  The  upper  pressure  rolls  are  of  wrought-iron,  made  very  heavy  and 
weighted  by  a  yoked  pressure  lever;  a  very  powerful  combination  indispensable  to  the 
work  to  be  accomplished. 

The  side  heads  are  made  of  steel,  have  three  knives,  either  ten  inches  or  twelve  inches 
in  length,  as  may  be  ordered ;  the  spindles  have  a  top  bearing,  are  very  heavy,  of  the  best 
refined  steel,  running  in  our  patent  self-oiling  bearings,  having  special  oiling  devices, 
which  keep  the  steps  and  upper  boxes  constantly  lubricated,  and  are  adjusted  by  means  of 
heavy  square  thread  screws  which  retain  them  in  their  places  when  set. 

The  side  heads  are  fitted  with  our  patent  chip  breaker,  which  prevents  the  tearing  of 
the  lumber  when  working  flooring,  which  can  be  done  by  substituting  matcher  heads  for 
the  side  cutters.  There  is  also  a  lever  in  the  table  to  hold  the  stuff  against  the  fence 
as  it  is  being  fed  in. 

The  feeding  mechanism  is  simple  and  controlled  by  a  revolving  arm  and  idlers  worked 
by  a  lever  within  convenient  reach  of  the  operator. 

The  four-sided  machine  has  an  under  cylinder  added,  which  makes  it  a  perfect 
machine  for  putting  the  finish  on  sills  and  other  square  work  at  one  operation.  Counter- 
shafts and  floor  hangers  are  furnished,  completing  the  machine  ready  for  use. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft,  which  are  fourteen  inches 
in  diameter  and  ten-inch  face,  and  should  make  825  revolutions. 


38 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Woodworth  Planing  and  Matching  Machines. 

Among  planing  machines  the  Woodworth  or  horizontal  rotating  cylinder  planer,  with 
the  combinations  of  pressure  rolls  or  bars  for  surface  planing,  and  vertical  rotary  heads  for 
matching  or  tonguing  and  grooving,  is  notably  the  first  in  importance,  for  its  present  per- 
fectness  of  construction,  and  the  speed  with  which  it  finishes  in  excellent  quality  and 
extraordinary  quantity  the  work  it  is  designed  to  accomplish. 

During  the  short  period  of  about  forty  years  since  the  inventor  produced  the  first 
machine,  they  have  been  gradually  improved  from  their  original  form,  which  embraced  the 
essential  principles  necessary  to  a  working  machine,  to  the  latest  added  detail,  now  consid. 
ered  indispensable  to  the  perfect  and  convenient  manipulation  of  the  modern  planer  and 
matchers. 

Having  given  special  attention  to  the  construction,  and  studied  all  the  parts  in  detail, 
for  their  better  improvement,  for  the  convenience,  strength,  durability,  and  adaptability, 
as  well  as  simplicity,  we  are  prepared  to  offer  to  the  public  machines  of  such  arrangement 
as  to  meet  the  demands  of  all  users,  and  feel  confident  that  the  following  enumeration  of 
the  properties  and  arrangements  of  them  will  be  sufficient  to  convince  all  that  machines 
perfectly  constructed  upon  the  specifications  given  must  be  all  that  can  be  desired. 

The  cylinders  of  these  machines  ar-e  constructed  with  two,  three,  or  four  knives,  have 
steel  journals  and  steel  lips  for  chip  breaking,  forming,  with  the  knife,  a  double  iron,  as  in 
the  common  hand  plane.  The  four-sided  cylinder  is  made  of  wrought  iron  with  steel 
journals,  and  having  either  two  or  four  sides  slotted  for  using  a  variety  of  knives  upon  it, 
and  are  adapted  for  beading,  bevel  siding,  or  moldings. 

The  journals  of  the  cylinders  are  of  steel,  of  diameters  in  proportion  to  the  weight  of 
the  cylinder,  the  length  of  the  bearings  being  from  four  and  a  half  to  five  times  the  diam- 
eter of  the  journals. 

The  bearings  are  perfectly  fitted  by  scraping  the  lining  metal,  which  is  of  the  best 
anti-friction  compound,  made  expressly  to  our  order ;  they  are  also  provided  with  our 
patent  self-oiling  boxes,  which  keep  the  surface  of  the  journals  constantly  lubricated,  and 
are  retained  in  line  by  being  cast  solid  to  a  connecting  back,  which  is  accurately  planed 
between  two  heavy  standards  and  internally  gibbed,  so  that  the  constant  jar  of  the  lateral 
motion  of  the  cylinder  does  not  tend  to  change  their  position. 

The  machines  adapted  to  making  drop  siding  and  molding  are  arranged  with  a  swing- 
ing pressure  bar,  which  is  adjustable  to  and  from  the  cylinder.  The  cylinders  are  adjusted 
vertically  by  means  of  screws  connected  by  gearing,  and  can  be  raised  and  lowered  while 
in  operation.  The  cylinder  is  readily  removed  for  re-planing  or  replacing  when  worn  out 
of  line. 

The  matcher  heads  are  of  gun  metal,  with  two  or  three  wings,  as  the  style  of  the  ma- 
chine dictates.  All  are  furnished  with  our  improved  patent  matcher  clip,  and  provided 
with  large  oil  holders  to  the  vertical  bearings,  and  the  steps  of  the  spindles  are  arranged 
for  a  continuous  flow  of  oil  while  revolving. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


39 


The  arrangement  for  changing  from  a  matcher  to  a  siirfacer  is  complete  in  all  its  details. 
The  matcher  hangers  are  attached  to  a  vertically  adjustable  frame,  which,  with  the  heads 
remaining  on  the  spindles,  can  be  lowered  under  the  line  of  the  cylinder  bed  in  a  moment, 
and  when  again  raised  are  ready  for  use.  Our  patent  drop  matcher  attachment  is  furnished 
with  all  the  large  machines,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  specific  description.  The  small 
machines  are  easily  changed  from  a  floorer  to  a  surfacer  by  removing  the  heads  or  the 
spindles. 

The  feed  rolls  are  of  large  diameter,  and  are  provided  with  our  patent  weighting 
attachment  and  pivoted  boxes,  which  secure  an  equal  pressure  on  the  lumber  being 
worked,  regardless  of  any  inequalities  in  the  thickness,  and  the  position  of  the  weights  is 
not  altered  when  adjusting  the  rolls  to  different  thicknesses  of  stuff 

The  rolls  are  connected  by  patent  expansion  gearing  of  superior  construction,  which 
allows  the  upper  roll  to  adapt  itself  to  the  varying  angles  on  irregularly  sawed  lumber ;  and 
the  rolls  can  be  adjusted  to  different  thicknesses  of  stuff,  with  the  feed  always  the  same. 

On  the  double  surfacing  machines  the  under  cylinder  is  placed  between  two  adjustable 
bars,  which  govern  the  thickness  of  the  cut  taken,  and  is  otherwise  arranged  for  conven- 
ience of  access,  as  will  be  explained  in  the  special  description.  Over  the  cylinder  is  a 
pressure  bar,  raised  and  lowered  by  means  of  screws  turned  by  bevel  gears  connecting 
them. 

The  patent  beading  attachment  is  inserted  into  the  pressure  bar,  over  the  under 
cylinder,  so  as  to  gauge  the  depth  of  the  bead,  from  and  by  the  surface  of  the  board,  thus 
securing  an  automatic  adjustment  of  the  beading  shaft  at  all  times.  The  bead  being  stuck 
after  the  surface  is  planed,  makes  a  perfectly  smooth  molding ;  this  is  indispensable  for 
working  ceiling  and  partition  stuff.    This  arrangement  is  covered  by  letters  patent. 

The  improved  board  guide  is  necessary  for  holding  up  the  lumber  to  the  fence  before 
it  reaches  the  rolls,  and  requires  no  care  after  being  adjusted.  The  belt  tightener,  which 
controls  the  feed  works,  is  of  great  importance,  as  it  regulates  the  speed,  the  feed  being 
instantly  started  and  stopped  or  graduated  to  the  quantity  of  cut  being  taken. 

The  patent  loose  pulley  supplied  with  each  counter-shaft  is  of  great  advantage,  being 
smaller  in  diameter  than  the  fast  pulley.  When  the  belt  is  shifted  from  the  fast  to  the 
loose  pulley,  the  strain  on  the  belt  is  at  once  relieved,  and  the  friction  on  the  pulley  is 
much  reduced ;  the  belt  consequently  lasts  longer,  being  freed  from  constant  tension. 

These  machines  are  built  upon  heavy  and  substantial  frames,  thoroughly  bolted 
together.  All  the  revolving  parts  are  balanced  with  care,  and  all  surfaces  are  planed  to  fit. 
The  best  materials  are  used  in  their  construction,  and  practical  tests  are  made  with  every 
machine  to  insure  a  perfectly-finished  machine  in  all  particulars. 


40 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


41 


No.  1  FOUR  ROLL 
Little  Champion  Patent  Planing  and  Matching  Machine. 

This  machine  has  been  recently  designed  and  perfected  with  a  special  view  to  meet 
the  demand  for  a  machine  that  would  combine  small  cost  with  the  necessary  qualifications 
of  a  good  planer  and  matcher  for  custom  work  in  small  shops.  It  is  brought  before  the 
public  in  the  belief  that  it  possesses  all  the  requisites  in  a  manner  not  hitherto  equalled. 

Its  capacity  is  for  surfacing  twenty-four  inches  wide  and  under,  and  from  one-fourth 
to  five  inches  in  thickness;  also,  for  tonguing  and  grooving  flooring,  ceiling,  etc.,  and  for 
working  the  rustic  or  patent  siding. 

The  frame  of  the  machine  is  made  with  solid  cast  ends,  with  iron  connections,  and 
while  it  is  compact  and  occupies  but  small  floor  space,  is  solid  and  heavy. 

The  cylinder  has  steel  journals  running  in  patent  self-oiling  boxes,  so  constructed  as 
to  constantly  flood  the  journals  with  oil.  No  separate  adjustment  of  the  rolls  and  cylinder 
is  needed  to  change  for  different  thicknesses  of  stuff, — this  change  being  made  almost 
instantly  by  simply  one  movement  of  the  hand  wheel  at  the  side. 

It  has  four  driven  feed  rolls,  which  are  connected  by  patent  expansion  gearing,  and 
have  our  patent  weighting  attachment,  which  is  arranged  so  as  to  produce  a  uniform 
pressure  on  the  stuff  being  worked.  The  feed  is  strong  and  positive,  and  readily  started 
or  stopped  by  our  improved  belt  tightener. 

It  is  provided  with  steel  matcher  spindles,  fitted  with  gun  metal  matcher  heads, 
patent  matcher  clip  for  preventing  tearing  in  cross-grained  and  knotty  lumber,  and  can  be 
changed  in  three  minutes  from  flooring  to  wide  surfacing,  or  vice  versa,  without  removing 
the  matcher  spindles. 

The  counter-shaft  is  detached  from  the  machine  ;  is  provided  with  patent  tight  and 
loose  pulleys,  and  is  placed  on  the  floor,  giving  good  length  of  belts.  The  pulleys  are 
large  and  fitted  for  wide  belts. 

Each  machine  is  provided  with  shaving  bonnet,  board  guide,  pressure  bars,  one  set  of 
long  knives,  and  one  set  of  patent  solid  milled  matching  cutters,  is  fitted  up  in  the  most 
thorough  manner,  and  receives  a  thorough,  practical  test  before  leaving  the  shop. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  ten  inches  in  diameter,  six-inch  face,  and  should  make 
900  revolutions  per  minute. 


42 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


43 


No.  2  FOUR  ROLL 
Patent  Planing  and  Matching  Machine, 

(victor.) 

The  machine  herewith  illustrated  will  surface  up  to  twenty-four  inches  wide  and  four 
inches  thick,  and  tongue,  and  groove,  and  match  up  to  fourteen  inches  in  width.  It  has 
recently  been  much  improved  in  its  essential  working  parts,  and  will  be  found  specially 
adapted  to  the  requirements  of  small  planing  mills,  box  makers,  builders,  etc.,  and 
wherever  a  really  first-class  planing  and  matching  machine  of  moderate  cost  is  desired. 

It  has  four  feeding  rolls  of  large  diameter,  which  will  admit  stuff  four  inches  in  thick- 
ness, is  driven  by  improved  patent  expansion  gearing,  and  fitted  with  our  patent  weighting 
attachment,  which  insures  a  uniform  pressure  on  the  lumber,  without  regard  to  the 
variations  in  thickness  caused  by  uneven  sawing. 

The  cylinder  carries  three  knives,  runs  in  long,  patent,  self-oiling  bearings,  and  is 
fitted  with  steel  lips,  which  prevent  wear  and  act  as  chip  breakers  in  working  cross-grained 
lumber.  Splitting  or  tearing  at  the  ends  of  cross-grained  boards  is  prevented  by  the 
patent  matcher  clip  which  accompanies  each  machine. 

The  matcher  spindles  are  made  from  refined  steel,  can  be  quickly  lowered  below  the 
the  bed  or  platen,  when  it  is  desired  to  surface  the<^full  width  of  the  machine,  and  quickly 
re  adjusted  to  their  proper  position  for  working  flooring.  The  matcher  heads  are  made  of 
gun  metal,  and  perfectly  balanced. 

The  machine  is  provided  with  our  improved  belt  tightener  for  stopping  and  starting 
the  feed,  changes  of  feed  for  hard  or  soft  wood,  improved  board  guide,  iron  gear  covers, 
full  sets  of  wrenches,  patent  solid  matcher  cutters,  and  the  patent  tight  and  loose 
pulleys.  It  is  fitted  together  in  the  most  accurate  manner  throughout,  is  thoroughly 
tested  before  leaving  the  shop,  and  all  its  adjustments  are  made  with  ease  and  facility. 

Parties  whose  work  does  not  require  one  of  the  heavier  and  more  expensive  machines, 
but  who  desire  a  machine  of  low  price  that  can  be  depended  upon,  will  find  it  in  every 
way  suited  to  their  wants. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  ten  inches  in  diameter,  six  inch  face,  and  should  make 
900  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


45 


No.  PACIFIC 
Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 

SINGLE  OR  DOUBLE  CYLINDER  WITH  FOUR  OR  SIX  ROLLERS. 

This  machine,  recently  designed  for  a  special  purpose,  has  become  an  indispensable 
article  of  our  catalogue,  and  one  which  has  given  entire  satisfaction  wherever  used.  It 
will  surface  to  twenty-four  inches  wide  and  dress  to  six  inches  thick,  and  will  tongue  and 
groove  to  fourteen  inches  wide.  It  is  adapted  to  surfacing  for  all  purposes,  matching 
and  beading,  and  for  working  special  classes  of  moldings. 

The  machine  is  made  with  either  one  or  two  cylinders,  and  with  four  or  six  rollers,  as 
may  be  desired.  The  cylinders  are  of  wrought-iron  with  heavy  steel  journals,  and  slotted 
on  all  four  sides  for  the  accommodation  of  the  different  lengths  of  knives  or  cutters  used 
for  the  various  purposes,  and  have  pulleys  for  two  driving  belts. 

The  matcher  heads  are  of  gun  metal,  fitted  with  steel  set-screws,  and  run  upon  heavy 
steel  arbors.  The  hangers,  carrying  the  arbors,  are  adjustable  laterally  by  means  of  a 
screw,  and  are  dropped  below  the  line  of  the  bed  when  it  is  desired  to  surface  to  twenty- 
four  inches  in  width  ;  this  is  done  in  a  moment  and  without  removal  of  the  matcher 
heads  or  clip.  The  matcher  heads  being  adjustable  across  the  machine,  distributes  the 
friction  of  the  lumber  on  the  bed-plate  and  prevents  unevenness  of  wear. 

The  rollers  are  six  inches  in  diameter,  connected  by  heavy  gearing,  and  for  different 
thicknesses  of  lumber  are  geared  expansively  to  open  six  inches.  The  rollers  are  heavily 
weighted,  and  flexible  to  accommodate  any  inequalities  in  the  lumber.  The  weighted  levers 
are  inside  the  frame  below  the  platen,  and  move  with  perfect  freedom.  The  feed  of  the 
machine  is  very  powerful,  the  rollers  being  large,  and  the  belting,  gearing,  and  weighting 
being  so  proportioned  as  to  allow  no  slipping. 

The  cylinder  for  top  planing  is  carried  in  heavy  boxes,  planed  to  fit  to  stands  cast 
solid  to  a  bed,  extending  across  the  machine.  The  pressure  bar  before  the  cutter  is 
arranged  to  swing  from  the  cylinder,  so  that  there  is  always  a  pressure  close  to  the  knife, 
which  prevents  tearing  out.  The  pressure  bars,  both  before  and  after  the  cut,  are  adjusta- 
ble to  and  from  the  cylinder  to  make  room  for  the  projection  of  molding,  rustic,  or  drop 
siding  cutters. 

On  the  double  cylinder  machine,  the  lower  cylinder  has  its  bearings  in  a  connected 
frame  cast  in  one  piece,  adjusted  vertically  by  two  screws  operated  by  connecting  gearing. 
The  cylinder  is  slotted  on  all  four  sides,  has  large  steel  arbors,  and  pulleys  for  two  driving 
belts.  The  pressure  bar  over  the  cylinder  is  also  adjusted  by  two  screws,  and  can  be 
raised  to  the  full  thickness  of  the  stuff  that  can  be  worked  upon  the  machine.  The 
cylinder  is  easy  of  access,  and  the  bars  can  be  adjusted  to  or  from  the  cut. 

The  plate  under  the  upper  cylinder  can  be  removed  for  re-planing  or  renewal  when 
worn  out  of  line.  The  matcher  clip,  an  important  improved  feature,  is  adapted  to  this 
machine,  and  in  such  a  position  that  a  deep  rabbet  can  be  made  for  drop  siding. 

It  is  furnished  with  our  double  belt  tightener,  patent  solid  milled  cutters,  and  pulleys 
for  changes  of  feed.  All  bearings  are  arranged  with  large  oil  cavities  to  insure  perfect 
lubrication,  and  all  parts  constructed  in  the  most  perfect  manner. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  six 
inch  face,  and  should  make  900  revolutions  per  minute. 


46 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  3  FOUR  ROLL 
Single  and  Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing  and  Matching  Machines. 

(l.  g.  no.  1.) 

Upon  the  opposite  page  will  be  found  two  engravings,  the  first  representing  our 
No.  3  Single  Cylinder  Patent  Planing  and  Matching  Machine,  and  the  lower  engraving 
that  of  our  No.  3  Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing  and  Matching  Machine  with  beading 
attachment.  These  machines  have  recently  been  very  much  improved,  are  strong,  heavy, 
and  compact,  and  will  be  found  well  adapted  for  working  hard  or  soft  wood  up  to  twenty- 
four  inches  in  width  and  four  and  one-half  inches  in  thickness  in  planing  and  flooring 
mills,  builders,  box  shops,  etc.,  where  a  machine  of  medium  size  and  capacity  is  required. 

The  cylinder  carries  three  knives,  runs  in  long,  self-oiling  bearings  of  large  diameter, 
is  belted  on  both  sides,  and  fitted  with  steel  lip  chip-breakers ;  also  the  matching  cylinders 
are  fitted  with  our  patent  matcher  clip,  which  effectually  prevents  tearing  and  splitting 
in  working  cross-grained  and  knotty  lumber. 

The  feed  works  are  of  the  most  superior  construction.  The  feeding  rolls  being  of 
large  diameter  driven  by  very  strong  patent  expansion  gearing,  are  instantly  started 
and  stopped  by  means  of  our  improved  belt  tightener,  and  fitted  with  patent  weighting 
attachment,  by  means  of  which  a  uniform  pressure  is  maintained  on  the  lumber  regardless 
of  inequalities  in  thickness.    There  are  two  changes  of  feed  for  hard  or  soft  wood. 

They  are  also  provided  with  our  patent  drop  matcher  attachment  for  lowering  the 
matcher  spindles  and  heads  below  the  line  of  the  bed  when  it  is  desired  to  surface  the  full 
width,  and  for  quickly  re-adjusting  them  to  their  proper  position  for  working  flooring. 
The  matching  spindles  are  of  steel,  and  run  in  self-oiling  bearings,  the  matcher  heads  of 
gun  metal,  with  hardened  steel  screws. 

The  under  cylinder  is  easy  of  access,  the  pressure  bars  being  movable.  The  patent 
beading  attachment  is  placed  upon  the  upper  pressure  bar  over  the  under  cylinder,  and 
is  arranged  so  as  to  gauge  the  depth  of  the  bead  from  and  by  the  surface  of  the  board, 
which  secures  an  automatic  adjustment  of  the  beading  shaft  at  all  times. 

Every  part  is  made  and  fitted  in  the  most  thorough  and  accurate  manner,  and  prac- 
tical working  tests  are  made  with  each  machine  before  it  leaves  the  shop.  Full  sets  of 
wrenches,  patent  solid  matcher  cutters,  improved  board  guide,  patent  tight  and  loose 
pulleys,  countershaft,  etc.,  accompany  each  machine,  and  will  be  found  complete  and 
ready  to  run  the  moment  it  is  set  up  and  belted. 

For  quantity  and  quality  of  work  within  their  capacity  they  have  no  equal,  and  are 
strongly  recommended  to  parties  desiring  a  good  low  price  machine  for  all  ordinary 
work. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  six  inch  face,  and 
should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


49 


No.  4  FOUR  ROLL 
Single  and  Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing  and  Matching  Machines. 

(l.  g.  no.  2.) 

Upon  the  opposite  page  will  be  seen  two  engravings,  the  first  illustrating  our  No.  4 
Single  Cylinder  Patent  Planing  and  Matching  Machine,  and  the  second  our  No.  4  Double 
Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine.  These  machines  will  surface 
up  to  twenty-four  inches  wide,  and  from  one-fourth  to  five  inches  in  thickness,  and  tongue 
and  groove  and  match  up  to  fourteen  and  sixteen  inches  in  width,  as  may  be  desired. 

They  combine  every  convenience  for  doing  the  work  to  the  best  possible  advantage, 
and  embraces  all  known  features  for  increasing  efficiency  and  durability,  and  for  general 
work  on  hard  and  soft,  thick  and  thin  lumber  are  unequalled. 

They  are  furnished  with  four  six  inch  feed  rolls  provided  with  pivoted  boxes  and 
patent  weighting  attachment,  which  secures  an  equal  pressure  on  the  stuff  being  worked, 
regardless  of  inequalities  in  thickness ;  and  the  position  of  the  weights  is  not  altered  when 
adjusting  the  rolls  to  different  thickness  of  stuff.  The  rolls  are  connected  by  patent  ex- 
pansion gearing  of  superior  construction,  which  allows  the  upper  rolls  to  adapt  themselves 
to  the  varying  angles  on  irregularly  sawed  lumber.  The  feed  is  strong  and  positive,  has 
two  changes  for  hard  and  soft  wood,  and  is  started  or  stopped  by  means  of  our  improved 
belt  tightener. 

The  cylinders  are  of  large  diameter,  with  large  steel  journals  running  in  patent  self- 
oiling  bearings,  arranged  to  flood  the  journals  constantly  with  oil,  and  lined  with  metal, 
prepared  expressly  for  our  use  and  perfectly  fitted  by  scraping.  They  carry  three  knives 
with  steel  lips  under  each,  to  receive  the  wear  of  the  chips  and  to  act  as  chip  breakers  on 
cross-grained  and  knotty  stuff;  also,  pulleys  for  two  driving  belts. 

The  cylinder  back  containing  the  bearings  is  cast  solid  in  one  piece  and  internally 
gibbed  between  two  heavy  standards;  it  is  adjusted  on  an  angle,  and  can  be  raised  or 
lowered  while  in  operation.  The  bed  under  the  cylinder  is  detachable,  so  it  can  be  moved 
and  replaned  when  worn  out  of  line. 

The  matcher  heads  are  of  steel,  and  furnished  with  our  patent  matcher  clip,  to 
prevent  the  tear  at  the  ends  of  boards,  and  also  with  our  patent  solid  milled  matching 
cutters.  The  matcher  spindles  are  of  steel,  and  provided  with  large  oil  holders  for 
the  vertical  bearings,  and  the  lower  steps  are  self-oiling. 

They  are  provided  with  our  patent  drop  matcher  attachment,  by  means  of  which 
the  machine  can  be  changed  from  a  floorer  to  a  wide  surfacer  or  vice  versa  in  a  moment's 
time.  This  is  done  by  lowering  the  matcher  spindles  and  heads  below  the  line  of  the 
bed  or  platen,  making  a  large  saving  of  time  to  the  operator. 

Each  machine  will  plane  twenty-four  and  tongue  and  groove  fourteen  inches  wide, 
and  five  inches  thick,  when  the  matcher  heads  are  lowered. 

In  the  double  cylinder  machines  the  under  cylinder  is  arranged  with  detachable  beds, 
that  can  be  instantly  removed  or  adjusted  without  interfering  with  the  platen. 

The  patent  beading  attachment  is  placed  upon  the  pressure  bar,  over  the  under 
cylinder,  so  as  to  gauge  the  depth  of  the  bead  from  the  surface  of  the  board,  securing 
an  automatic  adjustment  of  the  beading  shaft  at  all  times. 

The  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  furnished  without  charge.  They  are  twelve 
inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,   and  should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


51 


No.  4  SIX  ROLL 
Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 

(l.  g.  no.  2.) 

This  machine,  as  recently  improved,  is  one  of  the  most  effective  in  use.  It  will 
plane  on  both  sides,  and  tongue  and  groove  and  bead  up  to  fourteen  inches  wide,  and 
surface  both  sides  twenty-four  inches  wide  and  five  inches  thick.  It  is  built  in  all  its  parts 
entirely  of  iron,  steel,  and  gun  metal,  strongly  and  substantially  fitted  together  in  the  best 
manner  possible. 

The  cylinders,  two  in  number,  are  each  provided  with  three  knives,  steel-lipped  chip- 
breakers,  perfectly  finished,  long  steel  journals,  and  two  pulleys,  five-inch  face  for  the 
driving  belts. 

The  matcher  heads  are  of  gun  metal,  each  for  three  cutters,  with  steel  set  screws,  and 
placed  on  vertical  steel  spindles,  running  in  patent  self-oiling  boxes  and  steps. 

There  are  six  feed  rolls  six  inches  in  diameter,  connected  by  a  train  of  heavy  gearing, 
and  for  expansion  are  provided  with  heavy  expansion  gearing.  The  rollers  can  be  opened 
to  five  and  one-quarter  inches;  they  are  fitted  with  the  pivoted  boxes  on  substantial  stands, 
and  are  flexible  in  working  on  unevenly  sawed  lumber. 

The  dead  weights  attached  to  the  rollers  are  hung  below  the  table  out  of  the  way,  and 
act  in  the  most  free  and  effective  manner. 

The  feed  of  this  machine  is  constant  and  even,  so  many  points  being  acted  upon  at 
once  precludes  the  possibility  of  any  intermittent  action  in  the  speed. 

The  upper  cylinder  is  furnished  with  the  internally  gibbed  back,  solidly  connected 
boxes  and  properly  arranged  spring  roll,  and  rigid  pressure  bar  to  prevent  clipping  the 
surface  of  the  board. 

The  under  cylinder  is  easy  of  access,  the  pressure  bars  being  movable,  the  upper  one 
which  contains  the  beading  heads  and  shaft  is  raised  by  two  screws  connected  by  rod  and 
bevel  gears. 

The  improved  matcher  clip,  for  preventing  the  tear  and  splitting  in  matching  cross- 
grained  and  knotty  stuff,  the  spring  roller  for  holding  flooring  against  the  fence,  the 
patent  drop  matcher  attachment,  for  changing  in  one  moment  from  a  floorer  to  a  wide 
surfacer,  and  vice  versa,  the  double  pulley  feed  belt  tightener,  and  self-oiling  bearings,  the 
patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  and  patent  solid  milled  matching  cutters,  and  other  im- 
provements described  on  pages  37  and  38,  are  prominent  features  of  this  machine,  and 
indispensable.  There  are  changes  of  feed  to  accommodate  the  machine  to  either  hard  or 
soft  wood ;  and  by  placing  larger  or  smaller  pulleys  on  the  feed  shaft,  the  speed  can  be 
graduated  to  suit  any  kind  of  lumber. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and 
should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


53 


No.       SIX  ROLL 
Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 

This  machine  is  one  of  recent  introduction,  and  embodies  some  features  not  found 
elsewhere.    It  is  substantial  in  its  construction,  and  designed  for  continuous  heavy  work. 

There  are  two  cylinders  with  twenty-six  inches  length  of  cut,  each  having  two  driving 
belts,  and  fitted  with  long  heavy  steel  journals  and  steel  lip  chip-breakers.  The  upper  cylin- 
der is  carried  in  a  solidly  connected  internally  gibbed  back,  having  heavy  bearings  for  the 
journals,  spring  pressure  roller  before  the  cut,  and  a  yielding  pressure  bar  after  the  cut, 
which  retains  the  lumber  in  contact  with  the  table  and  prevents  vibration.  It  is  adjustable 
to  the  desired  thicknesses  by  screws  and  connecting  gearing,  and  has  a  gauge  to  indicate 
the  thickness. 

The  under  cylinder  is  placed  so  that  the  discharging  rollers  carry  the  lumber  from  it, 
thus  running  through  and  finishing  one  board,  if  desired,  without  another  following.  The 
discharging  rollers  can  be  swung  around,  opening  the  end  of  the  machine  and  giving 
access  to  the  under  cylinder,  so  that  any  adjustment  can  be  made  with  the  greatest  facility. 

The  two  vertical  side  heads  are  of  gun  metal,  having  three  knives  each,  and  are 
adjustable  for  different  widths  of  lumber  to  be  jointed  or  tongued  and  grooved.  The  side 
heads  are  also  arranged  to  drop  vertically  below  the  line  of  the  bed,  to  permit  full-width 
surfacing  to  be  done  without  removal  of  the  heads  from  their  spindles. 

The  feeding  arrangement  consists  of  six  rollers  six  inches  in  diameter,  in  three  pairs, 
connected  by  heavy  gearing,  and  opening  to  five  inches  by  heavy  expansion  gearing  at 
each  end  of  the  roller.  The  upper  rollers,  before  the  cut,  are  raised  together  by  hand 
wheel  and  connecting  gearing.  The  under  cylinder  and  its  pressure  bar  are  both  raised 
and  lowered  by  screws  and  connecting  gearing,  the  former  to  govern  the  thickness  of  the 
cut,  the  latter  for  the  thickness  of  the  lumber  being  fed  through. 

The  lower  roller  in  the  movable  end  of  the  machine  has  a  vertical  adjustment  to 
compensate  for  any  change  in  the  elevation  of  the  under  cylinder  and  in  order  that  a 
constant  pressure  may  be  retained  upon  the  lumber  by  keeping  the  face  of  the  pressure 
bar  after  the  cut  and  the  lower  discharging  roller  in  the  same  line. 

The  platen  before  the  cut  of  the  upper  cylinder  has  an  adjustable  roller  spring  bar 
moved  by  a  hand  wheel  at  the  operating  end  of  the  machine. 

With  the  special  features  already  described,  this  machine  has  all  the  standard  attach- 
ments found  in  other  machines,  viz.  :  the  double  pulley  and  belt  tightener,  which  govern 
and  graduate  the  feeding,  self-oiling  bearings,  patent  drop  matcher  attachment,  improved 
clip  for  the  matcher  head,  patent  solid  milled  matching  cutters,  and  extra  pulleys  for 
changes  of  speed  of  feed. 

This  machine  will  surface  to  twenty-six  inches  in  width  and  to  five  inches  in  thickness, 
and  match  flooring  to  sixteen  inches  wide. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  six- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  900  revolutions  per  minute. 


54 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  5  FOUR  ROLL 
Single  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine, 

(medium.) 

The  engraving  on  the  opposite  page  represents  a  powerful  machine  with  four  feed 
rollers,  seven  inches  diameter,  with  capacity  for  planing  twenty-four  inches  wide  by  six 
inches  in  thickness,  and  matching  to  sixteen  inches  wide. 

This  machine,  as  indicated  by  the  name,  is  a  medium  between  our  heaviest  and  the 
last  described  six  roll  planer,  and,  for  constant  use,  has  no  superior. 

The  design  throughout  the  machine  is  for  strength,  and  resistance  to  the  work  in- 
tended to  be  executed  upon  it. 

The  cylinder  is  six  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter  on  the  periphery  of  the  cutting 
edge;  the  journals  ten  inches  in  length,  with  two  driving  pulleys  of  six  inches  face. 

The  cylinder  back  is  gibbed  internally  to  heavy  stands,  raised  at  an  angle  to  insure 
perfect  tension  of  the  driving  belts,  and  provided  with  roller  and  rigid  pressure  bar  for 
preventing  surface  being  clipped,  as  the  end  of  the  lumber  passes  under  the  cylinder. 

The  cylinder  is  furnished  with  the  chip-breaking  steel  lips.  The  matcher  heads  are 
of  gun  metal,  with  three  knives  each,  steel  set  screws  and  steel  spindles. 

The  patent  matcher  clip  to  prevent  tearing  or  splitting  the  lumber  in  working  flooring 
has  no  superior. 

The  patent  drop  matcher  attachment,  by  which  it  can  be  changed  from  a  floorer  to 
a  wide  surfacer  in  a  moment,  and  the  double  pulley  belt  tightener  on  the  feed  belt,  also 
the  patent  solid  milled  matching  cutters,  and  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fur- 
nished with  this  machine. 

For  holding  flooring  boards  against  the  fence,  there  is  a  pivoted  arm  with  a  roller  on 
the  end ;  this  is  worked  by  a  hand  wheel  in  connection  with  a  screw  and  quadrant  rack ; 
the  hand  wheel  being  convenient  to  the  operator,  it  can  be  adjusted  instantly  to  any  width 
of  board. 

All  the  gearing  is  very  heavy,  the  expansions  on  the  rollers  are  our  patent  expansion 
gearing,  with  the  pivoted  boxes  and  weighted  by  the  lever  and  dead  weight  under  the 
platen,  and  has  all  the  improvements  described  on  pages  37  and  38  of  this  catalogue. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and 
eight-inch  face,  and  should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


57 


No.  5  LARGE  FOUR  ROLL 
Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,-  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 

(medium.) 

This  machine,  of  the  same  general  design  as  the  last  described  four  roll  planer  and 
matcher,  is  intended  for  double  surfacing,  planing,  matching,  and  beading. 

The  frame  of  this  machine  is  very  heavy,  strongly  bolted  together  with  turned  bolts, 
the  holes  drilled  to  fit,  and  all  joints  and  wearing  parts  fitted  in  the  most  thorough  and 
accurate  manner. 

The  rollers  are  seven  inches  in  diameter,  four  in  number,  connected  by  our  heavy 
patent  expansion  gearing,  and  can  be  opened  to  take  in  lumber  to  five  inches  in  thickness. 

They  are  revolved  in  pivoted  boxes,  having  long  bearings,  and  heavily  weighted  from 
below  by  the  dead  weight  levers  under  the  machine. 

The  upper  cylinder  is  hung  in  long  bearings,  strongly  joined  by  heavy  bars  attached 
to  a  rigid  back,  which  is  open,  for  the  convenience  of  adjusting  the  knives  ;  and  the 
journals  provided  with  oil  fountains,  so  arranged  as  to  constantly  flood  the  bearings  with  oil. 

The  front  pressure  bar  is  regulated  in  its  position  by  set  screws,  and,  in  combination 
with  the  roller  behind  the  cylinder,  prevents  clipping  the  surface  of  the  lumber. 

The  under  cylinder  is  easily  graduated  to  different  thicknesses  of  cut,  and  is  arranged 
with  upper  and  under  pressure  bars,  all  of  which  are  adjustable. 

The  beading  attachment  is  furnished  with  this  machine,  for  one  or  both  sides,  as 
desired,  making  the  machine  capable  of  completing  ceiling,  beaded  on  both  sides,  planed 
and  matched. 

The  matcher  heads  are  of  large  diameter,  and  revolve  on  heavy  steel  spindles  made  of 
gun  metal,  or  steel,  with  steel  set  screws,  and  three  cutters  each.  The  heavy  matcher 
clip,  the  double  pulley  tightening  lever  for  the  feed  belt,  and  the  pressure  arm  worked  by 
a  hand  wheel,  for  guiding  flooring,  and  all  the  improvements  described  on  pages  37  and  38 
are  furnished  with  this  machine. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  also  the  patent  solid  milled 
tonguing,  grooving,  and  matching  cutters. 

It  will  surface  twenty-four,  twenty-six,  and  twenty-eight  inches  wide,  by  five  inches 
thick,  and  match  up  to  sixteen  inches  wide.  It  has  also  changes  of  speed,  easily  adjusted 
for  either  hard  or  soft  wood. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  eight  inch  face,  and 
should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


54 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  5  FOUR  ROLL 
Single  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 

(medium.) 

The  engraving  on  the  opposite  page  represents  a  powerful  machine  with  four  feed 
rollers,  seven  inches  diameter,  with  capacity  for  planing  twenty-four  inches  wide  by  six 
inches  in  thickness,  and  matching  to  sixteen  inches  wide. 

This  machine,  as  indicated  by  the  name,  is  a  medium  between  our  heaviest  and  the 
last  described  six  roll  planer,  and,  for  constant  use,  has  no  superior. 

The  design  throughout  the  machine  is  for  strength,  and  resistance  to  the  work  in- 
tended to  be  executed  upon  it. 

The  cylinder  is  six  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter  on  the  periphery  of  the  cutting 
edge ;  the  journals  ten  inches  in  length,  with  two  driving  pulleys  of  six  inches  face. 

The  cylinder  back  is  gibbed  internally  to  heavy  stands,  raised  at  an  angle  to  insure 
perfect  tension  of  the  driving  belts,  and  provided  with  roller  and  rigid  pressure  bar  for 
preventing  surface  being  clipped,  as  the  end  of  the  lumber  passes  under  the  cylinder. 

The  cylinder  is  furnished  with  the  chip-breaking  steel  lips.  The  matcher  heads  are 
of  gun  metal,  with  three  knives  each,  steel  set  screws  and  steel  spindles. 

The  patent  matcher  clip  to  prevent  tearing  or  splitting  the  lumber  in  working  flooring 
has  no  superior. 

The  patent  drop  matcher  attachment,  by  which  it  can  be  changed  from  a  floorer  to 
a  wide  surfacer  in  a  moment,  and  the  double  pulley  belt  tightener  on  the  feed  belt,  also 
the  patent  solid  milled  matching  cutters,  and  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fur- 
nished with  this  machine. 

For  holding  flooring  boards  against  the  fence,  there  is  a  pivoted  arm  with  a  roller  on 
the  end ;  this  is  worked  by  a  hand  wheel  in  connection  with  a  screw  and  quadrant  rack ; 
the  hand  wheel  being  convenient  to  the  operator,  it  can  be  adjusted  instantly  to  any  width 
of  board. 

All  the  gearing  is  very  heavy,  the  expansions  on  the  rollers  are  our  patent  expansion 
gearing,  with  the  pivoted  boxes  and  weighted  by  the  lever  and  dead  weight  under  the 
platen,  and  has  all  the  improvements  described  on  pages  37  and  38  of  this  catalogue. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and 
eight-inch  face,  and  should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


57 


No.  5  LARGE  FOUR  ROLL 
Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,-  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 

(medium.) 

This  machine,  of  the  same  general  design  as  the  last  described  four  roll  planer  and 
matcher,  is  intended  for  double  surfacing,  planing,  matching,  and  beading. 

The  frame  of  this  machine  is  very  heavy,  strongly  bolted  together  with  turned  bolts, 
the  holes  drilled  to  fit,  and  all  joints  and  wearing  parts  fitted  in  the  most  thorough  and 
accurate  manner. 

The  rollers  are  seven  inches  in  diameter,  four  in  number,  connected  by  our  heavy 
patent  expansion  gearing,  and  can  be  opened  to  take  in  lumber  to  five  inches  in  thickness. 

They  are  revolved  in  pivoted  boxes,  having  long  bearings,  and  heavily  weighted  from 
below  by  the  dead  weight  levers  under  the  machine. 

The  upper  cylinder  is  hung  in  long  bearings,  strongly  joined  by  heavy  bars  attached 
to  a  rigid  back,  which  is  open,  for  the  convenience  of  adjusting  the  knives  ;  and  the 
journals  provided  with  oil  fountains,  so  arranged  as  to  constantly  flood  the  bearings  with  oil. 

The  front  pressure  bar  is  regulated  in  its  position  by  set  screws,  and,  in  combination 
with  the  roller  behind  the  cylinder,  prevents  clipping  the  surface  of  the  lumber. 

The  under  cylinder  is  easily  graduated  to  different  thicknesses  of  cut,  and  is  arranged 
with  upper  and  under  pressure  bars,  all  of  which  are  adjustable. 

The  beading  attachment  is  furnished  with  this  machine,  for  one  or  both  sides,  as 
desired,  making  the  machine  capable  of  completing  ceiling,  beaded  on  both  sides,  planed 
and  matched. 

The  matcher  heads  are  of  large  diameter,  and  revolve  on  heavy  steel  spindles  made  of 
gun  metal,  or  steel,  with  steel  set  screws,  and  three  cutters  each.  The  heavy  matcher 
clip,  the  double  pulley  tightening  lever  for  the  feed  belt,  and  the  pressure  arm  worked  by 
a  hand  wheel,  for  guiding  flooring,  and  all  the  improvements  described  on  pages  37  and  38 
are  furnished  with  this  machine. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  also  the  patent  solid  milled 
tonguing,  grooving,  and  matching  cutters. 

It  will  surface  twenty-four,  twenty-six,  and  twenty-eight  inches  wide,  by  five  inches 
thick,  and  match  up  to  sixteen  inches  wide.  It  has  also  changes  of  speed,  easily  adjusted 
for  either  hard  or  soft  wood. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  eight  inch  face,  and 
should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


58 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  5  LARGE  SIX  ROLL 
Patent  Planing  Matching  and  Beading  Machine. 

(with  double  beading  attachment.) 

The  engraving  on  the  oposite  page  represents  our  Large  No.  5  Six  Roller  Double 
Cylinder  Planing  and  Matching  Machine,  with  upper  and  lower  headers. 

The  length  of  this  machine  is  fourteen  feet,  and  it  is  similar  in  design  to  the  No.  5 
Four  Roll  Planing  Machine  on  the  preceding  pages. 

The  superiority  of  this  machine  consists  in  the  three  pairs  of  rollers,  giving  three 
points  of  contact  in  feeding  the  lumber  to  the  cutters,  causing  the  rate  of  speed  of  the 
lumber  to  be  constantly  the  same,  regardless  of  unevenness  of  sawing. 

The  rollers  are  seven  inches  in  diameter,  open  to  take  in  lumber  five  inches  in 
thickness,  are  connected  by  train  of  heavy  gearing  to  render  their  speed  uniform,  and  each 
pair  is  connected  by  our  patent  heavy  expansion  gearing. 

The  weighting  arrangement  is  such,  that  the  rollers  can  be  raised  without  moving  the 
dead  weight  levers,  and  the  same  pressure  is  retained  at  whatever  height  the  rollers  may 
be  adjusted. 

The  upper  cylinder  is  furnished  with  steel  chip  breaking  lips,  long  steel  journals, 
internally  gibbed  back,  and  heavy  stands  cast  solid  to  the  bed.  The  face  of  the  bed  can 
be  removed  for  adjusting  or  replaning.  The  pressure  bar  and  roller  for  the  upper  cylinder 
are  complete  in  their  construction,  accomplishing  the  prevention  of  clipping  in  the  most 
perfect  manner.  The  under  cylinder  is  of  the  same  construction  as  the  upper,  with  ad- 
justable pressure  bars. 

Three  wing  gun  metal  or  steel  matcher  heads,  supplied  with  our  patent  solid 
milled  cutters,  which  are  unequalled  for  working  hard  and  cross-grained  lumber,  are 
furnished.  The  matcher  spindles  are  very  large  and  heavy,  and  run  in  self-oiling  bearings, 
and  are  adjustable  vertically  by  means  of  the  patent  drop  matcher  attachment. 

Incorporated  in  this  machine,  are  the  patent  matcher  clip,  feed  belt  tightener,  pivoted 
roller  boxes,  patent  expansion  gearing  and  self-lubricating  bearings,  and  all  the  improve- 
ments enumerated  on  pages  38  and  39. 

This  machine  is  equally  adapted  for  hard  or  soft  lumber,  and  is  readily  adjusted  for 
surfacing  one  or  both  sides,  for  making  flooring  or  ceiling,  or  for  squaring  up  on  both 
sides. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and 
should  makes  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S 

No.  5  Four  Roll  Single  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S 

No.  5  Four  Roll  Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO.  S 

No.  5  Six  Roll  Large  Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 


J.      FAY  &  CO, 

No.  6  Six  Roll  Large  Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 


61 


NO.  6  LARGE  SIX  ROLL 
Double  Cylinder  Patent  Planing,  Matching,  and  Beading  Machine. 

(WITH  DOUBLE  BEADING  ATTACHMENT.) 

This  is  our  largest  Planer  and  Matcher.  It  is  designed  for  the  heaviest  and  most  con- 
stant service,  and  will  be  found,  upon  examination,  to  fill  all  the  requirements  of  those 
wanting  a  machine  that  is  capable  of  great  endurance. 

There  are  six  rollers,  eight  inches  in  diameter,  very  heavily  geared,  each  pair  con- 
nected at  each  end  by  our  patent  expansion  gearing;  they  are  heavily  weighted,  and  while 
in  motion  can  be  raised  without  changing  the  position  of  the  weights  and  levers. 

The  roll  boxes  are  pivoted,  this  device  increasing  the  efficiency  of  the  machine,  as 
the  rollers  being  more  constantly  in  contact  with  unevenly-sawed  lumber,  accommodate 
themselves  to  a  variation  of  three-fourths  of  an  inch  in  twenty-four  inches. 

The  cylinder  is  gibbed  to  heavy  stands,  cast  solidly  to  the  bed  that  supports  the  fric- 
tion plate  over  which  the  lumber  passes  in  being  planed,  making  all  parts  solid  and  sub" 
stantial.  The  upper  cylinder  is  six  and  three-quarter  inches  in  diameter,  made  of  the  best 
metal,  with  three  knives,  heavy  steel  journal  one  and  three-quarter  inches  in  diameter,  and 
steel  lips  for  receiving  the  wear  of  the  chips. 

The  under  cylinder  is  of  the  same  construction  as  the  upper,  close  to  the  end  of  the 
machine,  can  be  easily  adjusted,  and  has  the  necessary  movable  pressure  bars,  the  upper 
one  being  adjusted  vertically,  parallel  with  the  cylinder,  by  two  screws  geared  together. 

The  matcher  heads  of  gun  metal  or  steel,  of  large  diameter,  have  three  wings,  and 
are  attached  to  large  steel  spindles,  running  in  very  heavy  hangers,  which  are  adjusted 
vertically  by  the  patent  drop  matcher  attachment,  and  have  a  lateral  adjustment  by  inde- 
pendent screws. 

The  patent  solid  milled  matching  and  grooving  cutters,  also  the  patent  tight  and 
loose  pulleys,  described  on  page  16,  are  furnished  with  this  machine. 

There  is  a  continuous  fence  from  the  end  of  the  machine  to  the  matcher  head,  a 
pressure  guide  to  retain  the  lumber  against  the  fence,  and  a  heavy  matcher  clip  to  prevent 
tearing  or  clipping  the  lumber,  making  this  a  perfect  flooring  machine  as  well  as  double 
surfacer.  If  desired,  beading  attachments  may  be  added  above  or  below,  or  both,  making 
the  machine  complete  in  all  details.  It  has  all  the  improvements  enumerated  on  pages 
38  and  39,  and  the  whole  machine  is  constructed  in  the  most  thorough  manner,  and 
is  severely  tested  before  shipment  to  insure  perfect  working  in  all  its  functions,  and 
nothing  is  neglected  that  experience  can  suggest  to  give  satisfaction  to  the  operator. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and 
should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


62 


Power^and  Hand  Feed  Matching  Machine. 

This  is  a  substantial  machine,  intended  for  tonguing  and  grooving  short  stuff  for 
boxes,  bottom  boards  for  wagons,  sheathing,  and  work  that  is  not  parallel  on  its  edges  or 
of  equal  widths. 

The  two  heads,  one  for  tonguing  and  one  for  grooving,  are  run  on  a  heavy  steel  arbor 
under  the  table,  which  is  planed  to  take  up  the  cut  as  the  work  passes  over  the  cutter. 

The  feeding  arrangement  is  very  strong,  consisting  of  four  feeding  rollers,  driven  by 
a  heavy  train  of  gearing  connected  to  the  arbor  by  a  belt ;  changes  of  feed  can  be  made 
by  changing  the  size  of  the  pulley. 

The  fence  is  rigid  in  its  position,  has  two  idler  rollers  to  relieve  it  from  friction,  and 
the  heads  and  driven  rollers  are  adjusted  to  it  for  different  thicknesses  of  stuff,  which  is 
passed  over  the  heads  between  the  rollers  and  the  fence  and  returned  in  the  opposite 
direction. 

The  machine  can  be  constructed  for  hand  work  alone,  or  can  be  combined  and  used 
as  either  a  power  or  a  hand  machine. 

The  pulley  on  the  arbor  is  four  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should 
make  3o00  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


63 


Patent  Solid  Milled  Matching  and  Grooving  Gutters. 

We  take  pleasure  in  presenting  herewith  engravings  of  our  Patent  SoHd  Milled 
Cutters  for  tonguing  and  grooving  lumber.  They  are  made  of  the  best  English  cast- 
steel,  in  superior  style  and  finish,  so  the  opposite  end  can  be  used  for  jointing,  and  will  be 
found  to  be  the  most  efficient  and  durable  of  any  in  use,  and  are  rapidly  superseding  all 
others.  Owing  to  the  improved  method  of  constructing  them  in  one  solid  piece,  they  are 
unequaled  in  the  quantity  of  work  which  can  be  produced,  for  the  following  reasons. 

First — The  shape  of  the  cutter  being  governed  by  the  angle  to  which  the  cutter  is 
ground,  it  is  constantly  retained  the  same,  avoiding  the  liability  to  change  by  wear  or 
sharpening,  that  is  found  in  the  ordinary  cutters. 

Second — The  angle  side  of  the  cutter  being  made  to  work  towards  the  cut,  the  final 
cutting  point  is  brought  at  nearly  right  angles  to  the  surface,  thus  producing  a  scraping 
cut,  which  leaves  the  work  smooth  and  complete  without  further  labor. 

Third — The  cutters  are  set  to  position  much  more  readily  than  the  old  style  of  bits, 
thus  effecting  a  saving  both  of  time  and  labor,  and  actual  use  has  established  the  fact  that 
they  possess  more  than  double  the  durability  of  the  ordinary  style  of  cutters. 

In  placing  the  cutters  in  the  heads,  be  careful  to  insert  them  in  the  opposite  way  from 
the  ordinary  cutters,  i.  e.,  with  the  bevel  of  the  bit  towards  the  cut,  as  will  be  seen  by  the 
accompanying  engraving  below. 

Prices  and  Sizes 
Patent  Solid  Milled  Tonguing  and  Grooving  Cutters. 


MATCHER  HEAD. 


A  full  stock  of  the  principal  sizes  constantly  on  hand.  Cutters  for  any  make  of 
machine  can  be  supplied  at  short  notice.  In  ordering,  send  an  old  bit  or  sketch,  or,  what 
is  better,  a  pattern  made  of  wood,  showing  size  and  width  of  tongue  and  groove. 


64 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Improved  Matcher  Bit  Setter. 

This  machine  is  a  favorite  wherever  used,  for  its  simphcity  and  perfect  adaptation  to 
the  wants  of  planing  machine  operators.  It  is  shown  in  the  engraving  with  the  old 
form  of  cutters  in  the  matcher  heads.  In  using  with  the  patent  solid  milled  cutters,  the 
bevel  of  the  cutter  should  be  placed  on  the  under  side.  It  will  receive  almost  any  size  of 
head,  and  is  quickly  adjusted  to  any  size  of  cutters.  It  is  a  very  useful  machine,  always 
ready  and  reliable,  and  will  pay  for  itself  in  a  short  time,  in  the  saving  of  labor  alone,  over 
the  ordinary  way  of  setting  cutters. 


Knife  Grinding  Machine, 

This  machine  is  intended  especially  for  grinding  planing  knives,  etc.,  and  produces 
a  perfectly  straight  edge  and  true  bevel,  in  one-fourth  the  time  that  it  can  be  done  by  hand. 
It  consists  of  a  frame,  having  a  sliding  carriage,  to  which  the  knife  is  fastened  [readily 
attached  to  any  grindstone  frame].  It  is  quickly  adjusted  to  bring  the  edge  of  the  knife 
against  the  stone;  also  to  give  any  bevel  desired;  when  set  it  is  moved  back  and  forth 
by  hand.  By  its  use,  both  the  knife  and  stone  are  kept  in  much  better  working  order, 
and  both  will  last  much  longer. 

Planing  Knives. 

We  can  furnish  planing  knives,  of  any  style  or  dimension,  on  short  notice.  Also, 
matching  and  molding  cutters,  etc.  Parties  ordering  will  please  send  a  paper  pattern  of 
knife  or  cutter,  conforming  to  the  directions  given  below. 

Directions  for  Ordering  Planing  Knives  :  — 


Place  the  knife  face  down  upon  paper;  mark  around  to 
give  the  length,  width  and  position  of  the  slots ;  then  turn 
the  knife  upon  the  end  and  mark  around  to  give  the 
thickness  and  bevel.    Always  give  the  original  dimensions  on  the  pattern,  thus:  24x32x3. 


n    n  n 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


65 


Power  Automatic  Knife  Grinding  Machine. 

The  above  engraving  represents  a  very  perfect  machine  constructed  expressly  to  meet 
the  requirements  of  planing  mills,  sash  and  door  factories,  agricultural  shops,  etc.  It  is 
simple  and  substantial,  easily  taken  care  of,  and  for  reducing  cutters  to  a  sharp  keen  edge, 
has  no  equal.  It  will  sharpen  planing  knives  of  all  kinds,  long  and  short,  giving  them  a 
perfectly  true  bevel  and  straight  edge. 

For  planing  soft  wood  the  best  angle  for  grinding  the  cutters  is  about  twenty-five 
degrees.  For  very  hard  wood  it  should  be  increased.  The  frame  is  of  neat  design,  made 
in  one  solid  casting  of  cored  section,  and  has  a  large  floor  base.  A  cup,  instead  of  a  disc- 
wheel, is  used,  as  the  knife  is  ground  to  a  more  accurate  bevel,  less  convex,  and  this  form 
of  wheel  will  last  longer  and  can  be  replaced  at  half  the  expense  of  the  other.  In 
grinding,  a  light  cut  is  recommended. 

The  arbor  is  large,  runs  in  bearings  upon  the  head  plate,  arranged  to  move  for- 
ward as  the  wheel  is  reduced  in  size  by  wear.  By  changing  the  stops  on  the  front  edge  of 
the  platen,  the  carriage  will  traverse  forward  and  back  to  suit  the  length  of  the  knife  to  be 
sharpened,  which  is  clamped  in  a  swinging  frame,  adjustable  to  different  angles.  After 
being  started  it  will  run  until  the  knife  is  ground  to  a  perfect  edge,  requiring  no  further 
attention  from  the  operator,  as,  when  ground  to  the  gauge  set,  it  stops. 

It  occupies  much  less  space  than  the  grindstone,  is  much  neater  and  cleaner,  as  the 
use  of  water  is  not  required,  besides  the  edge  upon  the  knife  is  made  with  perfect  accuracy. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  eight  inches  in  diameter,  and  three  and  a  half-inch 
face  and  should  make  550  revolutions  per  minute. 


06 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Molding  Machines. 

The  general  increase  in  the  use  of  moldings  for  building  purposes,  cabinet  and  car 
making,  has  created  a  demand  for  machines  for  their  production,  of  great  capacity  of 
execution  in  speed  and  finish,  as  well  as  adaptability  for  other  purposes,  so  that  the  powers 
of  the  machine  may  be  constantly  utilized. 

In  this  class  of  machinery  we  have,  since  our  last  general  catalogue,  made  great 
advances  and  improvements,  and  have  perfected  from  new  designs  machines  that  we  can 
confidently  recommend  to  parties  requiring  them,  as  being  perfectly  reliable  and  durable, 
and  consequently,  to  users,  the  most  profitable  and  labor  saving  of  any  in  the  country. 
The  proof  of  these  assertions,  and  of  the  popularity  of  the  machines,  is  found  in  the  large 
number  in  use  throughout  this  and  foreign  countries,  and  in  the  constantly  increasing 
demand. 

Believing  no  machine  can  prove  of  profit  to  the  operator  in  which  an  inferior  quality 
of  material  or  workmanship  is  employed,  for  the  purpose  of  producing  a  low-priced  tool, 
we  use  only  the  best  attainable  material,  designed  and  shaped  by  skilled  workmen,  under 
the  supervision  of  men  who  have  a  knowledge  acquired  by  long  and  careful  study  of  the 
wants  of  manufacturers  of  moldings. 

Each  of  our  machines  is  subjected  to  a  thorough  test  after  completion,  thus  guarding 
against  any  possible  defect  in  the  workmanship,  and  securing  the  accuracy  of  fitting  and 
nicety  of  adjustment  required  for  the  production  of  a  perfect  molding. 

Molding  machines  are  divided  into  special  classes,  each  class  being  again  divided  into 
sizes.  The  outside  molding  machines  have  the  bed  with  two  or  three  of  the  heads  outside 
of  the  frame  of  the  machine.  The  inside  molding  machines  have  all  of  the  heads  and  the 
table  inside  the  frame  of  the  machine. 

The  Universal  Wood  Worker  is  a  combination  of  the  Outside  Molding  Machine, 
with  a  machine  for  planing  out  of  wind,  grooving,  gaining,  etc.  These  are  all  designed 
for  straight  work. 

The  Edge  Molding  Machine  has  the  heads  placed  vertically  in  the  table,  and  is 
designed  for  molding  the  edges  of  carved  work,  and  the  Carving  and  Recess  Molding 
Machine  for  a  variety  of  bracket  or  face  molding  peculiar  to  its  construction. 

The  Outside  Molding  Machines  are  now  most  commonly  used,  and  can  be  adapted 
for  various  purposes  besides  molding,  as  woi^king  flooring  and  ceiling.  They  are  con- 
structed with  one,  two,  three,  or  four  heads,  according  to  the  character  of  the  work  to  be 
done. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


67 


The  Inside  Molding  Machines  are  constructed  with  three  or  four  cutter  heads,  and 
are  adapted  to  surfacing,  or  any  work  to  twelve  inches  in  width,  being  designed  for  the 
production  of  light  and  heavy  moldings,  and  general  work  of  every  description,  and,  when 
furnished  with  matching  heads,  can  also  be  used  for  tonguing  and  grooving  flooring  and 
ceiling  up  to  twelve  inches  in  width. 

These  machines  are  constructed  by  us,  with  heavy  weighted  feed  rolls  expansively 
geared,  slotted  steel  cylinders  for  upper  and  lower  arbors,  slotted  side  heads  of  gun  metal 
or  steel,  vertical  adjustment  of  the  upper  cylinder,  improved  clip  for  preventing  tearing  in 
working  cross-grained  lumber,  flexible  pressure  bars,  and  other  features  which  will  com- 
mend themselves  to  the  experienced  operator. 

The  cylinders  and  side  heads  of  these  machines  are  usually  made  to  take  on  four 
knives,  having  slots  planed  on  all  four  sides,  and  their  adjustments  are  such  as  to  enable 
them  to  be  easily  set  to  accurate  positions  in  the  shortest  time  and  with  perfect  certainty. 

The  Edge  Molding  Machines  are  of  various  designs  with  one  or  two  spindles,  the 
single  spindle  machine  being  constructed  to  reverse  its  cutting  direction  while  in  opera- 
tion; the  two  spindle  machine  having  the  cutting  direction  running  opposite. 

The  Carving  or  Recess  Molding  Machine  is  of  recent  introduction.  It  is  designed 
for  working  forms  of  panels  in  the  face  of  the  work,  and  can  be  adapted  to  general  uses 
in  edge  molding.  This  is  an  entirely  new  machine,  and  for  the  purposes  intended  has  no 
superior. 

Engravings  of  these  machines,  with  their  various  cutter  heads,  also  our  improved  solid 
milled  molding,  friezing,  and  recess  paneling  and  penciling  cutters,  with  detailed  descrip- 
tions, will  be  found  in  the  following  pages,  to  which  attention  is  invited. 


68 


Solid  Milled  Sash  and  Door  Cutters. 


These  molding  cutters  are  adapted  for  any  standard  work,  as  for  door,  sash,  bhnd,  or 
bHnd  stile  cutters,  beads,  or  small  moldings.  They  are  formed  by  milling  into  the  face  of 
the  steel,  instead  of  cutting  the  desired  shape  of  the  molding  on  the  edge  and  then  grind- 
ing to  a  bevel.  In  the  latter  method  the  form  of  the  molding  is  liable  to  be  changed  when 
sharpening  the  cutter. 

The  form  of  the  molding  made  by  the  solid  milled  cutter  is  retained  permanently  by 
grinding  to  the  standard  bevel  of  the  cutter.  These  cutters  are  placed  on  the  head  with 
the  ground  angle  towards  the  direction  of  the  revolution  of  the  head,  thus  making  the  cut 
of  the  bit  come  nearly  at  right  angles  to  the  surface,  forming  a  scraping  cut  and  leaving  a 
a  perfect  surface  for  finishing. 

The  cutters  being  made  in  their  dimensions,  they  are  much  more  easily  set  than  the 
old  form  of  molding  cutters,  and  their  durability  is  greater,  the  methods  of  sharpening 
them  being  much  more  accurate. 

Sash  Cutters. 


Door  Cutters. 
Bevel,  Ogee,  and  Ovolo. 

Sash  Cutters. 
Bevel,  Ogee,  and  Ovolo. 

Thickness 
of  Door. 

Width  of 
Cutter. 

Price  per 
Pair. 

Thickness 
of  Door. 

Width  of 
Cutter. 

Price  per 
Pair. 

Thickness 
of  Sash' 

Width  of 
Cutter. 

Pair. 
Price  per 

1  inch, 
l/s  " 

" 

\%,  inch. 
1^  " 

2 

$2  75 
3  00 
3  50 

1^  inch. 

2 

2X  " 

134:  inch. 

2 

2%  " 

$3  50 

4  00 

4  00 

1^  inch. 

1%  - 

2 

inch. 
1^  " 

2 

2X  " 

$2  75 
3  00 
3  25 
3  50 

Door  Cutters. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


69 


FLAT   AND  OVAL.  COVE,  OGEE  OR    ROUNDED  EDGE. 


Solid  Milled  Blind  Slat  and  Stile  Gutters. 


Width  of  Slat. 
1     inch,  .  . 

1^  .  . 


Pair. 
$2  50 

2  50 


Width  of  Slat.  Pair. 
IX     "   $2  50 

"   2  75 


Width  of  Slat. 
XYz  inch,  . 


Pair. 

$2  75 
2  75 


Width  of  Slat.  Pair. 

1^     "   $3  00 

Cove,  or  Round  Edge, 2  75 


Blind  Rod  Gutters. 

For  9-16,  Yz,  or  X  inch  Rods,  per  pair,  $2  50 


Molding  Cutters. 


Size. 

9-16  to  1 
1  1-16  to  2 
Small  Bead 


OF  ALL  STYLES  AND  SIZES. 

Price,  per  lineal  inch  in  width,  45  cents. 

We  are  prepared  to  furnish  Cutters,  to  make  any  style 
Molding  of  which  sample  is  sent,  in  short  order,  and  guar- 
antee satisfaction. 

Single  or  Double  Bead  and  Blind  Rod  Cutters. 

From      to        inch,  by  l-16ths. 

Width.  Price  Per  Pair. 

 1>^  inch  $2  50 

-   IX    "  2  75 

 2       "   3  00 

Tools  for  Planing  Machines,  75  cents  each. 


inch. 


The  engravings  of  heads  illustrated  above  show  the  manner  in  which  the  Solid  Milled 
Cutters  should  be  applied  to  cap  and  square  heads. 


70 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


•i'<;  sii-ih. 


4iQ.  Planing. 


!  Wins  Mat  'her 


4  in.  Combination 
Top  Screw. 


2%  in.  Side  Head. 


Beading  Head. 


Ill 


Cope  Head. 


Pat.  Grooving  Head. 


HEADS  FOR 


Sash,  Molding,  Matching,  Gaining,  etc. 

The  assortment  and  variety  of  heads  illustrated  above  will  be  found  very  complete, 
including  sash,  door,  straight  cap,  and  slotted  molding  heads,  panel  heads,  also  for  match- 
ing, gaining,  beading,  coping,  etc.,  suited  to  any  class  of  work,  or  any  style  of  machine. 

The'matching  heads  are  made  both  with  two  and  three  wings ;  the  slotted  heads  will 
receive  any  kind  of  cutter,  without  regard  to  the  position  of  the  slots.  The  gaining  and 
grooving  heads  are  usually  made  of  gun  metal  or  steel,  perfectly  finished,  accurately 
balanced,  and  provided  with  steel  set  screws. 

In  addition  to  the  usual  number  of  heads  that  accompany  each  of  our  machines,  we 
have,  as  will  be  seen  below,  a  large  assortment  of  heads  suitable  for  almost  every  variety 
of  work. 

We  keep  a  stock  of  these  heads  constantly  on  hand,  and  are  prepared  to  furnish  them 
at  short  notice,  also  sash,  slat,  door,  and  planing  cutter,  and  any  style  of  molding  cutters. 
Parties  who  have  our  new  molding  book  need  only  to  designate  the  numbers  wanted ;  if 
they  have  no  book,  send  for  one,  or  forward  tracing  of  the  moldings  wanted,  and  state 
the  number  and  size  machine  they  are  wanted  to  be  used  upon. 

List  of  Extra  Heads  for 


Nos.  I  and  2  Molding  and  Sash  Machines. 


Panel. 

2yi  in.  sash 

2^  in.  door 

2Yq  in.  slat 

2^  in.  molding 

3  in.  molding 
2^  in.  side  planing 

4  in.  planing 
8  in.  planing 

8  in.  combiuation 


Head. 


Nos.  3  and  4  Molding  Machines. 

Panel.  Head. 

2i^  in.  sash  " 
2%  in.  door 
2j^  in.  slat 
2^  in.  molding 

3  in.  molding 

3)^  in.  molding  " 

in.  molding 
6     in.  molding 

4  in.  combination  ** 
8     in.  combination 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


71 


Double  Panel  Raising  Machine. 

Raising  or  molding  panels  is  an  important  operation  in  sash  and  door  manufacture, 
and  a  machine  is  desirable  which  can  be  adapted  to  other  uses  when  required,  such  as 
sticking  sash,  planing  blind  slats,  trunk  strips,  etc.  The  above  machine  will  raise  a  panel 
on  both  sides,  at  one  operation,  of  any  style  of  molding,  O.  G.  bevel,  etc.,  and  any  width 
up  to  two  and  one-half  inches. 

It  is  provided  with  heavy  cast  steel  arbors  running  in  self-oiling  bearings,  has  a  wide 
table  to  support  the  stuff,  and  two  cutter  heads,  one  above  the  table  and  the  other 
situated  in  and  adjustable  with  the  surface  of  the  table,  readily  accessible  by  swinging  the 
end  of  the  table  outwardly  on  a  hinge.  The  cutters  on  the  heads  are  set  at  an  angle,  to 
produce  a  drawing  cut  and  finish  the  surface  perfectly  smooth,  on  hard  or  soft  wood;  and 
have  no  corners  to  wear  away,  to  the  destruction  of  the  entire  bit. 

There  are  two  weighted  feed  rollers,  and  a  friction  roller  in  the  table,  with  the 
necessary  springs  and  pressure  bars,  to  retain  the  stuff  in  its  place.  The  arbors  run  in 
self-oiling  boxes,  all  parts  are  well  fitted,  easy  of  adjustment,  and  have  every  convenience 
for  performing  the  work  in  the  most  satisfactory  manner. 

Any  width  of  raise  above  two  and  one-half  inches  and  up  to  five  inches  is  made  by 
substituting  other  heads.  By  removing  the  long  hold  down  spring  and  substituting  other 
heads  and  cutters,  it  may  be  utilized  and  used  at  good  advantage  in  sticking  of  all  kinds 
of  sash  moldings,  etc.  It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are 
eight  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make  800  revolutions  per  minute. 


72 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO/S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


NO.  1 

Sash  and  Molding  Machine. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  use  where  one  side  is  to  be  worked  at  a  time,  and  is 
adapted  for  all  kinds  of  sash,  doors,  blind  slats,  trunks,  strips,  etc.  The  arbor  is  large, 
and  runs  in  self-oiling  bearings.  The  cutter  head  will  plane  up  to  six  inches  in  width. 
The  arbor  frame  has  a  lateral  movement  for  accurate  adjustment  in  sticking  sash  and 
moldings.  The  table  will  drop  fourteen  inches  for  grooving  door  rails,  etc,  and  is  raised 
and  lowered  by  the  hand  wheel  in  front. 

It  has  two  feeding  rolls  of  large  diameter  and  made  in  sections,  strongly  geared, 
and  has  changes  of  feed  for  light  and  heavy  work. 

It  has  the  combined  bonnet  and  pressure  bar,  so  arranged  that  they  can  be  swung  out 
of  the  way,  or  moved  to  and  from  the  cutters  to  accommodate  the  work  being  done. 

The  machine  is  complete  with  one  head,  which  can  be  either  a  planing,  rabbeting,  sash, 
or  molding  head,  as  parties  may  indicate. 

Any  of  the  heads  shown  on  pages  68  and  69  of  this  catalogue  can  be  furnished  for  the 
working  of  any  kind  of  sash,  blind  slats,  etc. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  eight  inches  in  diameter,  and  four-inch  face,  and  should 
make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


73 


No.  2 

Patent  Molding  and  Sash  Machine. 

(to  work  three  and  four  sides.) 

This  is  an  effective  and  heavy  machine  for  Hght  moldings,  sash,  door,  and  blind  work, 
or  narrow  flooring.  It  is  substantial  in  construction,  and  all  parts  easy  of  access.  It  is 
made  to  work  six  or  eight  inches  wide,  and  on  either  three  or  four  sides,  as  may  be  wanted. 
The  cutter-head  is  of  steel,  slotted  on  all  four  sides.  The  main  arbor  runs  in  patent  self- 
oiling  boxes,  provided  with  a  lateral  adjustment  for  accurate  work  on  moldings. 

The  side  heads  are  of  steel  and  slotted,  and  revolve  on  steel  arbors,  which  have  a 
lateral  adjustment  sufficient  to  take  in  stuff  up  to  six  inches  wide.  Both  side  spindles 
have  vertical  adjustment,  and  the  outside  spindle  can  be  swung  to  an  angle. 

The  under  head  is  provided  with  an  adjustable  throat,  and  can  be  quickly  adjusted  to 
the  thickness  of  the  cut.  The  bonnet  and  attached  pressure  bar  can  be  instantly  thrown 
back  clear  of  the  upper  head.  It  has  two  feeding  rolls  of  large  diameter,  two  changes  of 
speed,  and  strongly  geared,  and  their  motion  is  instantly  started  or  stopped  by  means  of 
a  lever  placed  in  the  most  convenient  position  for  the  operator. 

The  table  or  platen  has  a  vertical  movement  of  fourteen  inches.  The  pulleys  are  of 
large  diameter;  all  bearings  provided  with  devices  for  retaining  the  oil  in  contact  with  the 
journals,  and  the  entire  machine  fitted  together  so  as  to  give  it  great  strength.  Heads  and 
cutters  for  molding  the  edges  of  blind  slats,  or  for  working  sash  and  panels,  can  be  fur- 
nished as  extra  when  desired ;  also,  any  of  the  heads  and  cutters  illustrated  on  pages  68 
and  69.     It  is  provided  with  all  the  necessary  guides,  springs,  wrenches,  etc. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter,  four- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


75 


No.  3 

Medium  Size  Patent  Molding  Machine. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  doing  all  kinds  of  work  in  a  general  jobbing  shop,  and 
will  be  found  invaluable  to  house  carpenters,  sash,  blind,  and  door,  car  and  agricultural 
implement  makers,  and  will  pay  for  itself  in  a  very  short  time  over  hand  labor. 

It  is  constructed  with  very  heavy  and  substantial  framing,  and  is  capable  of  working 
moldings  up  to  eight  inches  wide.  The  feeding  rolls  are  arranged  to  raise  parallel  with  the 
stuff  being  worked,  and  so  weighted  from  below  as  to  secure  a  uniform  pressure  upon  it 
at  all  times.  By  lifting  the  weighting  lever  the  operator  can  instantly  withdraw  the  stuff 
before  it  reaches  the  cutter  head.    A  very  complete  tool  box  is  affixed  to  the  roller  cranes. 

The  main  arbor  is  of  large  diameter,  revolves  in  self-oiling  bearings,  is  fitted  with  a 
steel  head  slotted  on  all  four  sides,  and  an  adjustable  outside  bearing, which  prevents  vibra- 
tion on  heavy  work,  also  a  lateral  adjustment  for  accurate  work  on  moldings. 

The  under  head  is  also  made  of  steel  and  slotted,  and  revolves  between  adjustable 
nose  pieces,  which  can  be  set  so  as  to  enlarge  or  decrease  the  opening  in  the  table. 
An  adjustable  pressure  plate  is  arranged  over  the  under  head,  and  the  knives  when  once 
set  can  be  instantly  adjusted  to  suit  different  kinds  of  planing.  The  side  spindles  are  of 
steel,  run  in  self-oiling  boxes,  are  fitted  with  slotted  steel  heads,  and  have  vertical  adjust- 
ment to  suit  the  work  being  done.    The  outside  spindle  can  be  adjusted  to  varying  angles. 

The  weighted  shaving  bonnet  and  attached  pressure  shoe  can  be  instantly  swung 
around  clear  of  the  bed,  giving  the  operator  ready  access  to  the  knives.  The  bed  or 
platen  has  a  friction  roll,  and  will  lower  to  take  in  stuff  up  to  fourteen  inches. 

The  under  cylinder  can  be  quickly  detached,  or  the  end  swung  out  so  as  to  easily 
reach  the  cutters,  and  can  be  instantly  adjusted,  to  give  more  or  less  cut  while  in  motion. 
With  each  machine  is  furnished  one  head,  and  one  set  of  straight  cutters  to  each  arbor. 
We  can  also  furnish  as  extra,  if  wanted,  the  heads  and  cutters  for  working  sash,  moldings, 
panels,  blinds,  doors,  viz.  : 


Slat.  2%  Door.  2^2  Sash.  :iix>  Molding.  2  Wing  Matcher.  6  in.  Molding. 


or  any  work  suitable  to  be  done  on  machines  of  this  character,  also  matcher  heads  and 
cutters  for  working  flooring,  or  any  of  the  heads  described  on  page  68,  this  catalogue. 

Full  sets  of  heads,  springs,  and  wrenches,  countershaft  and  pulleys  fitted  for  wide 
belts  are  sent  with  each  machine.  They  are  made  to  work  either  three  or  four  sides,  as 
customers  may  desire,  and  are  most  carefully  and  thoroughly  fitted  in  every  part. 

The  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  furnished  with  this  machine;  they  are  eight 
inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


77 


No. 

New  Heavy  Triple  Roll  Molding  Machine. 

This  is  a  very  strong  machine,  designed  for  hght  or  heavy  work  in  sash  and  door 
molding,  or  for  any  general  manufacturing  business  of  the  same  character.  The  frame  of 
the  machine  is  in  two  parts,  each  cast  solidly  with  the  girts  and  sides  in  one  continuous 
piece.    This  gives  it  great  strength  and  prevents  any  liability  of  twisting. 

The  capacity  of  this  machine  is  to  eight  or  nine  inches  in  width.  The  side  head  will 
dress  to  four  inches  in  thickness,  and  the  bed  may  be  lowered  fourteen  inches.  It  is 
arranged  to  work  three  or  four  sides  at  one  operation,  as  may  be  desired. 

The  feeding  arrangement  consists  of  three  large  and  heavily  weighted  grooved  rollers 
driven  by  heavy  gearing  with  two  speeds  of  feed,  and  shipped  into  or  out  of  gear  by  a 
clutch  operated  by  a  lever.  The  rollers  can  also  be  lifted  from  the  lumber  when  it  is 
desirable  not  to  feed  it  further. 

The  cutter  heads  are  made  of  cast  steel  and  slotted  on  all  four  sides.  The  upper 
head  is  placed  on  a  heavy  steel  spindle  which  runs  in  self-oiling  bearings,  constructed  so 
as  to  constantly  flood  the  journal  with  oil,  the  connecting  frame  with  which  they  are  cast, 
being  gibbed  to  the  frame  of  the  machine  and  adjustable  across  it  by  means  of  a  screw 
and  hand  wheel. 

The  side  heads  both  move  vertically  with  the  bed,  and  are  adjustable  to  the  face  of  it. 
The  outer  head  can  be  moved  to  and  from  the  frame,  or  quickly  set  at  different  angles. 

The  lower  head  has  the  necessary  adjustment  for  thickness  of  cut  and  access  to 
the  head,  and  a  pressure  bar  for  holding  down  the  lumber. 

The  bonnet  is  arranged  for  taking  in  the  largest  cutters,  and  swings  so  that  it  will  not 
lift  into  them. 

It  can  be  moved  to  and  from  the  cutter  head,  and  swung  out  of  the  way  over  the 
machine  for  setting  the  cutters.  The  bed  is  raised  or  lowered  by  a  single  screw,  and  locked 
position. 

The  machine  is  very  long,  allowing  great  lengths  of  belts.  The  pulleys  are  all  of  large 
diameter,  which  ensures  great  power  in  the  cut.  There  is  a  friction  roller  in  the  bed,  and 
the  necessary  springs,  wrenches,  etc.,  are  furnished  with  the  machine. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  .ten  inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch 
face,  and  should  make  1,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


79 


No  .4 

Large  Size  Patent  Molding  Machine. 

(to  work  three  and  four  sides.) 

The  above  engraving  represents  a  large,  heavy,  and  powerful  machine,  designed  for 
working  moldings  up  to  eight  and  ten  inches  wide.  It  is  constructed  in  the  most  thorough 
manner,  and  combines  important  improvements  our  long  experience  in  building  this  class 
of  machinery  has  found  necessary,  in  order  to  produce  the  most  perfect  work  at  the 
highest  attainable  speed. 

As  more  than  eighty  per  cent,  of  the  work  done  on  machines  of  this  character  are 
moldings  less  than  five  inches  wide,  the  value  of  a  first-class  machine  will  at  once  be 
apparent. 

The  same  care  is  used  in  the  construction  of  this  as  all  other  of  J.  A.  Fay  &  Co.'s 
machines.  All  shafts  and  turned  fittings  are  finished  to  standard  sizes,  screws  turned, 
heads  and  threads  made  to  a  regular  system,  holes  bored  and  tapped  to  exactly  correspond, 
and  all  parts  balanced  with  the  utmost  care  ;  journal  bearings  reamed  and  scraped,  the 
very  best  materials  used,  and  every  part  fully  inspected  and  tested  before  leaving  the 
works. 

The  main  spindle  is  of  large  diameter,  run  in  long,  patented,  self-lubricating  bearings, 
lined  with  the  best  lining  material,  and  is  constructed  so  as  to  flood  the  arbor  constantly 
with  oil.    Some  of  its  distinguishing  features  are,  viz.  : 

1st.  The  machine  is  fitted  with  top,  bottom,  and  side  cutters  which  work  simultane- 
ously on  all  four  sides  at  once,  enabling  them  to  work  single  or  double  moldings,  or  to 
plane,  rabbet,  groove  or  tongue  and  bead  at  one  operation,  with  a  capacity  of  fifteen  to 
thirty  feet  per  minute. 

2d.  The  main  spindle  is  of  large  diameter,  with  provision  to  take  up  any  end  play  by 
wear,  and  the  gateway  is  gibbed  to  the  frame,  so  it  can  be  laterally  adjusted  without  un- 
loosening bolts ;  all  the  cutter  heads  are  made  of  steel  and  slotted  to  receive  cutters  on  all 
four  sides. 

3rd.  Both  side  spindles  have  vertical  and  lateral  adjustments.  The  outside  spindle 
is  arranged  to  work  at  varying  angles. 

4th.  The  under  cylinder  has  a  vertical  movement  independent  of  the  bed,  enabling 
the  operator  to  vary  the  cut  without  altering  the  cutters  ;  and  the  cutter  heads  are  made  of 
steel,  slotted  on  all  four  sides  so  that  any  form  of  cutter  may  be  used. 

5th.  It  has  our  weighted  shaving  bonnet  and  pressure  shoe,  which  can  be  swung 
clear  of  the  bed,  giving  ready  access  to  the  cutters. 

6th.  The  feed  rolls  are  of  large  diameter,  raise  parallel  to  the  stuff  being  worked, 
and  so  weighted  as  to  secure  uniform  pressure  at  all  times;  they  are  hung  in  swinging 
cranes,  and  by  means  of  a  lever  at  the  rear  of  the  machine  are  instantly  elevated  from  the 
stuff  when  it  is  desired  to  withdraw  it  before  reaching  the  cutters. 

7th.  The  lower  roll  in  the  platen  is  also  a  driven  roll,  and  the  bed  will  drop  to  take 
in  thirteen  inches,  and  every  part  including  cutter  head,  arbors,  etc.,  is  easily  accessible. 

It  has  two  changes  of  feed,  full  set  of  pressure  bars,  springs,  wrenches,  etc.,  and  will 
be  found  unequaled  in  its  ability  to  produce  good  work.  Matcher  heads  and  cutters  are 
furnished,  when  wanted  for  flooring ;  also  extra  heads  and  profile  cutters  for  any  style  of 
molding. 

It  is  supplied  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  ten  inches  in  diameter 
and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  1,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


81 


NO.  1  TWO  ROLL 
Inside  Patent  Molding  and  Beading  Machine. 

(to  work  four  sides  and  bead.) 

This  is  a  substantial,  well  built  machine ;  will  work  moldings  on  one  or  both  sides 
twelve  inches  wide  and  under,  and  up  to  five  inches  in  thickness ;  also,  plane,  tongue, 
groove,  and  bead  twelve  inches  wide. 

The  cylinders  are  made  from  solid  cast  steel,  belted  on  each  side,  and  run  in  large 
patent  self-oiling  bearings,  slotted  on  each  face,  enabling  the  cutters  to  be  set  at  varying 
angles  and  capable  of  sticking  any  size  of  molding,  by  using  cutters  on  all  four  sides, 
•     thus  equalizing  the  cut  and  utilizing  the  power. 

The  under  cylinder  has  a  vertical  adjustment,  graduated  to  different  thicknesses  of 
cut  while  in  motion,  and  by  simply  loosening  one  bolt  the  pressure  bar  and  stands  can  be 
swung  entirely  clear  of  the  cylinder,  giving  free  access  to  the  cutters  for  purposes  of  sharp- 
ening or  adjusting. 

The  patent  beading  attachment  is  placed  upon  the  pressure  bar,  over  the  under 
cylinder,  so  as  to  gauge  the  depth  of  the  bead  from  the  surface  of  the  board,  thus  securing 
an  automatic  adjustment  of  the  beading  shaft  at  all  times. 

The  upright  spindles  can  be  moved  vertically  or  horizontally  while  in  motion,  the 
outer  spindle  to  any  angle  desired,  and  is  provided  with  our  patent  self-oiling  bearings  and 
patent  steps. 

The  side  heads  are  made  of  steel,  and  the  arbors  have  a  lateral  adjustment  on  separate 
platens,  and  are  provided  with  lock  attachment  for  preventing  the  possibility  of  move- 
ment after  the  heads  are  brought  to  the  desired  position ;  also  the  patent  chip  breaker  for 
holding  the  fibre  of  the  wood  while  the  side  cuts  are  being  made. 

It  has  two  feeding  rolls  of  large  diameter,  the  upper  one  made  in  sections  fitted  with 
our  patent  weighting  attachment  and  pivoted  boxes,  which  secures  an  equal  pressure  on 
the  lumber  being  worked,  regardless  of  any  inequalities  in  the  thickness. 

The  rolls  are  connected  by  patented  expansion  gearing  of  superior  construction, 
which  allows  the  upper  roll  to  adapt  itself  to  the  varying  angles  on  irregularly  sawed 
lumber.     We  can  furnish  matcher  heads  and  cutters  for  working  flooring,  when  desired. 

The  stuff  being  worked  may  be  quickly  withdrawn  from  the  machine  by  elevating 
the  feed  rolls,  by  means  of  a  lever  placed  in  convenient  reach  of  the  operator.  It  has 
changes  of  feed,  improved  belt  tightener,  and  fully  provided  with  pressure  bars,  guides, 
wrought  iron  moulding  caps  for  the  heads,  steel  wrenches,  etc.  All  the  adjustments  are 
made  with  the  greatest  facility,  and  nothing  has  been  omitted  that  would  enhance  the 
efficiency  of  the  machine. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  twelve  inches  in 
diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


82 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


83 


No.  2  FOUR  ROLL 
Large  Inside  Patent  Molding  and  Ceiling  Machine. 

\\    (to  work  four  sides  and  bead.) 

This  machine  is  larger  than  that  described  on  the  preceding  pages,  and  embraces  new 
and  important  labor-saving  features,  thereby  increasing  the  capacity  for  the  production  of 
any  size  or  style  of  molding,  from  the  smallest  to  the  largest,  with  the  greatest  accuracy 
and  rapidity. 

It  will  work  moldings  on  one  or  both  sides,  twelve  inches  wide  and  under,  and  up  to 
five  inches  in  thickness,  also  plane,  tongue,  groove,  and  bead  twelve  inches  wide. 

The  cylinders  are  made  from  forged  cast  steel,  belted  on  each  side,  and  run  in  large 
patent  self-oiling  bearings,  are  slotted  on  each  face,  enabling  the  cutters  to  be  set  at 
varying  angles  and  capable  of  sticking  any  style  of  molding,  by  using  cutters  on  all  four 
sides,  thus  equalizing  the  cut  and  utilizing  the  power. 

The  upper  cylinder  has  a  special  arrangement  for  securing  a  lateral  adjustment  across 
the  bed  for  accurate  work  on  fine  moldings ;  has  movable  pressure  bars  each  side  of  the 
cut,  and  the  bed  is  provided  with  recesses  for  the  projection  of  cutters  below  the  surface. 

The  under  cylinder  has  a  vertical  adjustment,  graduated  to  different  thicknesses  of 
cut  while  in  motion,  and  adjustable  nose  pieces  for  closing  the  gap  over  the  cutters  for 
fine  work  ;  by  simply  loosening  one  bolt  the  pressure  bar  and  stands  can  be  swung  entirely 
clear  of  the  cylinder,  giving  free  access  to  the  cutters,  for  purposes  of  sharpening  or  adjusting. 

The  patent  beading  attachment  is  placed  upon  the  pressure  bar,  over  the  under 
cylinder,  so  as  to  gauge  the  depth  of  the  bead  from  the  surface  of  the  board,  thus  securing 
an  automatic  adjustment  of  the  beading  shaft  at  all  times. 

The  upright  spindles  can  be  moved  vertically  or  horizontally  while  in  motion,  the 
outer  spindle  to  any  angle  desired,  and  are  provided  with  our  patent  self-oiling  bearings  and 
patent  steps. 

The  side  heads  are  made  of  steel,  and  have  a  lateral  adjustment  on  separate  platens, 
and  provided  with  lock  attachment,  for  preventing  the  possibility  of  movement  after  the 
heads  are  brought  to  the  desired  position,  also,  the  patent  chip  breaker  for  holding  the 
fibre  of  the  wood  while  the  side  cuts  are  being  made. 

It  has  four  feeding  rolls  of  large  diameter,  the  upper  one  made  in  sections  fitted  with 
our  patent  weighting  attachment  and  pivoted  boxes,  which  secures  an  equal  pressure  on 
the  lumber  being  worked,  regardless  of  any  inequalities  in  the  thickness. 

The  rolls  are  connected  by  patented  expansion  gearing,  of  superior  construction, 
which  allows  the  upper  roll  to  adapt  itself  to  the  varying  angles  on  irregularly  sawed 
lumber.  We  can  furnish  matcher  heads  and  cutters  extra,  when  wanted ;  with  this  addi- 
tion it  makes  a  first-class  machine  for  ceiling  and  flooring,  working  all  four  sides  at  once. 

The  stuff  being  worked  can  be  quickly  withdrawn  from  the  machine  by  elevating 
the  feed  rolls,  by  means  of  a  lever  placed  in  convenient  reach  of  the  operator.  It  has 
changes  of  feed,  improved  belt  tightener,  and  fully  provided  with  pressure  bars,  guides, 
wrought  iron  molding  caps,  for  the  heads,  steel  wTenches,  etc.  All  the  adjustments  are 
made  with  the  greatest  facility,  and  nothing  has  been  omitted  that  would  enhance  the 
efficiency  of  the  machine. 

The  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  furnished  with  this  machine  ;  they  are  twelve 
inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


84  /  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


J,  A,  Fay  &  Oo.'s  Patent  Universal  Wood  Worker. 

The  Universal  Wood  Worker  is  acknowledged  by  all  to  be  one  of  the  most  important 
labor-saving  machines  in  the  entire  list  of  wood-cutting  machinery.  Since  the  issue 
of  our  last  general  catalogue,  we  have  become  half  owners  of  the  Climer  &  Riley  Uni- 
versal Wood-Worker  Patent,  as  will  be  seen  below,  and  have  made  important  improve- 
ments, largely  increasing  its  value  and  capacity  over  the  old  style  of  machines,  which  we 
have  secured  by  letters  patent,  and  are  found  only  on  our  machines.  We  take  pleasure 
in  announcing  to  the  public  this  important  addition  to  our  already  extensive  list  of  wood- 
working tools. 

Special  Notice  of  Sale. 
This  is  to  certify,  "  That  I  have  this  ^th  day  of  fanuary,  1876,  sold  and  conveyed  to  J.  A, 
Fay  &  Co.,  one  undivided  half -interest  in  the  Patent  No.  59,966,  dated  Novembei  27,  1866, 
granted  to  Henry  Clinier  and  foJin  D.  Riley  for  improvements  in  Planijig  Mac  J  lines  known  as 
the  Universal  Wood  Worker,  and  with  it  all  the  light  of  the  Estate  of  said  fohn  D.  Riley ^ 
deceased,  to  nse  such  name  i?i  making  and  selling  machines.         f.  B.  MANNIX,  Admin. 

The  molder  and  wood-worker  sides  are  securely  connected  upon  one  solid  column 
with  a  substantial  base,  covering  sufficient  floor  surface  to  insure  perfect  stability.  The 
arbors  are  all  made  of  steel,  are  of  large  diameter,  and  run  in  long  self-oiling  bearings. 

The  two  sides  of  the  machine  are  driven  from  a  countershaft,  arranged  to  convey 
the  power  to  both  sides  simultaneously  or  separately,  as  the  operator  may  desire.  This 
method  of  obtaining  independence  of  the  combination  allows  two  operators  to  perform 
their  work  on  either  side  without  either  interfering  with  the  other,  and  either  side  may  be 
started  or  stopped  without  affecting  the  other — a  most- valuable  feature. 

We  claim  for  the  J.  A.  Fay  Co.  Patent  Universal  Wood  Worker,  that  it  is: 

Unrivalled  in  the  range  and  variety  of  work  for  which  it  is  adapted. 

Unequalled  in  readiness  of  adjustment,  as  it  has  less  parts  to  adjust. 

Superior  in  the  ease  with  which  the  work  is  performed,  and  the 

Only  wood  worker  made  where  both  sides  may  be  operated  upon,  and  either  side 
started  or  stopped  without  interfering  with  the  other. 

The  most  substantial  and  powerful  universal  wood  worker  made. 
A  greater  labor-saver  than  any  other  of  its  class. 
Unsurpassed  in  its  economy  of  shop  room. 
Perfect  in  the  arrangement  of  the  arbors  and  working  parts. 

Provided  on  the  molding  side,  as  no  other  wood  worker  is,  with  all  the  adjustments 
necessary  to  produce  perfect  moldings,  etc.,  etc. 

As  a  planer  it  is  adapted  for  ordinary  surfacing  and  thicknessing,  planing  out  of  wind, 
surfacing  square,  beveling  or  tapering  pieces,  facing  up  newels,  balusters,  etc. 

As  a  molding  machine  it  will  work  moldings,  either  simple  or  complex,  in  the  most 
perfect  manner,  up  to  eight  inches  in  width ;  has  all  the  adjustments  of  our  regular  mold- 
ing machine,  will  stick  sash  and  doors,  tongue  and  groove,  and  on  the  wood  worker  side 
will  work  waved,  oval,  elliptical,,  circular,  and  serpentine  molding,  etc. 

Among  the  other  uses  to  which  the  machine  can  be  applied  we  may  mention :  planing 
out  of  wind,  surfacing  straight  or  tapering  work,  rabbeting  door  frames,  etc.  ;  rabbeting 
and  facing  inside  blinds,  jointing,  beveling,  chamfering,  plowing,  making  glue  joints, 
squaring  up  bed-posts  table  legs,  newels,  etc.  ;  raising  panels  either  square,  bevel,  or  ogee, 
sticking  beads,  working  circular  molding,  ripping,  cross-cutting,  tenoning,  etc.,  as  shown 
on  pages  97  to  102  and  a  variety  of  other  operations  limited  only  by  the  skill  and  ingenuity 
of  the  operator. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY.  85 


The  molding  side  is  so  arranged  as  to  form  a  complete  and  perfect  molder.  The 
heads  are  made  of  steel  and  slotted  on  their  four  faces.  The  spindles  are  also  of  steel; 
the  upper  spindle  having  an  outside  bearing  to  prevent  vibration  in  heavy  cutting. 

The  side  spindles  are  fixed  to  and  move  with  the  table,  have  self-oiling  steps,  and 
vertical,  horizontal,  and  angular  adjustments.  The  bed  will  drop  twelve  inches.  The 
feeding  rolls  are  of  large  diameter,  powerfully  geared,  heavily  weighted,  and  arranged  for 
fast  or  slow  feed. 

The  end  of  the  bed  can  be  swung  entirely  clear  of  the  under  cylinder,  thus  giving 
ready  access  to  the  knives  for  purposes  of  adjustment.  The  under  cylinder  has  vertical 
adjustment  to  obtain  desired  thickness  of  cut,  and  adjustable  throats  for  bringing  the  table 
close  to  the  cut  of  the  head,  or  enlarging  the  opening  for  heavier  cuts  on  the  lower  side^ 
and  also  for  working  blind  slats  or  springing  moldings  from  the  bottom  side. 

The  Wood-Worker  side  is  constructed  with  iron  platens,  planed  perfectly  true  and  have 
independent  vertical  and  lateral  adjustments,  quickly  made  by  the  operator.  When  facing 
or  planing  out  of  wind,  the  vertical  and  lateral  adjustments  can  be  made  simultaneously, 
thus  constantly  retaining  the  proper  distance  between  periphery  of  cut  and  the  edge  of  table. 

All  the  different  functions  of  the  machine  are  secured  by  the  use  of  two  tables,  while 
other  machines  of  this  kind  have  three  tables,  thereby  saving  time  in  making  adjustments. 
The  tables  are  made  with  grooves  to  receive  the  gaining  frame,  and  are  made  continuous 
by  filling  pieces  connecting  the  two  tables  at  each  side. 

The  arbor  is  of  steel,  of  large  diameter,  and  revolves  in  bearings  supported  on  the 
column.  One  bearing  is  cast  solidly  to  the  column,  and  the  other  is  movable,  being  placed 
in  a  seat,  the  height  of  which  to  the  center  of  the  arbor  is  equal  to  one-half  the  diameter 
of  the  largest  head  to  be  used.  The  movable  or  outside  bearing  is  instantly  detached  for 
the  purpose  of  substituting  different  heads.  This  is  a  very  important  and  advantageous 
feature,  as  it  gives  greater  stability  to  the  arbor  and  obviating  its  liability  to  spring, 
renders  the  machine  capable  of  performing  a  larger  range  of  work. 

The  adjustable  fence  and  bevel  rest  is  fastened  to  the  front  table,  and  is  quickly  ad- 
justable to  different  angles,  and  can  be  moved  crosswise  to  any  part  of  the  table.  It 
serves  as  a  guide  for  the  greatest  part  of  the  work  done  on  the  machine,  and  being  at- 
tached to  and  forming  a  part  of  the  forward  table  always  maintains  its  proper  position  in 
relation  to  the  knives. 

The  gaining  frame  is  used  for  guiding  the  stuff  when  passing  over  the  gaining  head. 
It  traverses  in  the  recesses  in  the  front  of  the  tables,  requires  no  bolting  to  the  machine, 
and  is  readily  adjustable  for  making  either  a  straight  or  angular  cut. 

The  saw  frame  fits  in  between  the  two  tables  and  forms  a  continuous  saw  table.  It  is 
provided  to  receive  rip  or  cross-cut  saws,  and  can  be  attached  in  two  minutes'  time. 

Each  machine  is  provided  with  an  eight-inch  three-knife  planing  head,  rabbeting, 
jointing,  and  capped  heads,  and  is  fitted  to  receive  our  expansion  gaining  and  paneling 
heads,  and,  when  desired,  can  be  fitted  on  opposite  sides  with  boring  and  routing  table, 
which  has  vertical  and  lateral  adjustments  to  suit  the  size  of  the  stuff  being  worked. 

We  furnish  as  extra  when  desired :  solid  and  expansion  groover-heads,  panel  raising 
heads,  rabbetting  heads,  jointing  heads,  capped  molding  heads,  or  heads  and  fixtures  for 
any  special  work  the  machine  may  be  desired  to  do. 

In  the  following  pages  will  be  found  diagrams  and  instructions,  which  will  enable 
the  intelligent  operator  to  fully  understand  its  scope  and  method  of  operation. 


86 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  1 

Solid  Frame  Patent  Variety  Wood  Worker. 

WITH  ADJUSTABLE  FENCE  AND  BEVEL  REST,   VERTICAL  AND  LATERAL  ADJUSTMENT  OF  TABLES, 
OUTSIDE  BEARING,   SELF-OILING  JOURNAL  BOXES,  ETC. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


87 


No.  1 

Solid  Frame  Patent  Variety  Wood  Worker. 

This  is  a  most  valuable  labor-saving  machine  for  carpenters,  builders^  sash  and  door 
shops,  pattern  makers,  wagon  shops,  etc.,  and,  in  fact,  will  be  found  of  great  use  and 
benefit  to  the  intelligent  operator  in  almost  every  wood-working  shop  for  planing  out  of 
wind,  planing  straight  or  tapering  work,  rabbeting  door  frames,  etc.,  rabbeting  and  facing 
inside  blinds,  jointing,  beveling,  gaining,  chamfering,  plowing,  making  glue  joints,  squaring 
up  bed  posts,  table  legs,  newels,  etc.,  raising  panels  either  square,  bevel,  or  O.  G.,  sticking 
beads,  working  circular  molding,  ripping,  cross  cutting,  tenoning,  etc.,  etc. 

In  the  range  and  variety  of  work  for  which  it  is  adapted,  readiness  of  adjustment,  the 
ease  with  which  it  is  operated  and  kept  in  order,  the  accuracy  and  rapidity  with  which  the 
work  is  performed,  economy  of  shop  room,  and  in  durability  of  construction  and  labor- 
saving  qualities  it  is  unequaled. 

It  is  constructed  with  a  substantial  cored  column,  so  arranged  that  it  can  be  belted 
either  from  above  or  below,  and  is  provided  with  a  cast  steel  arbor  of  large  diameter, 
running  in  self-diling  boxes,  which  has  a  detachable  outside  bearing.  By  simply  loosening 
a  bolt  at  the  bottom  of  this  outside  bearing,  it  can  be  instantly  removed  for  the  purpose 
of  substituting  different  heads  for  the  various  kinds  of  work,  and  as  rapidly  adjusted  to 
place  again. 

This  important  advantage  will  be  readily  manifest,  as  the  arbor,  having  an  outside 
bearing  support  runs  without  vibration,  and  is  not  liable  to  spring,  thus  rendering  the 
machine  capable  of  performing  a  larger  range  of  work.  The  heads  are  as  quickly  changed 
on  this  machine  as  on  those  where  the  head  overhangs  the  bearing,  while  it  is  rendered 
more  certain  and  steady  in  its  operation. 

The  tables  are  made  of  iron,  planed  perfectly  true,  have  independent  vertical  and 
lateral  adjustments  to  adapt  them  to  the  work  being  performed,  and  are  so  arranged  that 
for  facing  or  planing  out  of  wind  these  adjustments  are  made  simultaneously,  thus  con- 
stantly retaining  the  proper  distance  between  the  periphery  of  cut  and  edge  of  table. 
Machines  constructed  by  other  builders  require  three  tables  to  be  adjusted,  while  in  the 
Patent  Variety  Wood  Worker  all  the  functions  are  secured  with  two,  thus  affecting  a 
saving  of  time  to  the  operator  in  adjusting  his  machine  to  do  various  kinds  of  work. 

Another  very  important  advantage  will  be  found  in  the  fence,  which  requires  no  sepa- 
rate adjustment ;  being  attached  to  and  forming  a  part  of  the  foreward  table  it  always 
maintains  its  proper  position  in  relation  to  the  cutters.  It  has  a  lateral  adjustment, 
is  fitted  to  receive  pressure  springs  for  holding  down  the  stuff,  and  swings  to  different 
angles  for  beveling  work.  For  sawing,  a  table  is  inserted  between  the  other  two,  making 
a  solid  and  continuous  saw  table. 

When  desired,  we  furnish  upon  the  rear  side  a  boring  and  routing  table  for  all 
common  boring  and  routing.  A  complete  dovetailing  attachment  can  also  be  fitted  to 
the  machine,  and  is  a  valuable  addition  to  its  already  numerous  functions.  With  each 
machine  is  furnished  one  eight-inch  three  knife  planing,  one  rabbeting,  one  jointing,  and 
one  capped  molding  head,  adjustable  fence  and  bevel  rest. 

The  cyHnder  pulley  is  three  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter,  five-inch  face,  and  should 
make  3,600  revolutions  per  minute. 


89 


No.  2 

Solid  Frame  Patent  Variety  Wood  Worker. 

This  is  a  somewhat  larger  and  heavier  than  our  No,  1  machine,  and  is  thoroughly 
adapted  for  the  heaviest  range  of  work.  It  is  constructed  on  a  firm  and  substantial  column 
cast  in  one  solid  piece  of  convenient  height  for  the  operator,  and  is  a  most  valuable  labor 
saving  tool  for  carpenters,  builders,  sash  and  door  shops,  pattern  makers,  wagon,  carriage, 
and  furniture  manufactories,  etc.,  as  it  will  perform  a  great  variety  of  work  which  would 
otherwise  require  hand  labor  or  the  use  of  several  machines. 

It  will  plane  out  of  wind,  surface  straight  or  tapering,  rabbet  door  frames,  etc., 
rabbet  and  face  inside  blinds,  joint,  bevel,  gain,  chamfer,  plow,  make  glue  joints,  square  up 
bed  posts,  table  legs,  newels,  etc.,  raise  panels  either  square,  bevel,  or  ogee,  stick  beads, 
w^ork  circular  molding,  rip,  cross-cut,  tenon,  dovetail,  etc.,  as  shown  by  accompanying 
diagrams. 

The  iron  platens  are  planed  perfectly  true  and  have  independent  vertical  and  lateral 
adjustments.  The  vertical  adjustment  is  quickly  made  by  means  of  hand  wheels,  placed 
in  the  most  convenient  position  for  the  operator.  When  facing  or  planing  out  of  wind, 
the  vertical  and  lateral  adjustments  can  be  made  simultaneously,  thus  constantly  retaining 
the  proper  distance  between  periphery  of  cut  and  edge  of  table. 

All  of  the  different  functions  of  the  machine  are  secured  by  the  use  of  two  tables, 
while  other  machines  of  this  kind  have  three  tables,  thereby  effecting  a  saving  of  time  in 
making  adjustments.  The  tables  or  platens  are  made  with  grooves  to  receive  the  gaining 
frame,  and  are  made  continuous  by  filling  pieces  connecting  the  two  tables.  For  sawing, 
an  extra  table  can  be  inserted  between  the  other  two,  making  a  solid  and  continuous 
saw  table. 

The  arbor  is  of  steel,  of  large  diameter,  and  revolves  in  bearings  supported  on  the 
column.  One  bearing  is  cast  solidly  to  the  column,  and  the  other  is  moveable,  being 
planed  in  a  seat,  the  height  of  which  to  the  center  of  the  arbor  is  equal  to  one-half  the 
diameter  of  the  largest  head  to  be  used.  The  movable  or  outside  bearing  is  readily 
detachable  for  the  purpose  of  substituting  different  heads,  by  loosening  a  bolt  at  the 
bottom.  This  is  a  very  important  and  advantageous  feature,  as  it  gives  greater  stability  to 
the  arbor  and,  obviating  its  liability  to  spring,  renders  the  machine  capable  of  performing 
a  larger  range  of  work. 

Another  very  important  advantage  will  be  found  in  the  fence,  which  requires  no 
separate  adjustment.  Being  attached  to  and  forming  a  part  of  the  forward  table,  it  always 
maintains  its  proper  position  in  relation  to  the  knives.  The  fence  has  lateral  adjustment, 
is  fitted  to  receive  pressure  springs  for  holding  down  the  stuff,  and  swings  to  different 
angles  for  beveling  work. 

Each  machine  is  provided  with  an  eight-inch  three-knife  planing  head,  rabbeting, 
jointing,  and  capped  heads,  and  is  fitted  to  receive  our  expansion  grooving  and  paneling 
heads,  and  when  desired  can  be  fitted  on  the  opposite  sides  with  boring  and  routing  table, 
with  vertical  and  lateral  adjustments  to  suit  the  size  of  the  stuff' being  worked;  also  an 
attachment  for  dovetailing  both  front  and  end  of  boxes  or  drawers.  This  is  attached 
to  the  rear  side,  fitting  on  the  same  slides  of  the  boring  table. 

.  In  the  range  and  variety  of  work  for  which  this  machine  is  adapted,  readiness  of 
adjustment,  the  ease  with  which  it  is  operated  and  kept  in  order,  the  accuracy  and  rapidity 
with  which  the  work  is  performed,  economy  of  shop  room,  and  in  durability  of  construc- 
tion and  labor-saving  qualities  it  will  be  found  a  most  superior  machine. 

Cylinder  pulley  is  three  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter,  and  should  make  3,600 
revolutions  per  minute. 


92  /.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Specifications  of  Patent  Universal  Wood  Workers. 

On  the  preceding  pages  will  be  found  illustrations  and  descriptions  of  the  J.  A. 
Fay  &  Co.  Solid  Frame  Patent  Universal  Wood  Workers.  They  embrace  all  the  essential 
features  of  the  original  Climer  &  Riley  patent  and  its  reissue,  together  with  the  recent 
improvements  originated  by  ourselves,  and  secured  by  letters  patent.  After  having  thor- 
oughly tested  their  capabilities  we  have  no  hesitancy  in  saying  we  believe  them  to  be 
one  of  the  most  important  and  valuable  wood  working  machines  extant. 

They  are  constructed  in  two  varieties  to  work  either  one,  two,  three,  or  four  sides,  with 
separate  arbors  and  outside  bearing  supports  upon  each  side,  as  herewith  illustrated  ;  also 
with  the  main  arbor  extending  from  one  side  to  the  other,  with  the  patent  outside  bearing 
supports.  This  latter  form  of  machine  is  of  much  cheaper  construction,  and  will  be 
found  illustrated  and  more  fully  described  hereafter. 

Among  the  many  purposes  to  which  they  are  adapted  is  planing  straight  or  out  of 
wind,  tapering,  rabbeting  door  and  window  frames,  rabbeting  and  facing  inside  blinds, 
jointing,  beveling,  chamfering,  plowing,  making  glue  joints,  raising  panels,  ripping,  cross- 
cutting,  tenoning,  circular  molding,  dovetailing,  etc.  The  form  and  manner  of  casting 
the  frame  in  one  piece  makes  it  very  strong  and  substantial,  and  insures  stability  and 
permanency. 

Both  sides  of  the  machine  are  driven  from  one  countershaft,  arranged  so  as  to  convey 
the  power  to  both  sides  simultaneously  or  separately,  as  the  operator  may  desire.  This 
method  of  obtaining  independence  of  the  combination  allows  the  operator  to  perform  the 
work  on  either  side  without  interfering  with  the  other,  and  either  side  may  be  started  or 
stopped  without  effecting  the  other.  This  is  accomplished  by  means  of  a  double  friction 
pulley  upon  the  countershaft,  carrying  two  belts  and  operated  by  two  levers. 

We  furnish  five  sizes  of  these  machines;  viz: 

No.  "A"  Patent  Universal  Wood  Worker. 

This  machine  has  the  molder  side  to  work  one  side,  with  parallel  raising  feed  rolls, 
heavily  weighted,  with  gibbed  gateway,  self-oiling  arbor  bearings,  swinging  bonnet,  and 
adjustable  pressure  bar,  with  two  eight-inch  heads  and  cutters,  adjustable  fence  and  bevel 
rest,  vertical  and  lateral  adjusting  platens  or  tables,  outside  removable  bearing  support  for 
the  wood  worker  side;  also,  gaining  frame,  saw  frame,  and  countershaft  with  pulleys. 
The  molding  side  will  plane  one  side,  and  work  moldings  up  to  eight  inches  wide,  stick 
sash,  door  rails,  etc. 

No.  "  B  "  Patent  Universal  Wood  Worker. 

This  machine  has  the  molding  side  to  work  two  sides.  The  feed  rolls  raise  parallel  to 
the  stuff  The  arbor  is  of  large  diameter,  and  runs  in  self-oiling  bearings ;  the  gateway 
carrying  the  head  is  gibbed  to  the  column  and  adjusts  laterally  across  the  bed.  The 
molder  side  is  supplied  with  one  eight-inch  and  one  four-inch  slotted  steel  head  and  cutters, 
and  on  the  wood  worker  side  one  three-knife  eight-inch  cutter  head,  with  vertical  and 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


93 


lateral  adjusting  tables,  patent  adjustable  fence  and  bevel  rest,  gaining  frame,  saw  frame, 
and  countershaft  with  pulleys.  On  this  machine  the  molder  side  has  an  upper  head  for 
sticking  sash  and  doors  and  planing  up  to  eight  inches  wide,  and  a  vertical  outside  head 
so  as  to  plane  or  work  moldings  on  the  two  sides  up  to  eight  inches  wide  at  one  operation. 
The  outside  head  has  vertical,  lateral,  and  angular  adjustments,  and  runs  in  self-oiling 
steps  ;  the  feed  works  are  of  large  capacity,  the  same  as  those  previously  described. 

No.  *'C"  Patent  Universal  Wood  Worker. 

The  molding  side  to  this  machine  is  arranged  to  work  three  sides,  and  has  all  the 
improvements  described  in  the  B  machine.  It  is  fitted  with  one  eight-inch  and  two  four-inch 
slotted  steel  heads  and  cutters  and  one  two  and  one-half  inch  molding  head  on  the  molder 
side,  and  one  eight-inch  three-knife  head  and  cutters  on  the  wood  worker  side,  with 
patent  adjustable  fence  and  bevel  rest,  gaining  frame,  saw  frame,  and  countershaft  with 
pulleys.  This  differs  from  the  preceding  machine  only  in  having  an  additional  side  head 
with  all  the  adjustments,  so  as  to  plane  or  work  moldings  up  to  eight  inches  wide,  on  all 
three  sides  at  one  operation.  When  supplied  with  matching  heads  and  cutters,  it  can  be 
used  to  good  advantage  in  surfacing  flooring  or  ceiling  up  to  eight  inches  wide.  Thus,  in 
addition  to  its  capacities  on  the  wood  worker  side,  it  will  be  found  of  an  equal  capacity 
of  our  large  three-side  molding  machine. 

No.  "D"  Patent  Universal  Wood  Worker. 

This  is  our  largest  and  best  machine.  It  is  provided  with  the  molding  side  to  work  on  all 
four  sides  at  once.  It  has  two  eight-inch  and  two  four-inch  slotted  steel  heads  and  cutters 
on  the  molding  side  ;  and  one  three-knife  head  and  cutters  with  outside  removable  bearings 
upon  the  wood  worker  side,  also  patent  adjustable  fence  and  bevel  rest,  gaining  frame,  saw 
frame,  countershaft,  and  pulleys.  This  forms  the  complete  machine  for  doing  all  the  different 
varieties  of  work  shown  and  described  on  pages  83  and  84  of  this  catalogue,  and  also  upon 
the  preceding  pages.  It  will  surface  both  sides,  and  tongue  and  groove,  or  joint  flooring, 
ceiling,  etc.,  up  to  eight  inches  wide.  The  additional  head  (the  under  cylinder)  has  an 
independent  adjustment  to  suit  the  thickness  of  the  cut,  and  with  the  side  heads  raises  and 
lowers  vertically  with  the  platen  or  bed.  The  arrangement  of  this  molding  side  will  be 
found  unequalled  in  the  ease  of  its  adjustment  and  the  accuracy  of  the  work  which  it  pro- 
duces. In  addition  to  the  features  which  accompany  the  machine  as  described,  we  furnish 
as  extra,  when  desired,  solid  and  expansion  groover  heads,  panel  raising  heads,  mold- 
ing heads,  and  any  of  the  features  of  special  work  which  the  machine  may  be  desired  to 
perform.  In  the  following  pages  will  be  found  diagrams  and  instructions  for  operating, 
which,  it  is  believed,  will  interest  the  intelligent  operator. 


94 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


95 


No.  "E'' 
New  Patent  Universal  Wood  Worker. 

(showing  front  or  molder  side.) 

The  machine  illustrated  on  pages  94  and  96  is  a  somewhat  cheaper  construction  of 
Wood  Worker  than  the  "  D  "  machine.  It  will  be  found  very  desirable  for  all  small  shops 
that  do  not  feel  able  to  incur  the  expense  of  several  large  and  expensive  tools,  as  it  com- 
bines in  its  organization  several  machines  in  one,  and  important  labor-saving  features, 
thoroughly  adapted  to  the  requirements  of  house-builders,  carpenters,  cabinet  makers, 
agricultural  and  carriage  shops,  and  in  fact  most  every  wood-working  establishment. 

It  is  made  to  work  moldings  on  either  three  or  four  sides  at  once,  as  may  be  desired. 
The  arbor  is  of  large  diameter,  extends  from  the  molder  to  the  wood-worker  side,  with 
outside  removable  bearings. 

The  upper  and  lower  heads  work  eight  inches  wide.  The  vertical  side  heads  carry 
four  knives,  and  have  both  lateral  and  vertical  adjustment.  The  outer  head  will  incline  to 
varying  angles.  The  lower  head  is  provided  with  removable  mouth-pieces,  to  close  the 
gap  over  the  cutters.  It  is  made  to  adjust  with  the  bed,  and  has  a  separate  independent 
adjustment  for  accurate  work. 

The  wood-worker  side,  illustrated  on  following  page,  is  provided  with  perfectly  planed 
and  ground  tables  or  platens  like  the  *'D"  machine,  and  will  plane  eight  inches  wide. 

It  is  provided  with  adjustable  fence  and  bevel  rest,  for  squaring  up,  planing  out  of 
wind,  smoothing,  jointing,  chamfering,  etc. 

It  has  nearly  all  the  adjustments  of  the  '*D"  machine,  and  will  peiform  all  the  work 
shown  in  the  diagrams  pages  97  to  102,  inclusive. 

We  claim  for  it,  that  it  supplies  the  place  of  several  distinct  machines,  and  performs 
the  same  work,  thereby  saving  money  to  the  purchaser  and  utilizing  space  and  power. 

It  is  quickly  converted  from  doing  one  kind  of  work  to  another  by  simply  changing 
heads — a  very  important  item. 

As  a  planer  it  will  work  up  to  eight  inches  wade,  and  plane  out  of  wind. 

It  is  a  first-class  molding  machine  in  every  respect. 

It  will  thickness  or  stick  sash  and  molding  up  to  eight  inches  wide. 

It  is  a  first-class  panel  raiser,  and  will  raise  both  sides  of  a  panel  at  one  operation. 

It  is  a  perfect  jointing  machine,  jointing  up  to  eight  inches  wide,  or  any  length,  and 
will  make  a  perfect  glue  joint,  square  or  bevel. 

It  is  an  excellent  machine  for  gaining  and  plowing,  and  will  do  every  variety  of  straight 
and  angular  work  with  ease  and  accuracy. 

It  is  quickly  converted  into  a  rip  and  cross-cut  saw,  accurate  and  substantial. 

It  will  do  any  kind  of  rabbeting,  from  one-sixteenth  to  one  and  three-fourths  inches 
wide.  The  same  head  is  also  used  for  halving  the  ends  of  stuff,  tenoning,  rabbeting 
between  ends,  etc. 

On  this  machine  circular  and  elliptical  molding  and  hand  matching  can  be  done  with 
great  rapidity  and  perfect  accuracy. 

It  can  be  supplied  with  boring  and  routing  table,  for  all  kinds  of  boring  and  routing. 

With  the  exception  of  the  countershaft,  which  is  attached  to  the  machine,  it  has 
nearly  all  the  advantages  of  the  larger  machine. 

The  wood-worker  side  of  the  machine  will  be  found  illustrated  on  the  following  page. 

It  has  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and 
six-inch  face,  and  should  make  900  revolutions  per  minute. 


97 


Illustrated  and  Descriptive  Methods  of  Operating 

J.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S 
Patent  Universal  and  Variety  Wood  Workers. 

(for  different  work.) 

The  following  diagrams,  with  the  accompanying  descriptions,  show  the  best  methods 
of  manipulation  to  produce  some  of  the  various  forms  of  work  which  may  be  done  on  our 
Patent  Universal  and  Variety  Wood  Workers.  These  machines  are  the  simplest  in  con- 
struction, have  fewer  parts  to  adjust,  and  have  a  larger  range  of  work  than  any  of  the  kind 
heretofore  brought  to  the  attention  of  the  public. 

The  machine  should  be  placed  so  that  the  table  will  be  on  a  perfectly  level  plane. 
If,  when  the  level  is  placed  lengthwise  and  crosswise  of  the  table,  they  are  found  to  be 
exactly  true,  then  the  parts  of  the  machine  are  correctly  in  line,  as  the  strength  of  the 
frame  renders  it  impossible  for  it  to  warp  out  of  true  : 

Fig.  a. — Table  Adjustment. 


Showing  the  opening  between  the  two  tables 
when  they  are  adjusted  laterally  to  their  fullest 
extent.  This  adjustment  is  made  by  handles  which 
are  raised  during  the  operation,  and  which  by  their 
eccentric  form,  serve,  when  released,  to  lock  the 
tables,  preventing  any  end  movement  when  set  in 
the  proper  position.  The  tables  retain  their  dis- 
tance from  the  cutter  head  while  being  raised  or  lowered,  thus  allowing  them  to  be  adjusted 
while  the  head  is  revolving. 

Fig.  B.  — Method  of  Leveling  Tables. 


Showing  the  best  method  of  leveling  the  ma- 
chine, viz.  :  by  having  the  table  clear  of  obstructions, 
placing  both  sides  of  the  table  on  the  same  hori- 
zontal plane,  and  leveling  both  crosswise  and  length- 
wise. The  machine  after  being  leveled,  bolted  to 
the  floor,  and  belted,  is  then  ready  for  any  desired 
operation,  the  first  one  of  which  we  will  describe  is 
ordinary  surfacing.  The  cutter  head  knives  should  be  thoroughly  sharpened,  edges  made 
perfectly  straight  and  the  same  distance  from  the  center  of  cutter-head,  so  that  each  knife 
will  cut  to  the  same  point.  Upon  these  directions  being  followed,  much  of  the  success  in 
producing  a  perfect  surface  depends.  In  settting  the  knives,  place  the  back  table  on  a  line 
with  the  periphery  of  the  cutting  edge,  lay  a  straight  edge  on  the  table  so  that  it  will  project 
over  the  head,  then  bring  each  knife  in  contact  with  the  straight  edge.  This  should  be 
done  at  different  points  of  each  knife  in  order  to  have  them  perfectly  true. 


98 


/.  A.  FAY  &  GO'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE. 


Fig.  C. — Position  of  Tables  in  Planing  out  of  Wind. 


Showing  the  position  of  the  hands  in  the  operation 
of  truing  up  or  planing  out  of  wind.  The  back  table 
should  be  on  a  level  with  the  periphery  of  the  cutting 
edge,  as  if  above  that  position  the  cut  would  gradu- 
ally run  out  to  nothing;  and  if  below  that  position, 
the  piece  would  be  planed  hollowing  and  clip  out  at 
the  last  end.  Precision  in  this  particular  is  neces- 
sary to  produce  a  perfectly  straight  edge.  The  thickness  of  cut  is  regulated  by  lowering 
the  front  table.  The  piece  should  be  guided  on  the  proper  plane  to  produce  the  required 
surface  until  the  planed  part  reaches  the  back  table,  and  then  it  should  be  constantly  kept 
in  contact  with  that  surface,  as  that  then  forms  the  guide  to  produce  the  desired  perfection 
in  the  surface  being  planed.  The  fence  is  fastened  to  the  front  table  by  hand  wheels  and 
screws,  which,  with  slots  and  extra  holes,  allow  it  to  be  moved  crosswise  to  any  part  of 
the  table.  This  is  an  advantage  in  forming  square  or  bevel  glue  joints  or  any  other 
squaring  up,  as  the  fence  can  be  moved  to  other  parts  of  the  knives  when  the  edge  being 
worked  upon  becomes  dull. 

Fig.  D. — Position  of  Tables  in  Cornering. 

Showing  the  operation  of  plain 
cornering  or  bevel-edging.  The 
fence  is  set  to  the  angle  required, 
and  the  same  precaution  is  neces- 
sary regarding  the  back  table  and 
cutting  edge  as  in  the  preceding  >jp 
example.  The  front  table  should 
owered  to  the  depth  the  corner  is  desired  to  be  cut. 

Fig.  E. — Arrangement  of  Tables  for  Chamfering. 

Showing  the  process  of 
corne  '       or  chamfering 
part  of  the  way  on  a  piece, 
or  between  the  ends.  In 
this  method  both  tables  are 
lowered  to  an  equal  dis- 
tance   below   the  cutting 
edge,  according  to  the  depth  to  be  cut.    To  produce  uniformity  in  the  pieces  being 
worked,  stops  should  be  placed  indicating  the  length  of  cut  to  be  taken.    Place  the  end 
of  the  piece  against  the  stop,  then  lower  gradually  until  the  full  cut  is  made,  holding  the 
piece  firmly  in  order  that  a  smooth  and  perfect  curve  may  be  made  at  end  of  cut. 


Fig.  F. — Arranged  for  Box  Chamfering. 

Showing  the  tables  in  the  same  position  as  the 
preceding  examples,  with  the  addition  of  a  box 
constructed  to  correspond  to  the  shape  of  the  piece 
to  be  cornered,  and  the  stops  placed  permanently 
in  the  box.  By  this  arrangement  duplicates  can 
be  produced  at  any  time  with  greatest  exactness. 
In  any  of  the  foregoing  methods  of  cornering, 
coves  can  be  put  on  the  corners,  or  any  form  of  molding  can  be  made  suitable  for  the 
ornamentation  of  such  parts. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


99 


Fig.  G. — Tables  Arranged  for  Tapering. 

Shows  the  position  of  the  tables 
in  cutting  a  taper.  The  back  table 
should  be  raised  to  the  position  in- 
dicated in  Fig.  C,  and  the  front  table 
lowered  sufficiently  to  bring  the  line 
of  the  desired  taper  on  a  line  with  the 
back  table.  If  it  can  not  be  done  at 
one  operation,  the  taper  can  be  divided  and  cut  off  by  two  or  more  operations.  This  pro- 
cess can  be  applied  also  to  straightening  a  tapered  piece,  or  one  that  is  crooked  or  curved. 

Fig.  H. — Jointing  and  Mitering. 

In  mitering  or  forming  joints 
at  any  angle,  the  fence  is  set  to 
correspond  to  the  desired  angle, 
and  the  front  table  lowered  to  cut 

H|pHaBH|^^g-0-3lM  off  the  form  at  one  operation, 

iiii  '^^^  diagram  shows  the  process 

IW  Blliili:  llhiilll  of  mitering,  which  can  be  done 

as  well  across  the  grain  as  with  the  grain,  and  a  miter  thus  made  forms  a  perfect  joint.  In 
this  operation  the  straight  cutter  head  is  used. 

Fig.  I. — Table  Arranged  for  Rabbeting. 

Shows  the  method  of  arranging  the  tables  for 
rabbeting.  The  tables  are  set  to  one  level,  the  rab- 
beting head  being  substituted  for  the  planing-head. 
The  rabbeting  iron  is  inserted  between  the  tables, 
forming  a  connection  between  them,  and  thus  giving 
a  support  for  the  stock  being  worked. 

Fig.  J. — Machine  Arranged  for  Rabbeting. 

In  this  cut  is  represented 
the  position  of  the  material 
while  being  rabbeted.  The 
width  of  the  rabbet  can  be 
made  as  great  as  the  length 
of  the  rabbeting  head,  and 
gauged  to  the  desired  width 
The  depth  of  the  rabbet  is  graduated  by  the  vertical  movement  of 

Fig.  K. — Machine  Arranged  for  Tenoning. 

In  the  operation  of  halving 
(  tenoning,  the  rabbeting-iron 
is  used  as  in  rabbeting.  The 
tables  are  placed  on  the  same 
level,  and  a  slide  arranged  to 
fit  in  the  grooves  in  front- 
The  lengths  of  tenons  can  be 
gauged  by  the  fence,  or  by  stops  on  the  slide,  and  the  slide  can  be  fixed  to  cut  square  or 
angle  tenons.  The  same  cutter-head  is  used  as  in  rabbeting,  and  the  tenon  may  be  made 
longer  than  the  cutter-head  by  repassing  the  stuff  over  as  often  as  may  be  necessary  to 
increase  the  length. 


by  the  fence. 


the  tables. 


100  /.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Fig.  L. — Rabbeting  and  Jointing  Window  Blinds. 

In  this  cut  is  shown  the  method  of  rabbet- 
ing and  jointing  window  bHnds  at  one  operation, 
the  rabbeting  head  and  a  small  jointing  head  being 
used  for  the  purpose.  The  rabbeting  iron  is  not 
required.  The  depth  of  the  rabbet  is  gauged  by 
the  distance  to  which  the  jointing-head  knives  may 
be  set  from  the  periphery  of  the  rabbeting-head. 
The  back  table  should  be  at  the  same  height  as  the  cutting-edge  of  the  jointing-head.  The 
fence  is  set  to  the  desired  angle  and  width  of  rabbet. 

Fig.  M. — Machine  Arranged  for  Panel-Raising. 

This  cut  shows  the  back-board  for  panel-raising, 
which  is  fastened  to  the  fence,  the  tables  being  ad- 
justed to  the  same  level.  The  depth  of  panel  is 
regulated  by  the  distance  the  tables  are  lowered 
below  the  highest  point  of  the  cutting-edge  of  the 
heads.  A  panel-iron  is  inserted  between  the  tables 
and  between  the  heads  for  the  support  of  the  panel 
being  cut  The  back  and  front  panel-boards  are  cut  out  to  permit  the  heads  to  revolve 
inside,  and  the  amount  of  projection  of  the  cutting-edge  will  be  the  depth  of  the  panel  to 
be  raised.  One  or  both  sides  of  the  panel  may  be  raised  at  the  same  time,  and  they  ma}' be 
made  of  different  widths  on  the  same  panel  by  using  heads  of  different  diameters.  The 
pan^l-heads  are  made  in  pairs  for  back  and  front,  and  are  retained  in  position  by  set  screws. 

Fig.  N. — Raising  Door  Panels. 

Shows  the  panel  being  passed  through  the  entire 
attachment  in  use.  The  front  board  is  attached  to 
a  fence  by  bolts  passing  through  springs  placed  be- 
tween the  front  fence  and  front  board,  thus  giving 
a  flexible  pres- 
sure for  inequali- 
ties in  thickness. 

The  h'ont  fence  is  attached  to  a  slide  board  in  the  front 
groove  of  the  table  by  angle-irons,  slotted  for  graduating 
to  the  thickness  of  the  panels.  This  appliance  is  the 
same  on  all  our  wood-workers,  and  gives  the  most  perfect 
satisfaction.     Special  heads  of  any  diameter,  for  the  capacity  of  the  machine,  made  to  order. 

Fig.  O. — Machine  Arranged  for  Hand  Matching. 

In  the  manner  herein  shown,  the  process  of 
hand-matching  or  tonguing  and  grooving  can  be 
perfectly  accomplished.  The  matcher-heads  are 
placed  on  the  mandrel,  the  fence  forming  a  guide 
for  the  back  head,  and  a  fence  attached  to  a  side 
board  adjusted  to  the  fiont  head,  forming  a  guide 
for  it. 

By  placing  the  fences  at  an  angle,  tongues 
and  grooves  can  be  cut  to  any  angle — an  ad- 
vantage over  other  hand-matchers.  The  stock 
may  vary  in  width,  or  be  tapering,  the  difference 
of  form  requiring  no  extra  adjustment. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


101 


Fig.  p. — Machine  Making  Rule  Joints. 


The  operation  shown  here  is  that  of  making  rule 
or  table  joints  performedby  the  same  process  as 
that  described  'n  hand  matching,  heads  and  cutters 


to  suit  the  required  joint  being  substituted  for  the 
matcher  heads. 

Fig.   O. — Machine  Arranged  for  Plowing 


This  illustration  shows  the  operation  of  groov- 
ing or  plowing.    This  is  performed  with  the  groov- 


uig  or  gaming- 
head  and  one  or 
more  grooves 
can  be  cut, 
as  in  window 


frames.  In  grooving,  the  tables  are  on  the  same  level, 
and  the  depth  of  the  groove  is  gauged  by  the  distance 
the  tables  are  lowered  below  the  periphery  of  the 
cutters. 

Fig.  R. — Making  Waved  Moldings. 

Shows  the  tables  ar- 
ranged for  working  waved 
moldings  similar  to  that 
done  on  a  Shaper  and 
Friezer.  A  collar  is  placed 
on  the  cutter-head  or  spin- 
dle, against  which  the 
pattern  upon  which  the  molding  to  be  worked  is  fastened.  This  is  passed  over  the 
head  with  the  fence  for  a  guide,  the  tables  being  lowered  sufficiently  to  allow  the 
pattern  free  motion  over  the  spindle.  Oval  and  circular  waved  melding  can  be  made  by 
constructing  proper  guides  as  indicated  above.  These  waved  moldings  can  be  made  on 
the  face  or  edge  of  oval,  circular,  or  straight  molding  by  modifications  of  patterns,  etc.,  as 
experience  may  dictate. 

Fig.  S. — Squaring  Up  Newels  or  Balusters. 

Squaring  up  the  un- 
turned parts  of  newels, 
balusters,   etc.,   is  done 
with  the  straight  cutter- 
head.    This  figure  shows 
the  method  of  dressing 
between  the  turned  parts, 
which  is  the  same  as  shown  in  Fig.  F,  with  the  plain  corner  box,  or  by  making  a  sliding 
box  into  which  the  piece  is  placed  and  passed  over  the  cutter  head  with  the  form  in  which 
it  rests.    The  rests  or  forms  should  be  constructed  to  conform  to  the  shape  of  the  stock 
whether  taper  or  straight.     In  this  way  many  operations  can  be  performed  with  speed  and 
accuracy  which  are  tedious  and  difficult  when  done  with  hand  tools. 


102 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Fig.  T. — Machine  Arranged  for  Ripping. 


A  circular  ripping  saw  can  be  placed  on  the 
mandrel  between  two  collars,  and  the  opening 
between  the  tables  filled  with  a  board  fitted  to  the 
tables,  making  a  continuous  saw  table,  upon  which 
ripping  to  any  bevel  can  be  done  by  the  aid  of  the 
fence. 


Fig.  U. 


Machine  Arranged  for  Cross-Cutting. 

In  this  operation  a  circular  cross-cutting  saw  is 
used,  the  fence  being  removed,  and  the  slide  in  the 
back  side  of  the  table  placed  over  the  opening,  thus 
forming  in  connection  with  the  saw  table  a  smooth 
top  the  entire  width  of  the  table.  Cross-cutting  to 
any  angle  can  be  done  by  means  of  a  guide  attached 
to  the  slide  board. 

Figs.  V  &  W. — Arranged  for  Straight  and  Angle  Gaining. 


For  the  purpose  of  gaining,  the  tables  are  placed  on 
the  same  level,  with  the  slide  in  the  back  of  table 
across  the  opening  between  the  tables.  The  depth  of 
the  gain  is  gauged  by  the  distance  of  the  table  below  the 
cutting  edge  of  the  gaining-head.  The  slide  board  of 
the  gaining-frame  is  placed  in  the  groove  in  front  of  the 
table,  with  the  guide-bar  at  right  angles  to  the  gaining- 
head.  The  stock  is  placed  in  front  of  the  guide  and 
operated  as  in  cross-cutting. 

Fig.  X. — Machine  Arranged  for  Circular  Molding. 


Oval  and  circular  moldings  can  be  worked  on 
these  machines  in  the  most  expeditious  manner.  In 
sawing  the  segments,  the  direction  of  the  grain  with 
relation  to  the  molding  head  should  be  considered  so 
there  will  be  as  little  tendency  as  possible  to  split 
off.  The  form  to  be  fastened  to  the  tables  should 
be  the  same  thickness  and  shape  as  the  inside  of 


the  segments 


The  tables  are  the  same  height,  or  a  small  cut 
may  be  taken  off  the  highest  part  of  the  molding  to  insure 
perfect  work,  by  lowering  the  front  table  below  the  periphery 
of  the  deepest  part  of  the  molding  cutters.  A  holding  board 
should  be  made  the  same  circle  as  the  outside  of  the  segments 
and  one  half  inch  wider  than  the  segment,  to  extend  over  and  bear  against  the  form. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


103 


Patent  Edge  Molding  and  Friezing  Machine. 

This  machine  is  intended  for  edge  molding  with  a  reversible  motion  of  the  spindle,  so 
that,  when  desirable,  the  direction  of  the  cut  can  be  changed  to  run  with  the  grain  of  the 
wood.  The  frame  in  which  the  spindle  revolves  is  adjustable  vertically  by  a  screw  and 
hand  wheel.  It  is  planed  to  fit  into  the  column  of  the  machine,  the  pull  of  the  driving 
belt  coming  against  the  body  of  the  machine,  with  no  possibility  of  loosening  the  gibs  or 
allowing  vibration  from  other  causes. 

The  driving  and  reversing  power  is  communicated  through  a  ccuntershaft  with  patent 
friction  pulleys,  one  of  which  is  fixed  on  a  vertical  shaft  on  which  is  the  driving  pulley. 
The  horizontal  shaft  carries  the  reversing  frictions,  which  are  brought  into  contact  with  the 
friction  on  the  vertical  shaft  by  a  treadle  at  the  foot  of  the  operator.  This  arrangement 
operates  without  difficulty,  and  obviates  the  use  of  the  old-style  quarter-twist  belt. 

The  spindle  is  arranged  to  receive  chucks  with  different  sized  stems  for  light  and 
heavy  work.  The  table  is  of  wood  or  iron,  having  the  hole  through  which  the  spindle 
projects  arranged  with  concentric  rings  for  different  sized  cutters.  The  cutters  are  made 
of  solid  steel,  to  cut  in  either  direction,  and  of  any  practicable  size  or  shape. 

It  is  especially  adapted  to  the  wants  of  carriage  and  furniture  manufacturers,  or  any 
business  in  which  there  are  short  curves  and  quick  changes  in  the  work  to  be  done. 

The  pulley  on  the  countershaft  is  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  four  and  a  half  inches 
face,  and  should  make  900  revolutions  per  minute. 


104 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  2 

Edge  Molding  and  Shaping  Machine. 

(with  wood  table  and  elevating  spindle  frames) 

The  accompanying  engraving  is  a  true  elevation  of  our  No.  2  Edge  Molding  and 
Shaping  Machine.  It  is  very  substantially  constructed  in  every  part.  It  is  adapted  to 
every  variety  of  straight  and  irregular  work,  besides  almost  numberless  purposes,  and  is 
an  indispensable  machine  for  saving  labor  in  railroad,  carpenter,  cabinet,  and  carriage 
shops,  etc.  It  embodies  recent  improvements  which  greatly  increase  its  efficiency  and 
add  to  its  value. 

The  spindles  are  of  large  diameter,  run  in  gate  ways,  having  connected  bearings  which 
have  a  vertical  adjustment  by  means  of  the  hand  wheel  at  the  front  of  the  table,  so  that 
the  cutter  heads  can  be  varied  above  the  table  when  required  to  work  wide  or  curved 
moldings,  brackets,  etc. 

The  table  of  this  machine  is  made  of  thoroughly  seasoned  cherry  and  black  walnut 
strips  glued  together,  and  fastened  to  cross  girts,  so  that  it  cannot  warp  or  split,  and  is 
54x44  inches  wide.  The  distance  between  the  spindles  from  center  to  center  is  twenty- 
six  inches. 

The  patent  safety  guards  over  the  cutters  for  the  prevention  of  accident  to  the 
operator  can  be  readily  attached  to  these  machines  when  wanted.  One  set  of  plain 
heads  with  cutters  and  collars  accompany  each  machine ;  also  a  floor  countershaft, 
supplied  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  ten  inches  in  diameter 
and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  784  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


105 


No.  2 

Edge  Molding  and  Shaping  Machine, 

(with  iron  table  and  elevating  spindle  frames.) 

This  machine  is  highly  valued  in  railroad,  carpenter,  and  machine  shops,  pattern 
makers,  piano-forte  and  cabinet  work,  for  the  manufacture  of  carriages,  picture  frames, 
sash,  agricultural  implements,  etc. 

The  frame  is  very  heavy  and  substantial,  every  part  made  of  the  best  material  and 
workmanship,  and  will  be  found  thoroughly  capable  of  cutting  straight  moldings,  and  also 
the  most  irregular  forms  and  warped  surfaces. 

The  spindles  are  of  large  diameter,  run  in  gate  ways  having  connected  bearings  cast 
solid  to  them  so  as  to  be  always  retained  in  line,  which  are  filled  with  peculiar  lining  metal 
for  preventing  friction,  and  are  self  oiling.  The  table  is  54x48  inches,  and  the  spindles 
twenty-six  inches  from  center  to  center. 

The  gate  ways  carrying  the  arbors  have  a  vertical  adjustment  by  means  of  the  hand 
wheels  at  the  front  of  the  machine  so  the  cutters  can  be  varied  above  the  table  to  work 
wide  or  curved  moldings,  etc.  The  cutter  heads  are  made  of  hardened  steel,  and  are  in- 
dependent of  the  arbors  so  that  any  size  or  number  of  heads  can  be  used  without  disturbing 
the  arbors  ;  one  set  only  being  necessary  for  the  machine. 

The  cutters  are  held  in  the  heads  by  end  pressure,  and  wide  cutters  can  be  used  with 
safety  and  without  vibration.  The  patent  safety  guards  can  be  applied  to  this  machine 
when  desired  at  a  very  small  cost. 

This  machine  is  supplied  with  floor  countershaft,  hangers,  and  our  patent  tight  and 
loose  pulleys,  which  are  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  784 
revolutions  per  minute. 


106 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  3 

Edge  Molding  and  Shaping  Machine. 

(with  wood  table  and  elevating  spindle  frames.) 

The  machine  represented  above  is  adapted  for  shaping,  molding,  and  planing  all  kinds 
of  curved  and  irregular  work  to  a  templet,  and  is  almost  invaluable  to  agricultural  im- 
plement, carriage,  sash  and  door  shops,  etc.,  and  will  be  found  adapted  to  the  very 
heaviest  work. 

The  spindles  are  of  large  diameter,  running  in  gateways  having  connected  bearings 
cast  solid  to  them,  which  revolve  in  opposite  directions,  being  both  fitted  with  the  same 
shape  of  cutter.  They  are  used  alternately,  as  the  direction  of  the  grain  of  the  material 
may  render  necessary.  By  this  arrangement,  however  warped  or  curved  the  pattern 
maybe,  the  cut  is  always  with  the  grain,  leaving  perfectly  clean  work.  The  table  is  54x44, 
made  of  seasoned  cherry  and  black-walnut  glued  up  in  narrow  strips. 

The  gateways  carrying  the  arbors  have  a  vertical  adjustment  by  the  hand  wheels  at 
the  front  of  the  table,  allowing  the  cutters  to  be  varied  lo  any  width  above  the  table 
required.  The  heads  are  made  independent  of  the  arbors,  of  hardened  steel ;  will  receive 
any  size  of  cutters,  which  are  held  by  end  pressure. 

The  very  widest  cutters  can  be  used  without  the  least  trembling. 

Our  patent  safety  guards  over  the  cutters  can  be  supplied  at  small  cost  when  desired. 

Countershaft,  hangers,  and  pulleys  are  furnished  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose 
pulleys,  which  are  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  784  revolu- 
tions per  minute. 


No.  3 

Large  Size  Edge  Molding  and  Shaping  Machine. 

(with  iron  table  and  elevating  spindle  frames.) 

This  machine  has  been  erected  from  new  designs  with  special  reference  to  the  work  to 
be  performed,  and  is  adapted  to  perform  the  heaviest  description  of  work  as  well  as  light. 

The  frame  is  very  heavy  and  substantial,  most  thoroughly  built,  and  will  be  found 
thoroughly  capable  of  cutting  straight  moldings,  also  the  most  irregular  forms  and  warped 
surfaces  required  in  wood.  The  material  to  be  formed  is  attached  to  a  wooden  templet, 
which  is  passed  against  the  loose  collar  on  the  spindle,  the  cutters  shaping  it  to  the  exact 
form  of  the  pattern. 

The  vertical  spindles  are  of  large  diameter,  twenty-six  inches  between  centers,  and 
revolve  in  opposite  directions ;  both  are  fitted  with  the  same  shape  of  cutter,  and  used 
alternately  as  the  grain  of  the  wood  may  render  necessary.  The  spindle  frames  have 
connected  bearings  so  as  to  t>c  retained  always  in  line;  also  a  vertical  adjustment  to  allow 
the  cutters  to  be  raised  or  lowered  above  the  table  to  suit  wide  or  curved  work.  The 
heads  are  made  of  hardened  steel.  The  cutters  are  held  by  end  pressure,  and  the  widest 
may  be  used  without  trembling.  The  table  is  made  of  iron,  is  54x48  inches,  and  planed 
perfectly  true.  We  furnish  our  patent  safety  guards  over  the  cutters  to  prevent  possi- 
bility of  accident  to  the  operator  at  a  small  cost  when  wanted. 

The  floor  countershaft  has  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  ten  inches 
in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  784  revolutions  per  minute. 


108 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Carving,  Paneling,  and  Molding  Machine. 

This  is  a  very  effective  machine  for  producing  carving  and  recessed  or  relieved  panels 
on  the  surface  of  lumber;  also  for  edge  molding,  ornamenting,  etc.,  and  will  work  any  design 
of  panels  required  in  furniture,  piano,  coffin,  or  desk  factories. 

It  is  easy  to  keep  in  order,  convenient  of  adjustment,  at  all  times  under  perfect  con- 
trol of  the  operator,  and  is  unequalled  in  the  amount  and  range  of  work  it  will  perform. 

It  is  constructed  on  a  hollow  iron  column,  with  the  cutter  spindle  working  from  above, 
which  receives  its  motion  by  friction  pulleys  inside  of  the  column.  The  table  is  quickly 
adjusted  to  suit  the  required  depth  of  molding  for  panels  by  means  of  the  hand  wheel 
and  screw,  and  also  elevated  to  bring  the  material  in  contact  with  the  cutter  by  means 
of  a  treadle. 

The  guide  collar  is  attached  to  the  spindle  above  the  cutter,  admitting  of  the  use  of  any 
size  cutter  without  altering  the  size  of  the  collar.  When  used  for  surface  paneling,  the 
pattern  is  placed  over  the  piece  to  be  carved  with  openings  between,  which  affords  the 
operator  a  view  of  the  work  as  it  progresses,  enabling  him  to  judge  whether  the  shape  of 
the  pattern  is  being  accurately  followed  or  not. 

For  edge  molding,  an  adjustable  bearing  is  placed  in  the  table,  which  forms  a  support 
for  the  lower  end  of  the  cutter,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  accompanying  diagram.  The  cutters 
work  perfectly  free,  cut  clean  and  smooth  whether  rovolving  to  the  right  or  left,  and  are 
instantly  secured  by  means  of  the  hand  wheel  at  the  top  without  the  use  of  set  screws. 
Each  machine  is  furnished  with  five  cutters  and  patterns  for  paneling,  also  full  instructions 
for  operating. 

The  driving  pulley  is  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should  make 
1,100  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


109 


SPECIMENS  OF  WORK 

DONE  ON 


J.  A.  Fay  &  Oo/s  Patent  Carving,  Paneling,  and  Molding  Machine. 


Directions  for  Operating. 


For  paneling  or  cutting  designs  in  the  solid  wood  (Fig.  C),  prepare 
a  template  (Fig.  B)  of  the  form  desired.  Place  this  template  over  the 
piece  to  be  carved  with  openings  between  (Fig.  A)  for  the  escape  of 
chips,  and  to  allow  a  view  of  the  work  as  it  progresses.  The  template 
requires  to  be  as  much  smaller  than  the  panel  to  be  cut  as  the  outside 
cutting  edge  of  cutter  extends  beyond  the  line  of  directrix. 


■1 


110  /.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


CUTTERS  FOR  USE  ON 


J.  A.  Fay  &  Oo.'s  Patent  Carving,  Paneling,  and  Molding  Machine. 

These  cutters  are  made  from  the  very  best  grades  of  English  cast  steel  with  the  shape 
of  the  mold  turned  on  them.  They  are  made  with  large  clearance  and  produce  a 
beautiful  finish  on  the  work.  The  surface  molding  or  paneling  cutters  have  clean  cutting 
edges,  and  will  penetrate  the  wood  and  work  perfectly  smooth  while  running  in  either 
direction. 


Ill 


Edge  Molding  and  Friezing  Gutters, 

These  cutters  are  made  from  forged  steel,  turned  to  shape  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
secure  abundance  of  clearance.  They  have  sharp  cutting  edges,  will  work  in  either  direction, 
and  not  burn  or  tear  the  wood.  Any  special  form  of  cutter  wanted  can  be  quickly 
furnished  by  sending  a  drawing  or  piece  of  the  molding  desired. 


112 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Tenoning  Machines. 

In  the  formation  of  tenons,  various  systems  have  been  adopted  according  to  the 
character  of  the  work  to  be  done.  One  of  the  first  methods  after  hand  labor  was  by  a 
combination  of  circular  saws  at  right  angles  to  each  other.  Those  parallel  to  the  grain  of 
the  wood  cutting  the  side  of  the  tenon,  those  at  a  right  angle  to  the  grain  cutting  the 
shoulder ;  this  is  still  in  use,  and  although  to  some  extent  inaccurate  in  its  operation,  is 
expeditious,  and  may  serve  for  some  purposes. 

The  most  popular  and  accurate  tenoning  machines  are  those  having  cutter  heads 
revolving  with  their  center  of  rotation  parallel  with  the  side  of  the  tenon  to  be  cut,  the 
cutter  heads  being  provided  with  saws  or  segments  of  saws  to  cut  the  shoulder  of  the 
tenon.    This  is  the  usual  method  for  single  tenons. 

When  two  or  more  tenons  are  to  be  made  upon  a  stick,  a  spindle  is  provided  with  a 
number  of  cutter  heads  revolving  at  right  angles  to  the  grain  of  the  wood,  the  timber 
being  passed  by  the  cutter  head,  the  sides  of  the  two  outer  tenons  with  the  intermediate 
gain  or  gains  are  cut  at  one  operation.  This  system  is  appropriate  for  heavy  work,  and 
is  in  use  for  that  purpose. 

For  double  tenons  or  light  work  a  combination  of  these  two  systems  is  sometimes 
found  convenient.  For  special  purposes  an  improved  patented  method  is  adapted,  in 
which  the  piece  to  be  tenoned  is  revolved  against  a  revolving  cutter  head,  or  the  cutter 
head  is  carried  around  the  piece  to  be  tenoned.  This  last  system  is  confined  to  round  or 
oval  tenons,  and  is  used  for  tenoning  blind  slats,  spokes  for  wheels,  or  any  similar 
operations. 

Blind  slat  tenoners  are  indispensable  to  manufacturers  of  blinds,  as  will  be  found  in 
the  descriptions  of  these  machines.  They  are  made  to  feed  by  hand  or  power.  The  oval 
Tenoning  Machine  is  used  almost  exclusively  for  tenoning  spokes  after  they  are  driven 
into  the  hub,  and  are  essential  for  the  construction  of  first-class  wheels.  The  system  of 
cutting  round  tenons  is  patented  by  us,  and  the  construction  of  such  machines  by  others 
is  an  infringement  and  will  be  so  treated. 

In  the  construction  of  Tenoning  Machines  the  majority  are  of  the  class  with  the 
revolving  cutter  heads  parallel  with  the  grain  of  the  wood,  and  are  adapted  to  general 
uses  in  all  kinds  of  wood-working  establishments.  They  are  arranged  with  attachments 
for  the  specialties  to  be  produced,  as  in  the  cope  heads,  which  are  for  forming  the  reverse 
of  the  molding  on  the  shoulder  where  the  tenon  is  to  be  used  in  sash  or  door  work ;  also 
cutting-off  saws  are  attached  for  cutting  tenons  to  a  correct  length. 

Car  manufacturing  requires  heavy  tools  in  its  construction,  and  we  have  produced  for 
the  purpose  some  large  car  tenoners  which  are  found  to  operate  in  the  most  satisfactory 
manner.  These  are  constructed  on  the  system  of  parallel  cutters  for  single  tenons  with 
an  intermediate  head  attachment,  the  head  revolving  in  the  same  manner,  it  being  the 
same  diameter  as  the  thickness  of  the  gain  to  be  cut,  and  also  with  the  cutter  heads 
revolving  at  right  angles  to  the  grain  of  the  wood,  and  so  arranged  as  to  cut  a  tenon  at 
each  end  of  a  long  timber  without  reversal. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY.  113 


Any  kind  of  tenons  in  common  use  can  be  cut  with  these  machines  with  great 
accuracy  and  speed,  and  with  the  combinations  and  attachments  they  are  adaptable  to  the 
requirements  of  car  builders,  cabinet,  and  carriage  makers,  etc.  In  classifying  these 
machines,  each  business  is  separately  considered  and  provided  for,  as  will  be  seen  in  the 
description  in  the  following  pages,  viz : 

We  make  six  sizes  of  tenoning  machines  for  regular  work,  as  follows. 

No.  0,  with  swinging  carriage,  designed  especially  for  spoke  and  carriage  work  and 
general  light  tenoning  requiring  short  tenons  and  quick  carriage  movement. 

No.  1,  with  carriage  working  on  slides,  and  narrow  heads,  adapted  to  the  general 
requirements  of  cabinet  and  carriage  makers.  When  desired  for  spoke  work,  a  special 
carriage,  with  gauge,  etc.,  is  fitted. 

No.  2,  small  size,  with  upper  and  lower  copes,  for  sashes,  blinds,  and  light  door  work.' 

No.  3,  medium  size,  with  wide  cutting  heads,  for  working  tenons  up  to  six  inches, 
with  upper  and  lower  copes,  for  doors,  and  all  general  work,  heavy  and  light. 

No.  4,  large  size,  for  car,  bridge,  and  heavy  work,  capable  of  working  twelve-inch 
timber.  We  furnish  with  this,  an  attachment  for  cutting  double  tenons  on  car  sills,  etc., 
when  wanted;  also,  an  attachment  for  gaining. 

No.  5,  vertical  car  tenoning  machine,  for  cutting  long  car  and  bridge  sills,  etc. 

A  more  extended  description  will  be  found  with  the  illustrations  on  the  following 
pages.  They  are  all  put  in  working  order,  thoroughly  tested  and  tried  before  being  sent 
out.  We  are  in  receipt  of  the  highest  testimonials  from  hundreds  using  these  machines, 
not  only  of  the  accuracy  and  superiority  of  the  work  produced,  but  of  their  superior 
labor  saving  advantages. 


114 


/.  A.  FAY&  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  0 

Spoke  and  Cabinet  Tenoning  Machine. 

This  is  a  new  machine  intended  for  tenoning  spokes  and  h'ght  work  in  wagon,  cabinet, 
or  other  manufactories;  it  is  substantial  in  all  its  parts,  and  the  adjustments  are  so  easily 
and  quickly  made  it  is  a  favorite  wherever  used. 

The  lower  head  is  stationary  in  boxes  cast  in  the  frame,  the  table  lowering  on  inclines 
by  a  hand-wheel  in  front  to  regulate  the  depth  of  the  cut  on  the  under  side.  The  upper 
cutter  head  is  adjusted  to  regulate  the  thickness  of  the  tenon  by  a  hand-wheel  in  front 
connected  to  the  cutter  head  frame.  Provision  is  made  for  lateral  adjustment,  for  cutting 
the  shoulders  of  uneven  lengths  if  desired,  or  for  adjusting  accurately. 

The  table  is  planed  to  fit  on  an  angled  gib,  and  can  not  rise  from  its  place  while 
being  operated ;  as  it  is  also  clear  of  the  frame  the  operator  has  an  opportunity  to 
keep  close  to  his  work.  The  table  is  supplied  with  hold  down  lever,  fence,  stops,  and 
stop  bar,  and  for  cabinet  work  has  an  end  extension,  as  shown  in  the  engraving. 

There  are  two  styles  of  tables  for  this  machine :  one  narrow,  for  spoke  work,  the 
other  wide,  for  cabinet  work.  Both  heads  are  run  by  one  belt,  the  tension  of  which  is 
regulated  by  a  self-adjusting  idler  pulley  on  a  frame  operated  by  a  weight,  the  belt 
accommodating  itself  to  the  distance  the  heads  may  be  apart. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  three- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  950  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


115 


No.  1 

Small  Size  Tenoning  Machine. 

(for  cabinet  and  spoke  work.) 

This  machine  is  particularly  well  adapted  for  furniture  and  cabinet  work,  or  almost 
any  kind  of  tenoning  within  its  capacity,  where  copes  are  not  required.  It  is  simple, 
substantial,  and  durable. 

Both  cutter  heads  raise  and  lower  simultaneously,  or  independently,  by  a  screw  to 
each,  operated  by  a  hand-wheel,  and  are  easily  adjusted,  so  as  to  vary  the  thickness  of  the 
tenon  or  the  depth  of  the  shoulder,  as  may  be  required,  the  carriage  always  remaining 
stationary.  It  is  provided  with  narrow  cutter-heads;  the  arbors  are  made  of  steel  and  run 
in  patent  self-lubricating  boxes.  The  upper  head  has  a  lateral  movement  over  the  lower 
head,  so  as  to  cut  one  shoulder  of  tenons  longer  than  the  other,  when  desired. 

The  carriage  is  partly  made  of  wrought-iron  tubes,  consequently  is  very  light  and 
worked  with  great  ease.    It  is  provided  with  all  the  necessary  stops,  extension  rods,  etc. 

The  belt  pulleys  are  large  and  at  the  end  of  the  machine,  out  of  the  way  of  the 
operator.  The  main  belt,  which  drives  the  cutter-head  shafts,  when  once  laced  never 
requires  alteration,  as  a  self-adjusting  binding  pulley  acts  against  the  loose  side  of  it,  by  a 
weight  and  pulley  always  keeping  it  tight. 

When  the  machine  is  desired  for  spoke  tenoning,  it  is  fitted  with  a  light  adjustable 
attachment  on  the  carriage,  for  grasping  the  spoke ;  also,  a  saw  for  cutting  off  the  spoke  to 
the  proper  length  the  same  instant  it  is  tenoned  may  be  added  at  a  small  expense. 

The  countershaft  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight 
inches  in  diameter  and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  950  revolutions  per  minute. 


116 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  2 

Patent  Sash  and  Door  Tenoning  Machine, 

(with  single  cutters  and  double  copes.) 

Both  upper  and  lower  heads  have  a  simultaneous  vertical  adjustment.  The 
upper  head  has  also  an  independent  lateral  adjustment  for  varying 
the  length  of  the  tenons.    The  coping  heads  are  adjusted 
vertically  with  the  tenon  heads 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


117 


No.  2 

Patent  Sash  and  Door  Tenoning  Machine. 

(WITH  SINGLE  CUTTERS  AND  DOUBLE  COPES.) 

This  machine  is  designed  for  the  use  of  sash,  bHnd,  and  door  manufacturers,  or 
works  in  which  a  corresponding  class  of  work  is  done.  It  is  well  built,  remarkably 
simple,  and  adapted  to  the  requirements  of  small  factories  for  sash  and  light  doors. 

The  heads  are  single,  but  so  placed  on  their  frames  that  a  tenon  can  be  made  double  the 
length  of  the  cutter  by  passing  the  stuff  through  twice.  The  knives  are  placed  at  an  angle 
on  the  heads  which  gives  a  shearing  cutting  edge,  making  the  work  very  smooth. 

The  gateways  that  carry  the  cutter-head  spindles  are  gibbed  to  a  vertical  slide  and  are 
raised  together  or  separately,  as  may  be  desired,  one  screw  raising  both  frames,  which 
governs  the  thickness  of  the  lower  shoulder.  The  other  screw  separates  the  heads  and 
regulates  the  thickness  of  the  tenon.  The  screws  are  furnished  with  locking  devices  to 
prevent  any  vibration. 

The  arbors  are  steel  and  run  in  patent  self-lubricating  bearings.  The  upper  one  is  ad- 
justable for  scribing  the  shoulders  accurately,  or  making  one  shoulder  longer  than  the  other. 

The  machine  is  constructed  with  one  or  two  coping  heads,  or  without,  as  may  be 
desired.  The  cope  heads  have  independent  adjustment,  and  are  attached  to  the  cutter- 
head  frames. 

The  belt  pulleys  are  at  the  end  of  the  machine,  out  of  the  way  of  the  operator.  The 
belt  is  graduated  in  its  length  by  an  idler  pulley,  kept  in  place  by  a  weight  acting  on  a 
pinion  and  rack.  The  carriage  is  light,  runs  on  rollers  at  one  end,  is  worked  with  ease, 
and  is  provided  with  stops,  extension  rod,  holding-down  lever,  etc.,  etc. 

The  countershaft  is  attached  to  the  machine,  and  is  furnished  with  our  patent  tight 
and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make 
950  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


119 


No.  3 

Patent  Door  and  Sash  Tenoning  Machine. 

(with  double  cutters  and  improved  copes.) 

This  popular  labor-saving  machine  has  been  recently  improved,  embracing  important 
features,  which  actual  use  and  long  experience  have  shown  to  be  requisite,  and  which  are 
found  only  on  the  J.  A.  Fay  &  Co.  Patent  Tenoning  Machine.  It  is  undoubtedly  the  best 
door  and  sash  tenoning  machine  now  in  use,  and  is  strongly  recommended  for  all  general 
work  in  house  building,  carpentry,  etc. 

It  will  cut  tenons  from  one-quarter  to  six  inches  long  of  any  thickness  required. 
Larger  tenons  than  six  inches  are  made  by  running  through  a  second  time.  The  upper 
and  lower  cutter  heads  raise  and  lower  by  a  screw  to  each  operated  by  a  hand  wheel,  and 
are  readily  adjustable,  so  as  to  vary  the  thickness  of  the  tenon,  or  the  depth  of  the  shoulder, 
as  may  be  required,  (the  carriage  always  remaining  stationary)  and  has  a  lock  attachment 
to  firmly  secure  them  in  any  position  they  may  be  set. 

The  carriage  is  of  peculiar  construction,  runs  on  rollers  at  one  end,  is  worked  with 
great  ease,  and  is  provided  with  all  the  necessary  stops,  etc.  Each  cope  is  attached  to  the 
gateway,  in  which  the  cutter  head  hangs,  so  that  they  can  raise  and  lower  with  the  cutter- 
heads  and  need  no  separate  setting,  while  they  are  so  arranged  that  they  can  be  adjusted 
independently  of  the  cutter-heads  if  desired. 

Each  cutter-head  shaft  has  a  peculiar  arrangement,  which  prevents  all  vibrations  end- 
wise, and  both  run  in  long  patent  self  lubricating  bearings,  arranged  so  as  to  constantly 
flood  the  journals  with  oil. 

The  upper  cutter-head  is  arranged  so  as  to  cut  one  shoulder  of  tenons  longer  than  the 
other  if  desired.  The  copes  move  out  and  in  with  single  screws,  saw  spurs  are  used  instead 
of  ''knife  spurs,"  requiring  less  sharpening,  and  are  easier  kept  in  order. 

Owing  to  the  shape  and  peculiar  position  of  the  cutters,  a  drawing-stroke  or  cut  is 
obtained,  whereby  they  cut  very  easily  and  smooth ;  the  bonnet  is  attached  so  it  can  be 
swung  back  out  of  the  way,  making  it  convenient  to  get  at  the  cutters  to  sharpen. 

The  belt  which  drives  the  cutter-head  arbors  is  out  of  the  way  of  the  operator,  and 
when  once  laced  together  requires  no  alteration,  as  a  "binding  pulley"  operates  against 
the  loose  side  of  it  by  a  weight  and  pulley,  which  keeps  the  belt  tight  and  self-adjusting. 
As  the  belt  covers  nearly  the  whole  surface  of  the  pulley,  the  speed  of  the  cutter-heads 
cannot  be  checked  while  doing  any  kind  of  work  required. 

The  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  accompany  this  machine,  and  are  eight  inches  in 
diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make  830  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


121 


No.  4 

Large  Patent  Oar  Tenoning  Machine. 

(with  simultaneous  and  independent  vertical  adjustment  of  cutter-heads, 
attachment  for  double  teno^^s,  wrought-iron  tables,  etc.) 

This  is  a  very  powerful  machine,  designed  for  the  heaviest  requirements  of  car  and 
bridge  building,  railroad  shops,  etc.  It  is  made  especially  heavy,  and  is  in  every  respect 
fully  equal  to  the  service  it  is  designed  to  perform. 

The  table  is  low,  to  economize  labor  in  lifting  the  timbers  to  be  tenoned.  The 
cutter-heads  are  of  large  diameter,  with  double  spurs,  and  are  adjusted  independently  by 
a  screw  to  each,  so  that  they  can  be  made  to  cut  a  tenon  of  any  thickness  with  any  propor- 
tion of  shoulders  within  the  capacity  of  the  machine.  The  extreme  range  being  to  cut 
tenons  twelve  inches  long  on  fourteen-inch  timbers. 

The  back  of  the  upright  stand  carries  a  head  for  gaining  a  double  tenon  to  four  inches 
in  length.  This  is  raised  by  a  screw,  and  can  be  moved  out  of  the  range  of  single 
tenoning. 

The  side  of  the  upright  stand  has  a  movable  piece,  which,  when  taken  out,  makes  the 
whole  length  of  tenon  twelve  inches,  or  gaining  may  be  done  for  car  trucks  or  parts  in 
which  the  gains  are  twelve  inches  or  less  from  the  ends. 

The  belt  which  drives  the  heads  is  retained  at  its  proper  tension  by  a  sheave  and 
weight  in  connection  with  a  binder  pulley,  which  compensates  for  any  motion  of  the  head 
up  or  down. 

The  table  is  placed  upon  friction  rollers  which  run  on  planed  ways,  one  of  which  has 
a  groove  in  which  is  fitted  a  corresponding  tongue  on  the  table  to  keep  it  at  a  con.'^tant 
right  line  with  the  line  of  the  head. 

It  is  also  provided  with  stops  and  gauges  which  can  be  set  to  suit  pieces  of  various 
lengths,  and  has  an  adjustable  fence  and  rod  for  holding  the  timbers  securely  in  position, 
which  is  instantly  fixed  and  released. 

The  heads  are  provided  with  an  adjustment  to  make  the  shoulders  perfectly  square  or 
out  of  square,  as  may  be  desired.  All  parts  of  the  machine  are  convenient  to  the  opera- 
tor, the  lubricating  arrangements  are  perfected  for  an  economical  'use  of  oil,  and  the  entire 
machine  will  be  found  finished  in  a  workmanlike  manner. 

The  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  furnished  with  this  machine  are  ten  inches  in 
diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  900  revolutions  per  minute. 


122 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO/S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Vertical  Car  Tenoning  Machine. 

FOR  CUTTING 


Single,  Double,  and  Triple  tenons,  cornering,  etc.     Tenons  can  be  cut  on 
both  ends  of  car  sills  from  one  face,  without  turning. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


123 


Patent  Vertical  Oar  Tenoning  Machine. 

FOR  MAKING 

SINGLE,   DOUBLE,   AND  TRIPLE  TENONS,   ROUNDING,   CORNERING,  ETC. 

In  cutting  the  tenons  on  car  sills,  it  is  desirable  to  complete  each  timber  without  re- 
versal. To  accomplish  this  result,  this  machine  has  been  designed,  and  most  successfully 
performs  the  operation  of  cutting  single,  double,  or  triple  tenons  on  both  ends  of  long 
timber  from  one  face,  without  turning  the  stick  end  for  end,  by  passing  the  stick  by  the 
machine,  cutting  the  tenon  on  one  end  as  the  head  passes  downward  on  the  other  end  as 
it  is  carried  upward. 

It  is  very  heavy  and  substantial,  built  in  the  very  best  possible  manner,  and  meets  a 
want  long  felt  in  every  establishment  working  timber  for  cars,  bridge  builders,  etc.  The 
amount  of  work  that  can  be  done  with  it  can  only  be  measured  by  the  amount  of  material 
that  can  be  presented  to  it. 

It  has  two  iron  tables  in  fixed  positions,  having  a  gap  between  them,  for  the  passage 
of  the  heads  below  the  surface,  arranged  at  a  convenient  height  for  handling  the  timbers, 
with  adjustable  fence  for  the  thickness  of  the  shoulder  on  the  face  side  of  the  timber, 
screws  for  holding  down,  and  gauges  to  determine  the  length  of  tenons. 

The  heads  are  traversed  vertically,  on  a  stand,  by  means  of  a  large  hand  wheel,  the 
frame  carrying  the  head  being  so  counterbalanced  as  to  take  from  the  operator  all  the 
weight,  either  in  ascending  or  descending.  The  countershaft  is  placed  vertically  over  the 
machine,  leaving  the  floor  clear  of  all  obstructions,  the  belt  remaining  at  the  same  tension 
in  whatever  position  the  head  is  working.  The  ends  of  the  table  are  faced  with  wood,  so 
that  the  cutters  may  be  run  against  them  to  prevent  any  tendency  to  split  or  tear  as  they 
pass  in  either  direction. 

The  machine  may  be  used  for  cornering,  beveling,  smoothing,  rabbeting,  or  cutting 
down  on  the  sides  of  timber,  by  fixing  the  head  and  passing  the  timber  as  in  a  planing 
machine,  and  the  ends  can  be  rounded  or  molded  as  well  as  cutting  all  styles  of  tenons 
upon  them. 

It  is  self-contained,  will  stand  on  any  door,  requiring  no  braces  or  supports  whatever ; 
occupies  but  little  space,  as  it  has  no  horizontal  belt  at  or  near  the  floor.  The  move- 
ment of  the  cross-head,  up  or  down,  does  not  affect  the  tension  of  the  belt.  The  cutter 
heads  and  shafts  are  made  of  steel. 

The  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and 
should  make  700  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


125 


Patent  Oar  Gaining  Machine, 

(with  traversing  cutters  and  automatic  feed.) 

Grooves  cut  at  right  angles  to  the  fiber  of  timber,  are  termed  gains  in  the  technical 
language  of  carpentry.  These  gains,  in  the  present  method  of  erecting  heavy  work, 
especially  in  bridges  and  railroad  car  timbers,  have  heretofore  been  done  in  a  great 
measure  by  hand  labor,  or  by  rotary  cutter-heads  projected  through  the  surface  of  a  table 
sufficient  for  the  depth  of  the  gain,  over  which  the  timber  was  traversed  to  complete  it. 
These  methods  having  been  so  objectional,  we  have  been  induced  to  generate  a  machine 
with  particular  reference  to  this  class  of  work. 

This  is  a  very  massive  and  substantial  tool,  occupying  an  area  of  ten  by  twenty  feet 
on  the  floor.  Timbers  of  any  size  to  twelve  inches  thick  by  twenty-four  inches  wide  can 
be  gained  at  any  desired  angle  to  the  depth  of  four  inches.  By  means  of  the  stops  in 
front  of  the  table,  in  connection  with  the  treadle  and  spring-pin  working  through  the  way, 
duplicates  of  timbers  may  be  produced  indefinitely,  the  stops  indicating  the  width  and 
distance  apart  of  the  gains. 

The  depth  of  the  gains  is  determined  by  the  position  of  the  stops  placed  in  the  slots 
in  the  cutter  slide,  which  will  indicate  four  depths  of  gains.  The  table  is  moved  longitu- 
dinally upon  friction  rollers  by  means  of  a  rack  and  pinion  underneath,  operated  by  a  hand- 
wheel  in  front. 

The  cutter-head  with  its  slide  has  a  vertical  movement,  governed  by  the  lever  in  front 
and  counterbalanced  by  a  combination  of  springs  inclosed  in  the  moving  frame.  The 
cutter-head  can  be  quickly  placed  anywhere  within  its  range  of  movement  without 
changing  the  position  of  the  governing  hand  lever. 

The  sliding  frame,  which  conveys  the  cutter-head  in  its  traverse  movement  over  the 
table,  is  actuated  by  means  of  a  series  of  gearing  driving  a  pinion  in  a  fixed  rack, 
contained  within  the  frame.  It  is  automatic  and  stopped  at  any  point  by  means  of  a 
shipper  and  adjustable  stops  on  the  side  of  the  column,  and  started  by  the  operator  turning 
the  handle  under  the  hand  lever,  which  engages  the  belt  with  the  tight  pulley. 

The  motion  of  this  sliding  frame  is  at  a  fixed  speed,  whether  for  wide  or  narrow 
timber,  a  peculiarity  no  other  gainer  possesses.  This  equal  speed  in  either  direction 
enables  the  cutting  to  be  done  both  w^ays,  the  cutter-head  being  so  constructed  as  to 
facilitate  the  operation. 

The  countershaft  from  which  the  machine  is  driven  is  placed  vertically  over  the  center 
of  the  distance  of  the  travel  of  the  pulleyshaft  in  the  rear  end  of  the  sliding  frame.  The 
arc  of  the  circle  struck  from  the  countershaft  being  but  slightly  different  from  its  chord, 
the  tension  of  the  belt  is  not  affected  sufficiently  to  be  any  detriment  to  the  working  of 
the  machine. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  eight  inches  in 
diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make  584  revolutions  per  minute. 


126 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Self-Feed  Blind  Slat  Tenoning  Machine. 

This  machine  is  now  universally  conceded  to  be  the  most  perfect  and  simple  machine 
in  use  for  tenoning  blind  slats,  combining  as  it  does  all  the  essential  elements  of  the  Ellis 
and  Bickford  patents.    It  is  simple  in  construction,  and  perfect  in  operation. 

The  stuff  to  be  worked  may  be  of  any  length  desired,  and  is  fed  endwise  through 
rotating  chucks,  the  shoulder  being  pressed  against  an  adjustable  gauge  for  regulating  the 
length  of  the  slat.  By  the  peculiar  construction  of  the  revolving  cutting  tools,  two  tenons 
are  cut  and  divided  with  one  cutter  head  simultaneously  at  one  operation. 

A  pressure  upon  the  treadle  causes  a  rotation  of  the  slat,  and  carries  it  against  the 
cutting  tools,  forming  a  perfect  tenon  on  each  end ;  the  rotation  of  the  slat  gives  a  true 
cylindrical  form  to  the  tenon,  and  also  performs  the  very  important  function  of  so  pre- 
senting the  slat  at  all  points  that  the  cut  may  be  from  the  periphery  to  the  center, 
thereby  preventing  splitting  or  tearing  of  the  wood. 

By  releasing  the  treadle,  the  chucks  are  instantly  stopped  in  order  that  the  slat  may 
be  fed  to  the  gauge,  as  the  driving  belt  at  the  same  instant  is  slackened  so  as  to  slip  and 
not  drive.  It  will  work  any  length  of  slat  from  one  and  three-fourths  up  to  four  inches, 
and  will  form  any  size  of  tenon  desired. 

Any  boy  of  ten  years  can  operate  it,  and  any  ordinary  mechanic  can  keep  it  in  perfect 
order,  owing  to  its  simplicity.  It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  six 
inches  in  diameter  and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


127 


Ellis'  Patent  Blind  Slat  Tenoning  Machine. 

(hand  feed.) 

This  machine  is  conceded  to  be  the  most  simple  and  perfect  machine  now  in  use  for 
making  cylindrical  tenons  on  all  kinds  of  rolling  blind  slats,  and  has  almost  entirely  super- 
ceded every  other  machine  for  this  purpose. 

It  is  adapted  to  different  lengths  and  widths  of  slats,  cutting  the  shoulder  and  rounding 
the  tenon  upon  both  ends  simultaneously  at  one  and  the  same  operation  in  the  most  rapid 
and  perfect  manner. 

This  is  accomplished  by  means  of  two  arbors  and  frames,  both  adjustable  relatively  to 
each  other,  each  carrying  a  set  of  circular  saws  for  forming  the  shoulder  and  rounding  the 
tenon. 

Attached  to  the  above  frames  are  two  revolving  disc  guides,  slotted  through  their 
diameters  to  receive  the  blind  slats  and  conduct  them  to  the  saws  during  the  operation  of 
cutting. 

The  rotation  of  the  slat  brings  the  saws  into  contact  at  each  of  its  extremities,  causing 
it  to  cut  towards  or  in  the  direction  of  the  center  of  the  slat  as  they  strike  the  wood, 
making  a  clean  cut  and  forming  a  perfectly  cylindrical  tenon. 

The  cut  being  always  from  the  periphery  to  the  center,  no  tearing  or  splintering  of 
the  work  is  possible.  It  is  quickly  adapted  to  work  long  or  short  slats,  and  the  size  of 
the  tenon  can  be  varied  to  suit  different  widths  and  sizes. 

By  a  simple  and  ingenious  lock  attachment  the  disc  guides  and  arbor  frames  are 
securely  retained  in  any  desired  position  without  possibility  of  disarrangement. 

This  machine  is  ready  for  use  the  moment  placed  in  position  and  belted,  and  is 
capable  of  working  twenty  thousand  slats  per  day  with  ease. 

It  is  supplied  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  six  inches  in  diameter 
and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


128 


No.  1  Patent  Bench  Blind  Wirer. 

This  is  a  very  simple  and  effective  machine  for  wiring  rods  and  shades  of  window 
blinds,  and  attaching  them  together.  It  is  worked  by  hand  and  can  be  secured  to  a  ben?h 
in  any  part  of  the  shop. 

The  peculiarity  of  this  machine  is,  that  it  will  drive  staples  from  3/g  to  ^  of  an  inch 
in  length,  in  either  rod  or  slat  with  perfect  exactness.  It  is  so  constructed  that  only  a 
single  staple  can  be  fed  at  each  motion  of  the  lever.  There  is  consequently  no  danger  of 
clogging. 

It  is  quickly  varied  to  set  staples  at  different  distances  by  means  of  a  suitable  spaced 
notched  rack.  The  staple  driver  is  made  of  a  strip  of  steel,  and  when  worn  or  broken 
can  be  renewed  for  ten  cents. 


Patent  Double  Blind  Wirer. 

This  is  an  improved  automatic  machine,  both  for  feeding  the  staples  and  spacing  the 
rods,  and  is  believed  to  be  superior  to  any  thing  heretofore  devised  for  this  purpose.  The 
working  parts  are  all  made  of  steel  and  hardened.  The  drivers  are  made  so  that  in  case 
of  breakage  or  wear  they  can  be  renewed  for  a  few  cents. 

By  this  machine  both  the  slat  and  the  rod  are  wired  together;  the  slat  being  wired  by 
the  upper  and  the  rod  and  slat  wired  together  by  the  lower  driver,  both  working  by  one 
movement  of  the  hand  lever. 

It  is  arranged  with  a  cut-off  or  improved  feeding  devise  which  entirely  prevents  more 
than  one  staple  to  be  driven  at  a  time. 

The  carrier  or  notched  rack  is  made  of  wood  and  can  be  varied  to  suit  the  different 
distances  desired  to  set  the  staples  in  the  rod.  It  works  with  the  greatest  rapidity, 
is  perfect  in  every  detail,  and  gives  general  satisfaction. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


129 


No.  2 

Patent  Pedestal  Blind  Wirer. 

This  machine  is  constructed  on  the  same  general  principle  as  the  Bench  Blind  Wiring 
Machine,  illustrated  and  described  on  the  opposite  page,  which  consists  of  guides  for  con- 
ducting the  staple  to  the  rod;  a  device  for  feeding  the  staples  between  the  guides;  a  driver 
for  forcing  them  into  the  rod,  and  a  device  for  moving  the  rod  forward  any  required  dis- 
tance, as  each  staple  is  driven. 

It  is  mounted  on  a  substantial  iron  column,  and  worked  by  foot,  leaving  the  operator 
free  with  both  hands  to  manipulate  his  work. 

The  feed  travels  parallel  with  the  top  of  the  platen,  and  can  be  varied  to  set  staples  at 
different  distances  apart.  The  staple  driver  is  made  of  a  piece  of  hardened  steel,  so  that 
in  case  of  breakage  or  when  worn,  can  be  easily  replaced. 

In  wiring  or  stapling  the  slats  the  feed  bolt  or  spacing  device  is  thrown  out  of  position 
and  not  used. 

In  wiring  the  rod,  or  the  slat  on  the  rod,  the  slats  are  placed  in  a  wood  carrier, 
with  a  properly  notched  gauge  formed  on  the  under  side,  moving  one  space  at  each  mo- 
tion of  the  machine. 

It  has  an  improved  device  for  feeding  the  staples  to  the  driver,  which  entirely  prevents 
the  possibility  of  more  than  one  staple  being  driven  at  a  time.  It  is  easily  worked  and 
kept  in  order,  and  much  liked  wherever  used.  The  staples  are  driven  with  perfect  accu- 
racy in  either  the  rod  or  slat  separately  or  to  connect  them  together. 

It  is  not  liable  to  disarrangement,  and  will  space  off,  set,  and  drive  at  the  rate  of 
eighty  staples  per  minute  in  the  very  best  manner. 


130 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Stengel's  Patent  Dovetailing  Machine. 

This  is  an  entirely  new  and  simple  dovetailing  machine,  adapted  to  all  the  require- 
ments of  cabinet  makers,  carpenters,  house  builders,  etc.,  designed  to  meet  the  objections 
which  are  urged  with  more  or  less  justice  against  other  machines. 

It  will  cut  a  perfect  and  beautiful  dovetail  on  any  kind  or  thickness  of  material  up  to 
one  and  one-quarter  inches  thick  and  fourteen  inches  wide,  on  both  side  and  front  at  the 
same  operation.  On  narrow  drawers  two  sides  and  two  fronts  can  be  worked  at  the  same 
time  with  unerring  accuracy  and  wonderful  rapidity.  The  countershaft  is  placed  in  the 
center  of  the  machine  and  carries  cone  pulleys,  which  convey  the  power  to  the  spindles. 

The  cutter  spindle  frames  are  stationary,  the  material  being  placed  on  a  vertical  and 
horizontal  plate  and  held  in  position  by  cam  rollers,  the  male  part  of  the  dovetail  being 
cut  on  the  piece  on  the  horizontal  table,  and  the  female  mortise  or  dovetail  cut  on  the 
piece  held  on  the  vertical  table. 

The  operation  is  performed  by  the  movement  of  the  hand  lever  up  and  down,  the 
slide  moving  forward  at  each  alternate  motion  of  the  lever.  The  construction  of  the 
guides  is  such  that,  after  the  machine  is  started,  it  can  not  be  moved  backward  in  the  least 
nor  forward  more  than  the  one  notch  desired,  it  being  an  actual  impossibility  to  spoil  any 
material  after  the  operation  is  properly  commenced. 

The  cutter  spindles  revolve  at  high  speed  in  long  bearings,  and  can  be  adjusted  laterally 
to  suit  the  depth  of  the  cut.  The  cutters  are  of  the  most  simple  kind,  and  provision 
made  to  compensate  for  wear.  This  machine  is  capable  of  making  any  size  or  variety  of 
dovetail,  is  thoroughly  built,  and  easily  kept  in  order. 

It  is  supplied  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  six  inches  in  diameter 
and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  700  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


131 


Expansion  Groover  Head  and  Arbor. 

The  above  is  a  correct  illustration  of  our  improved  expansion  groover  heads  with 
cutters  in  slots,  and  compressed  by  means  of  bolts.  They  are  remarkably  simple  in  con- 
struction and  perfect  in  operation.  They  are  made  of  two  sizes  intended  to  be  used  on 
any  ordinary  saw  arbor  by  leaving  off  the  outside  collar. 

The  No.  1  is  seven  and  one-quarter  inches  in  diameter  on  the  cutting  edge,  and  will 
expand  from  one-half  to  two  inches.  The  No.  2  is  eight  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter 
on  the  cutting  edge,  and  will  expand  from  five-eighths  to  two  inches. 

Solid  Expansion  Groover  Heads 

FOR    UNIVERSAL    AND    VARIETY  WOOD-WORKERS. 

These  are  special  heads  designed  to  be  used  only  upon  our  wood-workers.  They  are 
so  constructed  that,  without  removal  or  change  of  cutters,  they  will  expand  to  double 
their  width,  and,  owing  to  their  peculiar  construction,  can  be  made  to  cut  any  width 
of  gain  from  one-half  inch  to  seven  inches  in  width. 


WE  MAKE  THE  FOLLOWING  SIZES  I 


No.  3  to  work  from    ^  inch  to  1  inch. 


/8 


13/ 


No.  6    .    to  work  from  2     inch  to  4  inch. 

7    .  3^  7 

Also  solid  gaining  heads  \  in.  and  f  in.  each. 


Plain  Groover  Head  and  Cutters. 


This  is  the  common  plain  groover  head,  used  for  cutting 
gains  or  grooves  in  window  frames,  door  stuff,  plank,  etc. 

The  cutters  are  furnished  with  spurs,  and  held  in  slots  by 
tapered  compression  bolts.  They  can  be  fitted  to  any  saw 
arbor,  and  are  furnished  with  cutters,  from  one-quarter  inch  to 
five-eighths  and  from  three-fourths  to  one  and  one-half  inches 
wide,  according  to  the  size  of  the  head. 

We  make  two  sizes :  No.  1,  with  cutters  to  work  from  one- 
quarter  to  five-eighths  inch  wide  ;  No.  2,  with  cutters  to  work  from  three-fourths  to  one 
and  one-half  inches  wide. 


132 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Power  Mortising  Machines. 

The  Power  Mortising  Machine  forms  an  exception  among  wood-working  tools,  as  it  is 
the  only  machine  that  performs  its  work  by  positive  and  intermittant  blows.  In  other 
machines,  when  the  resistance  is  too  great,  the  belts  yield  and  no  damage  occurs,  but 
with  the  mortiser  all  parts  must  be  so  proportioned  and  constructed  as  to  preclude  any 
possibility  of  breaking  from  jar  or  concussion.  The  chisel  bar  movement  is  dissimilar  in 
different  machines,  and  may  be  classed  as  follows: 

1st.  Machines  having  a  fixed  position  of  the  eccentric  shaft,  with  a  positive  and  con- 
tinuous motion  of  the  chisel  bar,  where  the  wood  has  to  be  raised  or  brought  to  the  chisel 
to  receive  its  action.  These  machines  have  a  great  advantage  in  the  simplicity  of  their 
construction,  and  the  high  speed  at  which  they  may  be  run,  and  are  well  adapted  to  light 
work,  such  as  door,  sash,  blind,  and  furniture  mortising. 

2d.  Machines  in  which  the  mortise  is  formed  by  a  revolving  traversing  augur  or  bit, 
so  constructed  as  to  cut  on  the  side  as  well  as  on  the  end.  These  machines  are  extensively 
used  for  chair  and  special  work,  where  many  pieces  are  required  to  be  duplicated. 

3d.  Machines  in  which  the  eccentric  shaft,  with  the  reciprocating  parts,  are  all  moved 
to  the  work.  The  objections  to  this  class  of  machines  are,  that  the  force  of  the  blow  falls 
equally  upon  the  chisel  bar  and  the  treadle  of  the  operator,  except  as  neutralized  by  the 
inertia  of  the  crank  wheel  and  attachments.  This  class  of  machines  are  best  adapted  to 
quick  motion  and  light  work,  and  are  unsuited  to  heavy  mortising  with  slow  motion. 

4th.  Machines  where  the  stroke  is  produced  by  a  variable  eccentric  increasing  or 
diminishing  the  throw  of  the  chisel  bar  in  both  directions.  This  class  of  machines  require 
a  stroke  twice  the  depth  of  the  mortise,  with  the  clearance  added,  which  gives  a  long  mo- 
tion to  the  reciprocating  parts.  This  limits  the  speed  of  the  machine,  and  causes  unneces- 
sary wear  and  vibration  in  the  machine. 

5th.  The  Graduated  Stroke  Mortising  Machine,  where  the  motion  is  produced  by 
lengthening  the  connection  from  the  eccentric  to  the  chisel  bar,  starting  from  a  still  point. 

6th.  Machines  where  the  chisel  bar  has  a  progressive  downward  movement  to  the 
required  depth  of  mortise,  the  crank  shaft  and  guides  having  a  fixed  position. 

In  selecting  and  adopting  the  principles  most  suitable  for  the  different  classes  of  work, 
we  have  been  governed  by  the  experience  derived  from  an  extensive  series  of  experi- 
ments, the  results  of  which  have  been  embodied  in  the  three  classes  of  mortisers  con- 
structed by  us,  which  are  mentioned  in  the  first,  second,  and  fifth  paragraphs. 

The  first  mentioned  is  used  for  light  work,  as  in  cabinet  and  carpenters  mortising, 
where  the  sticks  are  of  such  size  as  to  be  easily  handled  by  the  operator. 

The  second  is  entirely  adapted  to  chair  work,  and  its  principle  is  the  same  as  used  on 
the  common  routing  machine,  and  the  application  to  that  class  of  work. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


133 


The  fifth  mentioned  is  applied  to  the  various  classes  of  heavy  mortising,  or  where  the 
attachments  to  the  table  are  too  heavy  to  be  lifted  by  the  operator.  In  this  class  there  are 
some  recently  introduced  valuable  improvements,  among  which  are  an  automatic  reverser 
for  one  class  of  work,  and  a  friction  slide,  which  takes  from  the  foot  all  concussion  pro- 
duced by  the  stroke  of  the  chisel. 

The  automatic  reverser  is  placed  upon  all  the  lighter  machines,  and  is  indispensible  to 
their  successful  operation. 

In  the  descriptions  attached  to  the  illustrations,  the  various  parts  are  mentioned  in 
detail,  to  which  we  invite  your  attention.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  requirements  of 
car,  bridge  and  ship  builders,  agricultural  implement,  wheel,  coach,  chair,  furniture,  sash, 
door,  and  blind  makers  have  been  fully  anticipated. 

The  improvements  are  covered  by  letters  patent,  and  comparison  and  competition  is 
invited. 

They  are  classified  as  follows  : 
Foot  Mortising  Machines. 
Chair  Mortising  and  Boring  Machines. 
No.  1  Power  Sash  Mortising  Machines. 

No.  2  Power  Sash  and  Door  Mortising  Machine,  straight  bed. 
No.  2  Power  Sash  and  Door  Mortising  Machine,  with  carriage  feed. 
No.  3  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine  for  cabinet  work. 
No.  3^  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine  for  light  agricultural  work,  etc. 
No.  31^  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine  for  light  hub  work. 
No.  4  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine  for  heavy  agricultural  and  car  work. 
No.  4  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine  for  heavy  hub  work. 
No.  6  Large  Car  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine  with  Auxiliary  Boring  Attachment 
for  car  and  heavy  bridge  work. 


134 


A.  FAY  &  GO'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


PATENT 
Prize  Foot  Mortising  Machine. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


135 


Patent  Prize  Foot  Mortising  Machine. 

This  machine  is  made  from  entirely  new  patterns  and  designs,  and  is  recommended  to 
the  attention  of  small  builders  and  those  who  do  not  employ  power,  who  require  a  first- 
class  machine  for  all  kinds  of  work. 

It  will  be  found  not  only  efficient  and  durable,  but  the  most  powerful  Foot  Mortising 
Machine  ever  constructed,  adapted  for  all  kinds  of  mortising,  where  the  expense  of  a 
power  machine  can  not  be  afforded. 

The  Column  is  cast  solid  in  one  piece,  has  a  broad  base  upon  which  it  stands  firmly 

in  position,  without  securing  to  the  floor. 

The  chisel  mandrel  is  operated  by  means  of  two  vibrating  arms,  connected  by  a  pivot 
with  a  bent  treadle,  whose  short  member  forms  the  lower  member  of  a  knuckle  joint 
secured  near  to  the  bottom  of  the  pedestal. 

The  treadle  acts  through  the  medium  of  the  knuckle  with  a  powerfully  increasing 
purchase  or  leverage  as  the  chisel  passes  downward  into  the  stuff  and  the  spring  reaching 
its  greatest  tensional  force,  acts  promptly  to  release  the  chisel  the  instant  that  the  treadle 
is  relieved  from  the  pressure  of  the  operator's  foot. 

The  table  is  supported  upon  a  bracket  which  is  instantly  made  to  raise  or  fall  to  take 
in  stuff  of  different  depths  by  means  of  the  hand  wheel  in  front  operating  upon  a  segment 
gear.  It  has  all  the  requisite  lateral  and  vertical  movements  without  the  necessity  of 
using  a  wrench.    We  furnish  as  extra : 

Kl  The  Double  Chisel  for  Sash  Work. 

It  has  two  edges  with  a  V  shape  between.  It  is  pressed  into  the 
sash-bar  a  little  more  than  half  way  through,  when  the  bar  is  turned, 
and,  by  an  impression  on  the  opposite  side,  the  mortise  is  made. 

^^^'^^^  The  Blind  Slat  Chisel 

SASH  CHISEL.  SLAT  CHISEL. 

Is  used  for  making  the  groove  for  the  blind  slat  in  the  stile,  the  length  of  which  being 
less  than  the  width  of  stile  and  corresponding  with  the  width  of  the  slat.  The  slat  enters 
this  groove,  and  is  by  it  confined  in  its  place  without  moldings  or  brads.  These  Chisels 
we  make  with  one,  two,  or  three  pair  of  cutters  of  such  length  and  thickness  as  may  be 
wanted. 

Each  machine  is  supplied  with  five  chisels,  i^,  /e,  and  ^  inch.  We  can  fur- 
nish other  sizes,  from       to  1%  inches  when  wanted. 


136 


y.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Lemmans'  Patent  Chair  Mortiser  and  Borer, 


This  machine  is  especially  adapted  to  all  the  various  kinds  of  chair  mortising,  either 
straight  or  curved  work,  without  stopping  the  machine ;  and  it  can  also  be  used  as  a  hori- 
zontal boring  and  routering  machine.  The  principle  of  the  machine  is  rotary.  The  fixed 
end  of  the  boring  bar  moves  in  a  ball  and  socket  joint,  allowing  the  bar  to  revolve,  and 
the  vibrating  end  to  be  moved  in  any  direction  desired. 

The  variations  from  straight  to  mortises  of  different  curves  are  produced  by  the  posi- 
tion of  the  curved  bar,  upon  which  the  bearing  of  the  movable  end  of  the  boring  bar 
slides;  when  the  bar  is  placed  with  the  curve  horizontal  the  mortises  are  straight,  and 
changed  to  its  greatest  curve  when  perpendicular. 

Any  length  of  mortise  equal  to  the  travel  of  the  cutting  bit  can  be  made  by  changing 
the  stroke  of  the  crank  pin,  and  also  by  the  arrangement  of  a  handle  moving  the  end  of  the 
connecting  rod  to  any  position  desired  upon  a  curved  rod  which  produces  a  greater  or  less 
length  of  the  connecting  rods,  giving  any  length  of  mortise  desired  within  the  capacity  of 
the  machine. 

The  depth  of  the  mortise  is  regulated  by  moving  the  table  holding  the  stuff  by  a  lever 
in  connection  with  a  pinion  and  rack.  The  table  is  raised  vertically  by  a  screw  and  hand 
wheel,  and  provided  with  three  clamps,  of  different  forms,  for  holding  the  stuff  in  the  posi- 
tion required  for  the  work. 

It  is  supplied  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  eight  inches  in 
diameter,  four-inch  face,  and  should  make  1,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


137 


No.  1 

Patent  Power  Sash  Mortising  Machine. 

This  is  a  new  and  superior  machine,  intended  for  sash,  bhnd,  and  light  door  mortising. 
It  is  constructed  wholly  of  steel,  upon  the  same  general  principles  as  our  No.  2  Sash  and 
Door  Power  Mortiser,  and  combines  all  the  improvements  and  advantages  of  that  machine, 
excepting  that  it  is  much  lighter,  has  a  less  range  of  work,  and  is  intended  exclusively  for 
sash,  blind,  and  light  work,  for  which  it  has  no  equal. 

The  chisel  reverses  automatically  while  at  rest  or  in  motion,  the  same  as  on  the  larger 
machines.  The  bed  is  made  to  swing  to  any  angle  desired,  and  adjustable  to  suit  different 
widths  of  mortising. 

It  has  the  patent  compound  treadle  and  will  be  found  complete  in  every  respect. 
It  is  constructed  in  the  most  substantial  manner,  with  compensating  joints,  and  may  be 
run  at  a  very  much  higher  speed  than  any  other  sash  mortisers,  and  without  the  usual 
jar  and  tremble  found  in  other  machines. 

The  machine  is  furnished  with  y^,  /e,  ^,  and  inch  mortising  chisels,  and  is 
warranted  superior  to  any  sash  mortiser  in  use. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  eleven  inches  in  diameter  and  three-inch  face,  and 
should  make  500  revolutions  per  minute. 


A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  2 

Patent  Door  and  Sash  Power  Mortiser. 

WITH  STRAIGHT  BED, 


COMPOUND  TREADLE,   AND  AUTOMATIC  CHISEL  REVERSER. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


139 


No.  2 

Patent  Door  and  Sash  Power  Mortising  Machine. 

WITH  STRAIGHT  BED, 
COMPOUND  TREADLE,   AND  AUTOMATIC  CHISEL  REVERSER. 

The  machine  shown  by  the  accompanying  engraving  is  intended  for  mortising  doors, 
sash,  etc.  It  is  most  substantially  built  in  every  part,  with  a  view  to  the  work  for  which 
it  is  designed. 

The  carriage  or  bed  on  which  the  stuff  to  be  mortised  is  placed,  is  stationary,  the 
work  being  fed  to  the  chisel  by  hand  instead  of  being  moved  with  the  carriage,  as  is  done 
on  the  compound  bed.  For  light  work  and  rapid  mortising,  where  it  is  not  required  to 
clamp  the  stuff,  this  is  generally  preferred. 

By  means  of  the  treadle,  the  bed  is  elevated  so  that  the  chisel  enters  the  wood 
gradually,  working  in  deeper  and  deeper  at  each  stroke,  until  the  desired  depth  is  gained, 
thus  preventing  the  severe  concussion  and  jar  which  is  certain  to  occur  when  the  chisel 
enters  the  wood  at  full  depth. 

It  is  also  arranged  so  as  to  admit  of  mortising  at  any  desired  height,  by  simply 
turning  the  crank  in  front.  Provision  is  also  made  for  relieving  the  bed  elevating  screw 
from  danger  to  spring,  caused  by  the  thrust  of  the  chisel  in  heavy  work. 

It  is  also  arranged  for  radial  mortising,  and  has  adjustments  in  any  required  direction, 
and  hence  is  remarkably  well  adapted  for  all  kinds  of  mortising  within  its  capacity.  It  is 
also  supplied  with  our  patent  automatic  chisel  reverser,  which  receives  the  chisel  bar  while 
in  motion  or  at  rest,  alternately  in  reverse  directions,  less  than  one  inch  movement  of  the 
table  being  necessary  to  accomplish  it. 

The  patent  compound  treadle  is  arranged  in  a  new  and  novel  manner,  so  as  to  produce 
a  greater  or  less  throw  of  the  table,  as  the  nature  of  the  work  may  demand,  which  also 
changes  the  depth  of  the  mortise. 

The  adjustment  is  instantaneous  and  durable,  and  will  be  found  much  more  con- 
venient than  other  modes  hitherto  employed.  The  machine  does  not  require  to  be  stopped 
while  changing  the  stuff,  and  the  chisel  will  make  400  to  500  strokes  per  minute. 

For  morticing  door  stuff  and  all  kinds  of  soft  wood,  no  boring  is  required.  Each 
machine  is  furnished  with  y^,  lo,  and  ^  inch  chisels,  and  can  be  set  up  and  put 
to  work  within  an  hour  after  being  received. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eleven  inches  in  diameter  and  three-inch  face, 
should  make  400  to  500  revolutions  per  minute. 


140 


/.  A.  FAY  &■  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


NO.  2 

Patent  Door  and  Sash  Power  Mortising  Machine. 

WITH  COMPOUND  BED, 


COMPOUND  TREADLE,   AND  AUTOMATIC  CHISEL  REVERSER. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


141 


No.  2 

Patent  Door  and  Sash  Power  Mortising  Machine. 

WITH  COMPOUND  BED 
AND  AUTOMATIC  CHISEL  REVERSER. 

The  machine  herewith  illustrated,  is  constructed  wholly  of  iron  and  steel,  and  is  in- 
tended for  mortising  doors,  sash,  etc.  It  is  built  in  the  most  substantial  manner,  and  may- 
be run  at  a  much  higher  rate  of  speed  than  ordinary  machines,  and,  in  consequence,-  turn 
off  a  larger  amount  of  work.  It  is  conceded  to  be  unsurpassed  by  any  machine  of  the 
kind  yet  produced. 

It  is  fitted  with  our  new  patent  compound  bed,  on  which  the  stuff  to  be  worked  is 
clamped,  and  moved  under  the  chisel  by  a  rack  and  pinion,  the  treadle  raising  the  bed  so 
that  the  chisel  enters  the  wood  gradually,  and  working  in  deeper  and  deeper  at  each 
stroke  until  the  desired  depth  is  gained,  thus  preventing  the  severe  concussion  and  jar 
which  always  occurs  when  the  chisel  enters  the  wood  at  full  depth. 

The  same  bed  can  be  used  for  straight  mortising  in  the  usual  manner,  as  it  is  provided 
with  bent  stops  for  holding  the  stuff,  which  are  arranged  to  swing  and  adjust  to  different 
heights,  as  may  be  desired. 

The  bed  is  also  arranged  for  radial  mortising,  and  has  adjustments  in  any  required  di- 
rection, and  hence  is  remarkably  well  adapted  for  all  kinds  of  mortising  within  its  capacity. 

The  treadle  is  arranged  in  a  new  and  novel  manner,  so  as  to  produce  a  greater  or 
less  throw  of  the  table,  as  the  nature  of  the  work  may  demand,  which  also  changes  the 
depth  of  the  mortise;  and  the  adjustment  being  instantaneous  and  durable,  it  is  much  more 
convenient  than  other  modes  hitherto  employed. 

The  treadle  is  admitted  to  be  a  decided  improvement  over  those  of  any  other  con- 
struction, and  the  machine  may  be  run  at  a  high  speed  with  scarcely  any  perceptible  jar 
or  tremble  to  the  operator. 

This  machine  is  also  fitted  with  our  new  patent  reverser,  which  reverses  the  chisel 
bar  automatically,  while  in  motion  or  at  rest,  alternately  in  reverse  directions,  as  required, 
less  than  one  inch  movement  of  the  table  being  necessary  to  accomplish  it.  This  self-re- 
verser  is  new,  positive,  sure,  and  durable,  and  with  many  other  features  of  the  machine  is 
universally  admired. 

The  machine  does  not  require  to  be  stopped  while  changing  the  stuff,  and  the  chisel 
will  make  four  hundred  strokes  per  minute.  For  mortising  door  stuff  and  all  kinds  of  soft 
wood,  no  boring  is  required.  Each  machine  is  furnished  with  y^,  le,  ^,  and  ^  inch 
chisels. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  eleven  inches  in  diameter  and  three-inch  face,  and 
should  make  450  revolutions  per  minute. 


142 


/  A.  FAY  &  COrS  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  3 

Patent  Cabinet  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine, 

WITH  COMPOUND  TREADLE 
AND  AUTOMATIC  CHISEL  REVERSER. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


143 


NO.  3 

Patent  Cabinet  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

WITH  COMPOUND  TREADLE 
AND  AUTOMATIC  CHISEL  REVERSER. 

This  machine  is  especially  adapted  for  ordinary  work  in  hard  wood  and  the  heavier 
classes  of  building  work.  It  is  much  used  by  cabinet  and  coach  makers,  and  for  light 
agricultural  work. 

It  is  fitted  with  our  new  patent  compound  bed,  on  which  the  stuff  to  be  worked  is 
clamped,  and  moved  under  the  chisel  by  a  rack  and  pinion.  The  treadle  elevates  the  bed 
so  that  the  chisel  enters  the  wood  gradually  and  works  in  deeper  and  deeper  at  each  stroke, 
until  the  desired  depth  is  gained,  thus  preventing  the  severe  concussion  and  jar  which  is 
liable  to  occur  when  the  chisel  enters  the  wood  at  full  length. 

The  same  bed  is  also  arranged  so  as  to  allow  of  mortising  on  an  angle,  has  adjust- 
ments in  every  required  direction,  and  is  well  adapted  to  every  variety  of  mortising 
within  its  capacity. 

This  machine  is  also  provided  with  a  boring  mandrel,  which  is  set  on  the  same  line 
with  the  chisel,  so  that  the  work  can  be  bored  and  then  run  under  the  chisel  and  mortised 
without  releasing  it  from  the  bed.  This  is  not  wanted  however,  except  for  hard  wood,  and 
can  be  used  or  not,  at  the  will  of  the  operator. 

The  treadle  is  arranged  in  a  new  and  novel  manner,  so  as  to  produce  a  greater  or  less 
throw  of  the  table,  as  the  nature  of  the  work  may  demand,  which  also  changes  the  depth 
of  the  mortise — this  adjustment  being  instantaneous  and  durable,  is  admitted  to  be  a 
decided  improvement  over  those  of  any  other  construction. 

The  machine  is  also  fitted  with  our  new  patent  reverser,  which  reverses  the  chisel  bar 
automatically  while  in  motion  or  at  rest,  alternately,  in  reverse  directions  as  required,  less 
than  one  inch  movement  of  the  treadle  only  being  necessary  to  accomplish  it. 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  i^,  le,  i^,  and  ^  mortising  chisels  and  augers 
to  suit.  The  machine  is  not  stopped  while  changing  the  stuff,  and  the  chisel  will  make  from 
400  to  500  strokes  per  minute. 

It  is  supplied  with  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eleven  inches  in  diameter 
and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  400  revolutions  per  minute. 


144 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No. 

Patent  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

WITH  COMPOUND  BED, 


GRADUATED  STROKE,  AND  AUTOMATIC  CHISEL  REVERSER. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


145 


NO. 

Patent  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

compound  bed. 

(with  graduated  stroke  and  automatic  chisel  REVERSER.) 

This  machine  has  been  specially  designed  to  meet  the  demand  for  a  rapid  working 
mortising  and  boring  machine  of  comparatively  small  cost,  for  wagon,  cabinet,  and  light 
agricultural  work,  where  the  large  and  extra  heavy  machines  are  not  needed. 

The  construction  of  this  machine  is  of  the  most  substantial  and  durable  character, 
every  joint  in  the  graduated  movement  being  bored,  turned,  and  compensating. 

The  entire  machine  is  made  of  iron  and  steel,  intended  for  hard  service,  so  that  with 
ordinary  care  it  can  be  operated  for  years  without  repairs. 

It  is  a  lighter  machine  than  the  No.  4,  but  possesses  many  of  the  features  of  that 
machine,  with  the  additional  advantage  of  the  automatic  chisel  reverser. 

Attention  is  invited  to  the  following  points  of  excellence  found  in  this  machine : 

1st.  The  perfectly  graduated  stroke  of  the  chisel  bar,  commencing  at  a  still  point 
above  the  extreme  upper  throw,  and  so  arranged  that  there  is  little  or  no  perceptible  jar 
to  the  foot  of  the  operator  on  the  heaviest  work  for  which  it  is  intended. 

2d.  The  automatic  chisel  reverser — the  simplest  known  ;  reverses  the  chisel  bar  auto- 
matically while  in  motion  or  at  rest,  with  less  than  one  inch  movement  of  the  treadle. 

3d.  The  patent  compound  bed  on  which  the  stuff  is  clamped,  and  fed  to  the  chisel  by 
rack  and  pinion  instead  of  moving  the  stuff  by  hand,  effecting  a  great  saving  of  labor  when 
mortising  heavy  hard  wood  pieces.  The  bed  also  has  a  radial  adjustment  for  angle 
mortising. 

4th.  The  center  of  the  augur  of  the  boring  mandrel  is  placed  exactly  in  line  with  the 
center  of  the  chisel,  so  that  after  being  bored  the  piece  has  merely  to  be  moved  laterally 
to  bring  it  under  the  chisel.  The  boring  spindle  has  sufficient  vertical  range  to  enable  the 
operator  to  bore  the  full  depth  of  the  mortise. 

5th.  The  driving  shaft  is  placed  at  the  top  of  the  column  in  self-oiling  bearings,  with 
heavily  bolted  caps  to  receive  the  impact  of  the  chisel  blow,  and  carries  the  crank  wheel 
and  tight  and  loose  pulleys. 

6th.  Owing  to  the  lightness  and  strength  of  the  reciprocating  parts,  it  can  be  run 
one-third  faster  than  ordinary  machines  of  this  class,  thus  turning  out  a  much  larger 
amount  of  work  in  the  same  time. 

It  is  provided  with  six  chisels  of  the  following  sizes:  5^,  and  1  inch, 

with  augers  to  match. 

Every  part  of  the  machine  is  attached  to  and  supported  on  the  main  column,  no 
attachments  of  weights,  treadles,  or  pulleys  to  the  building  being  necessary. 

It  is  provided  with  tight  and  loose  pulleys  which  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and 
three-inch  face,  and  should  make  325  revolutions  per  minute. 


146 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  4 

Patent  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

(with  graduated  stroke.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY, 


147 


No.  4 

Patent  Power  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

(for  agricultural  work.) 

This  is  a  very  heavy  and  substantial  machine,  and  capable  of  mortising  most  any 
description  of  timber.  It  is  strongly  recommended  for  agricultural  and  carriage  shops,  and 
wherever  a  strong  machine  for  general  work  in  hard  wood  is  needed. 

It  has  the  perfectly  graduated  stroke,  commencing  at  a  still  point  above  the  extreme 
upper  throw  and  working  gradually  down  into  the  mortise,  with  little  or  no  perceptible 
jar  to  the  foot  of  the  operator ;  and  without  any  slides  or  levers,  and  with  about  one-half 
the  pieces  usually  employed  in  machines  of  this  class.  Every  joint  in  the  movement  is 
bored  and  turned  and  compensating,  while  there  is  not  a  single  piece  that  will  not  last  a 
life  time  with  care  and  skillful  use. 

It  runs  without  noise,  and  from  the  lightness  and  strength  of  the  reciprocating  parts, 
can  be  run  one-third  faster  than  any  machine  of  like  class. 

The  table  on  which  the  timber  rests  can  be  readily  raised  or  lowered  to  suit  different 
thicknesses  by  means  of  the  screw  immediately  under  the  line  of  the  chisel,  which  receives 
the  force  of  the  blow,  and  by  which  it  is  supported.  The  table  is  fitted  with  cross-slides, 
by  which  the  piece  can  be  readily  moved  into  position,  worked  by  a  rack  and  pinion. 

The  boring  apparatus  is  fixed  in  such  position  that  the  center  of  the  auger  is  always 
exactly  in  line  with  the  center  of  the  chisel,  so  that  the  piece,  after  being  bored,  has  merely 
to  be  moved  laterally  to  bring  it  under  the  chisel. 

The  boring  spindle  has  a  vertical  range,  to  enable  the  augers  to  bore  clear  through 
the  largest  piece  of  timber  the  machine  will  receive,  and  can  be  used  as  a  separate  boring 
machine,  when  not  required  for  mortising. 

It  embraces  many  recent  valuable  patented  improvements,  is  very  heavy  and  substantial 
in  its  construction,  simple  in  its  arrangement,  and  successful  in  its  operation.  They  are 
in  use  in  many  of  the  largest  agricultural  shops  in  the  country,  and  are  believed  to  be  far 
superior  to  any  other  heavy  power  mortising  and  boring  machine  made. 

We  furnish  with  each  machine  nine  chisels  and  nine  augers,  to  match,  viz.  : 
1>         and  1%.     Any  other  sizes  can  be  furnished,  that  may  be  wanted. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and 
should  make  325  revolutions  per  minute. 


A.  FAY  &  cars  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No. 

Patent  Hub  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

(with  graduated  stroke.) 

SCREW  CHUCK,   TAPER  CUPS,  ETC. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


149 


No. 

Patent  Hub  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

(with  graduated  stroke.) 

This  machine  is  designed  for  a  Hght  class  of  hub  mortising;  and  in  the  range  of  work 
to  which  it  is  hmited,  is  not  excelled  in  the  speed  of  operation  and  ease  of  adjustment. 

Among  the  points  peculiar  to  this  machine  are  the  combination  of  the  friction  side 
plate  and  the  graduated  stroke  to  relieve  the  foot  of  the  operator  from  all  jar,  the  auto- 
matic reverser  for  the  chisel,  and  the  method  of  setting  the  table  for  the  angles  of  the 
mortises. 

The  table  is  adjustable  to  different  sizes  of  hubs,  being  raised  and  lowered  by  a  screw 
worked  by  a  crank  in  front.  The  chisel  is  brought  down  to  the  work  by  the  action  of  the 
treadle,  the  chisel  connections  being  lengthened  as  the  treadle  is  depressed,  thus  bringing 
the  chisel  into  the  mortise  gradually,  from  a  still  point,  to  the  full  length  of  the  stroke. 

The  sliding  friction-plate,  connected  with  the  treadle,  prevents  concussion  of  the 
blows  of  the  chisel  from  reaching  the  foot  of  the  operator. 

It  is  also  supplied  with  our  patent  automatic  chisel  reverser,  which  reverses  the  chisel 
bar  while  in  motion  or  at  rest,  alternately  in  reverse  directions,  less  than  one  inch  move- 
ment of  the  table  being  necessary  to  accomplish  it. 

The  table  is  arranged  with  a  chuck,  fastening  the  hubs  at  one  end,  the  other  end 
turning  in  a  cup.  The  jaws  of  the  chuck  are  operated  by  a  screw,  and  the  chuck  has 
an  index  plate  with  its  periphery  drilled  with  a  series  of  holes  by  the  use  of  which  the 
number  of  mortises  in  the  hub  is  graduated. 

The  length  of  the  mortise  is  accurately  graduated  by  means  of  stops  on  the  table.  It 
will  work  both  straight  and  zig-zag  mortises. 

The  angles  of  the  mortise  are  governed  by  a  lever  set  in  position  and  held  as  may  be 
desired,  in  a  series  of  movable  poppets  in  a  slotted  curve  piece  attached  to  the  table,  the 
whole  arrangement  moving  with  the  table. 

The  boring  attachment  is  driven  from  the  shaft  at  the  top  of  the  machine.  The 
auger  is  placed  on  the  line  of  the  chisel,  that  after  the  hub  is  bored,  by  the  action  of  a 
rack  and  pinion  turned  by  a  hand-wheel,  the  hub  is  moved  under  the  chisel  and  mortised. 

The  capacity  of  this  machine  is  from  thirty  to  sixty  set  of  hubs  per  day,  according  to 
size  and  capacity  of  the  operator.  We  send  seven  chisels  and  augers  with  each  machine, 
viz:  ^,  I,  S/q^      ^  inches. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  three-inch  face,  and 
should  make  300  revolutions  per  minute. 


150 


/.  A.  FAY  &■  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


NO.  4 

Patent  Hub  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

WITH  GRADUATED  STROKE, 
EXPANSION  CHUCK,   TAPER  CUPS,  ETC. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


151 


No.  4 

Patent  Hub  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

(with  graduated  stroke.) 

This  is  a  very  simple  and  powerful  machine,  and  strongly  recommended  for  all 
kinds  of  hub  mortising.  It  embraces  many  valuable  patented  improvements,  is  very 
heavy  and  substantial  in  its  construction,  simple  in  its  arrangement,  and  perfectly  success- 
ful in  its  operation.  It  is  well  represented  by  the  engraving,  by  referring  to  which  any 
mechanic  can  put  one  together. 

The  combination  and  arrangement  of  the  working  parts  is  one  that  admits  of  the 
greatest  accuracy  and  rapidity  in  boring  and  mortising  hubs  of  any  size  up  to  twelve 
inches  in  diameter  and  eighteen  inches  long. 

It  has  a  perfectly  graduated  stroke,  commencing  at  a  still  point  above  the  extreme 
upper  throw,  and  working  gradually  down  into  the  mortise  with  little  or  no  jar  to  the  foot 
of  the  operator,  the  chisel  mandrel  being  vibrated  only  when  the  chisel  is  brought  down 
to  the  work. 

In  ordinary  hub  mortising  machines  the  chisel  runs  constantly,  and  moves  as  much 
above  the  line  of  the  mortise  as  it  is  required  to  do  below,  which  causes  unnecessary 
strain  and  wear  of  the  working  parts,  and  makes  it  very  hard  for  the  operator.  Owing 
to  the  novel  construction  of  the  reciprocating  parts,  this  defect  is  overcome,  and  the 
machine  can  be  run  one  third  faster  than  other  machines.  The  mortising  and  boring 
apparatus  may  both  be  driven  by  one  belt  from  the  countershaft,  or  independent  of  each 
other,  as  may  be  desired. 

The  hubs  are  confined  in  a  screw  chuck,  the  arms  on  its  face  being  operated  at  the 
same  time  and  by  a  single  screw.  It  has  a  graduating  wheel,  accurately  spaced  for  10,  12, 
14,  16,  and  18  spokes,  thus  obviating  the  necessity  for  setting  out.  The  dish  of  the 
mortise  is  regulated  by  a  lever,  having  a  crank  and  connections  attached  to  the  table. 

The  lever  has  a  handle  with  a  spring  top,  which  works  into  adjustable  poppets  in  a 
slot  on  the  same  circle  as  the  lever  handle  described.  The  lever  supports  with  the  slotted 
piece  are  rigidly  fixed  to  the  center,  upon  which  the  table  swings,  and  convenient  to 
adjust  the  angle  of  the  mortise  instantly.  Eleven  chisels  are  furnished  with  each  machine, 
with  augers  to  match,  viz:  ^,  I,,  ^,  IJ,  ^,      V^.  ie,  1  inch. 

Tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should 
make  325  revolutions  per  minute. 


152 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


NO.  6 

Large  Patent  Car  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

WITH 

(regular  and  auxiliary  boring  attachments.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


153 


No.  6 

Large  Patent  Oar  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine. 

WITH  GRADUATED  STROKE, 
REGULAR  AND  AUXILIARY  BORING  ATTACHMENTS. 

This  is  an  extra  heavy  machine,  erected  from  new  designs,  and  adapted  for  the 
heaviest  description  of  car  and  bridge  work,  being  capable  of  cutting,  a  two  and  one-half 
inch  mortise  through  sixteen-inch  timber. 

It  is  constructed  upon  a  hollow  column  of  very  strong  section,  having  a  broad  base, 
upon  which  it  stands  firmly  upon  the  floor.  It  is  made  entirely  of  iron  and  steel,  and 
every  part  is  attached  to  and  supported  on  the  main  column ;  no  attachments  of  weights, 
treadle,  or  pulleys  to  the  building  being  necessary. 

The  chisel  bar  has  a  perfectly  graduated  stroke,  commencing  at  a  still  point  above  the 
extreme  upper  throw  and  working  gradually  down  into  the  mortise,  with  little  or  no  per- 
ceptible jar  to  the  foot,  under  perfect  control  of  the  operator,  without  slides  or  lever,  and 
with  about  one-half  the  joints  usually  employed  in  machines  of  this  class. 

The  bed  will  receive  timber  up  to  seventeen  inches  square,  and  the  chisel  will  beat  a 
mortise  to  the  center  of  sixteen  inches  and  eight  inches  deep,  or,  by  changing  the  face  of 
the  stick,  it  can  be  made  to  work  clear  through. 

The  bed  or  table  is  supported  on  a  central  screw,  by  which  means  the  thrust  or  blow 
of  the  chisel  is  terminated  to  the  foundation,  and  does  not  fall  upon  the  table  bracket.  It 
has  two  boring  attachments :  one  on  a  line  with  the  chisel  to  bore  for  the  mortises,  which 
will  bore  to  ten  inches  from  the  center  of  column;  also,  an  adjustable  auxiliary  boring  at- 
tachment, for  boring  bolt  holes,  which  will  bore  seventeen-inch  stuff 

We  furnish  with  each  machine  nine  chisels  and  augers,  to  correspond;  sizes  J^, 
54!,  ^,  1,         li^,  1^,  and        inches;  also,  long  augers  for  boring  joint  bolts,  fe,  Je,  le- 
A  countershaft  for  driving  the  auxiliary  boring  attachment  is  also  supplied  with  each 
machine  without  charge. 

Especial  attention  is  called  to  the  fact  that  every  joint  in  the  graduated  movement  is 
bored  and  turned,  and  is  compensating,  while  there  is  not  a  piece  that  will  not  last  years 
with  care  and  skillful  use.  They  are  in  use  in  many  of  the  largest  railroad  and  car  shops 
in  the  country,  and  warranted  to  give  the  highest  satisfaction. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  sixteen  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and 
should  make  275  revolutions  per  minute. 


154 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Reciprocating  Scroll  Saws. 

In  no  class  of  wood-cutting  machinery  has  there  been  expended,  perhaps,  more  thought 
and  ingenuity  than  on  scroll  saws.  Of  the  very  large  variety  of  machines  invented  and 
introduced,  the  best  and  most  successful  forms  may  be  said  to  be .  those  in  which  the 
tension  of  the  saw  is  nearly  uniform  in  all  parts  of  the  stroke,  and  machines  in  which  the 
saw  has  no  strain,  the  lower  end  being  held  by  a  rigid  fastening,  the  upper  part  running 
loose  between  anti-friction  back  and  side  guides  adjustable  for  various  thicknesses. 

We  make  two  varieties  of  these  machines,  believing  them  to  embody  the  only  true 
and  correct  principles  in  reciprocating  scroll  saws.  The  first  we  designate  as  Fret  Scroll 
Saws,  or  those  having  a  uniform  tension  at  all  points  of  the  stroke  and  adapted  to  any 
style  of  work,  and  particularly  to  all  kinds  of  ornamental  and  fret  sawing,  veneered  work, 
brackets,  etc. 

The  saw  is  quickly  inserted  or  removed,  and  there  is  nothing  in  the  way  of  the  material 
to  prevent  the  sawing  of  any  curve  desired.  They  can  be  run  at  a  very  high  rate 
of  speed,  are  simple,  easy  to  operate,  and  seldom  need  repair.  The  other  style  is  the 
unstrained  saw,  having  a  rigid  fastening  at  the  bottom,  with  appropriate  back  and  side 
guides  to  support  the  saw  above  the  work. 

These  machines  are  so  well  known  for  their  general  good  qualities,  such  as  high 
speed,  rapidity  of  operation,  simplicity  of  construction,  etc.,  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  add 
more  ;  a  full  description  will  be  found  with  the  illustrations.  These  improvements  are 
secured  to  us  by  letters  patent  for  our  protection,  and  will  be  found  on  no  other  Scroll  Saws. 

The  J.  A.  Fay  &  Co.  Patent  Scroll  Saws  have  been  invented  and  perfected  to  meet 
the  requirements  of  all  classes  of  manufacturers,  and  for  all  purposes.  The  thousands  in 
use  is  sufficient  evidence  of  their  popularity. 

Some  of  their  distinguishing  features  may  be  classed  as  follows : 

1st.  The  lightness  of  the  reciprocating  parts,  which  are  self-lubricating. 

2d.  The  manner  of  attaching,  and  the  facility  with  which  the  saws  can  be  changed. 

3d.  The  uniform  tension  of  the  saw  at  different  points  of  the  stroke. 

4th.  The  facility  for  increasing  or  diminishing  the  same. 

5th.  The  arrangement  to  secure  a  greater  or  less  rake  to  the  saw. 

6th.  The  high  speed  they  can  be  run  without  vibration  or  trembling. 

7th.  The  quickness  with  which  they  may  be  started  or  stopped — less  than  five  seconds. 

8th.  The  trifling  expense  required  to  keep  them  in  repair. 

9th.  The  great  range  and  amount  of  work  they  will  perform. 

10th.  The  patent  brake  and  belt  shipper  for  instantly  arresting  or  imparting  motion,  etc. 

We  make  six  different  styles  and  sizes  of  these  saws,  viz : 

No.  1.  Fret  Scroll  Saw,  for  light  sawing,  bracket  and  ornamental  work. 

No.  2.  Fret  Scroll  Saw,  for  heavy  and  light  sawing  of  all  kinds. 

No.  3.  For  chair  factories  and  light  hard  wood  sawing. 

No.  4.  For  felloes,  agricultural  implement  and  heavy  work. 

No.  5.  For  sash  and  door,  furniture  makers,  etc. 

No.  5^.  For  pattern  makers,  and  carpenters'  work,  etc. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


155 


No.  1 
Patent  Fret  Scroll  Saw. 

This  machine  is  well  adapted  for  all  kinds  of  scroll  sawing,  particularly  light  fret, 
bracket,  and  furniture  sawing,  and  is  a  general  favorite  wherever  used. 

The  saw  is  strained  by  a  deflecting  spring  in  connection  with  an  eccentric  cone,  so 
made  that  as  the  straps  are  wrapped  on  it,  it  has  a  lesser  leverage,  as  the  strain  upon  the 
spring  is  greater,  compensating  for  the  distance  the  saw  may  travel  in  the  length  of  its 
stroke.  The  straining  devices  are  inclosed  in  an  iron  case,  which  has  a  vertical  movement  on 
planed  sides,  to  accommodate  different  lengths  of  saws,  controlled  by  the  hand  wheel  in  front. 

The  saws  are  secured  to  the  connecting  strap  and  cross  head,  and  can  be  instantly 
removed  or  replaced.    The  back  of  the  saw  runs  in  an  adjustable  hardened  steel  guide. 

The  cross  heads  can  be  adjusted  to  give  the  saw  more  or  less  rake  by  the  hand  wheel 
in  front.  The  cross  head  slides  have  self-oiling  globes  to  insure  their  lubrication.  It  has 
an  efficient  brake  and  shipper  for  arresting  the  motion,  operated  by  the  foot. 

The  table  is  glued  up  of  strips  of  ash  and  black  walnut,  and  the  entire  machine  is 
furnished  in  a  most  excellent  manner.  Parties  who  desire  a  good  low-priced  machine, 
will  find  it  suited  to  their  wants. 

It  is  furnished  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  six  inches  in  diameter 
and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  1,100  revolutions  per  minute. 


156 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


NO.  2 

Patent  Fret  Scroll  Saw. 

(with  new  strain,  and  patent  brake  and  shipper.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


157 


No.  2. 
Patent  Fret  Scroll  Saw. 

(with  new  strain  and  patent  brake  and  shipper.) 

The  opposite  engraving  is  a  true  illustration  of  our  No.  2  Patent  Fret  Scroll  Saw, 
especially  designed  for  carpenters  and  builders,  cabinet,  bracket,  piano,  wagon,  carriage, 
and  pattern  makers'  use,  and  for  all  external  and  internal  curves,  as  the  saw  can  be  quickly 
detached  and  replaced,  and  it  will  saw  raking  brackets  up  to  fourteen  inches. 

It  has  received  the  highest  commendation  from  all  who  have  used  it,  and  has  been 
awarded  the  first  premium  over  all  competition  wherever  exhibited. 

The  body  of  the  machine  is  cast  in  one  piece,  forming  a  very  solid  and  perma- 
nent base,  giving  the  machine,  while  in  operation,  a  firmness  not  otherwise  obtainable. 
The  reciprocating  parts  are  very  light,  to  obviate,  as  far  as  possible,  the  effects  of  their 
inertia  in  upward  and  downward  movements. 

The  tension  of  the  machine  is  flexible,  the  upper  end  of  the  saw  being  attached  to  a 
strap,  which,  at  its  upper  end,  is  connected  to  a  segment  pulley  connecting  with  an 
eccentric  roller,  to  which  is  attached  straps  connecting  with  two  steel  springs,  constructed 
of  a  series  of  plates  of  different  lengths. 

This  combination  produces,  in  operating,  an  almost  equable  tension  throughout  all 
parts  of  the  stroke  of  the  saw,  the  eccentricity  of  the  roller  being  so  adjusted  that,  as  the 
saw  is  drawn  in  its  downward  stroke  the  lessening  flexibility  of  the  springs  is  compensated 
for,  by  the  shortening  leverage  of  the  eccentric  roller. 

The  springs  are  attached  to  a  sliding  cross  frame,  adjustable  to  and  from  the  table  for 
different  lengths  of  saws. 

There  is  an  efficient  brake  and  shipper  attached  for  starting  and  stopping  the  machine — 
operated  by  foot.  The  cross-head  is  adjustable,  and  can  be  set  to  any  desired  rake  by 
simply  turning  the  hand  wheel  in  front. 

Some  of  the  distinguishing  features  may  be  enumerated  as  follows: 

1st.  The  uniform  tension  of  the  saw  at  different  points  of  the  stroke. 

2d.  The  facility  for  increasing  or  diminishing  the  same. 

3d.  The  arrangement  for  varying  the  rake  of  the  saw. 

4th.  The  ease  with  which  the  saws  can  be  attached  or  detached. 

5th.  The  high  speed  it  may  be  run  without  vibration. 

6th.  The  patent  brake  and  shipper,  by  which  it  is  almost  instantly  started  and  stopped. 
7th.  The  amount  and  range  of  work  it  will  perform. 
8th.  The  trifling  expense  required  to  keep  it  in  repair. 

It  is  supplied  with  gun  metal  guides,  self-oiling  globes,  flexible  steel  reciprocating 
parts,  steel  cross-heads,  etc. ;  also  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  six  inches 
in  diameter,  and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  1,100  revolutions  per  minute. 


158 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


NO.  3 


Patent  Unstrained  Scroll  Saw. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


159 


No.  3 

Patent  Unstrained  Scroll  Saw. 

This  is  our  smallest  size  unstrained  scroll  sawing  machine.  It  is  designed  for  general 
work  in  small  cabinet,  sash,  and  blind  shops,  and  to  meet  the  demand  for  a  low  priced, 
good  scroll  saw,  for  light  work. 

The  reciprocating  slide  is  made  hollow,  octagonal  in  shape,  and  consequently  is  very 
light.  The  pitman  is  connected  by  socket  joint  to  the  lower  end  of  slide,  and  the  lower 
end  of  the  saw  blade  rigidly  fastened  to  the  top  of  the  reciprocating  slide  by  means  of 
split  pins. 

The  upper  end  above  the  table  is  left  entire  /  disconnected,  but  in  order  to  guide  and 
support  it  during  the  operation  of  sawing,  it  is  made  to  run  between  hardened  steel  guides. 
These  are  formed  of  three  parts,  viz:  a  ba  k  plate  and  two  adjustable  side  plates,  for 
accommodating  different  thicknesses  of  saws,  attached  to  a  vertically  sliding  bar,  which  is 
raised  and  lowered  to  suit  the  thickness  of  the  material  being  sawed,  and  which  acts  to 
hold  down  and  prevent  flying  up  of  the  stuff  being  sawed.  The  guides  also  allow  of 
freely  turning  the  work  while  the  sawing  is  progressing,  a  clear,  open  space  being  left 
between  the  guard  and  the  table. 

It  is  furnished  with  wrought  pitman,  hard  metal  boxes  throughout,  steel  crank  shaft, 
and  iron  table.  Our  new  improved  top  guide,  in  which  the  saw  runs,  is  moved  vertically 
for  different  thicknesses  of  stuff  being  sawed,  and  is  adjustable  in  any  direction  to  keep  the 
saw  square  with  the  table  by  the  double  nuts  on  the  side  rods. 

The  machine  being  run  at  a  high  rate  of  speed,  the  work  is  performed  very  smoothly, 
requiring  but  little  finishing;  and  the  cost  for  repairs  is  next  to  nothing.  It  is  also  pro- 
vided with  a  noiseless  fan  blower  which  supplies  a  continuous  and  powerful  current  of  air 
to  the  work,  enabling  the  sawyer  to  work  to  his  lines ;  and  the  machine  may  be  belted 
up  through  the  floor  or  from  the  back  side.  Full  directions  for  setting  up  accompany 
each  machine. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  six  inches  in  diameter  and  three- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  1,200  revolutions  per  minute. 


160 


/.  A.  FAY  &  COrS  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  4 

Patent  Unstrained  Scroll  Saw. 


(radius  attachment  for  felloes.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


161 


No.  4 

Patent  Unstrained  Scroll  Saw. 

(with   radius   attachment   for  felloes.) 

This  is  a  very  heavy  and  substantial  machine,  especially  adapted  for  heavy  sawing, 
and  is  quite  extensively  used  in  chair,  plow,  wagon,  agricultural,  railroad  shops,  etc.  It 
fully  meets  the  want  for  a  good  scroll  saw  for  hard  wood  sawing,  that  will  perform  its 
work  without  disarrangement  or  breakage. 

The  machine  is  furnished  with  improved  patent  top  guide,  to  the  lower  end  of  which 
is  attached,  for  guiding -and  supporting  the  upper  disconnected  end  of  the  saw  while  in 
operation,  hardened  steel  guides,  consisting  of  three  parts,  viz.  :  a  back  plate  and  two  ad- 
justable side  plates,  for  accommodating  different  thicknesses  of  saws. 

This  guide  is  also  moved  vertically  for  different  thicknesses  of  stuff  being  sawed,  and 
serves  to  hold  the  work  to  the  table ;  it  is  also  adjustable  in  any  direction,  to  keep  the  saw 
square  with  the  table,  which  is  done  by  the  double  nuts  seen  on  the  rods  in  the  cut,  and 
also  allows  of  freely  turning  the  work  while  the  saw  is  progressing. 

The  reciprocating  slide  is  made  hollow,  octagonal  in  shape,  and  consequently  is  very 
light.  The  pitman  is  connected,  by  socket  joint,  to  the  lower  end  of  slide.  The  lower 
end  of  the  saw  blade  is  rigidly  fastened  to  the  top  of  the  reciprocating  slide  by  means  of 
split  pins. 

The  reciprocating  parts  are  self-lubricating,  and,  while  being  strong  and  lasting,  are 
light,  admitting  of  the  machine  being  run  at  high  speed. 

When  ordered,  we  furnish  a  felloe  sweep  attachment,  for  chair  back  and  felloe  sawing. 
This  is  made  so  as  to  saw  a  perfect  felloe,  both  inside  and  outside  circles. 

As  in  other  machines,  it  is  equipped  with  a  noiseless  fan  blower,  full  assortment  of 
saws  for  the  different  work  required,  and  directions  for  setting  up,  and  it  will  be  found 
complete  in  every  detail. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  three- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  900  revolutions  per  minute. 


162 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  5 

Patent  Unstrained  Scroll  Saw. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


163 


NO.  5 

Patent  Unstrained  Scroll  Saw. 

(with  patent  top  guide.) 

This  machine  is  one  of  the  most  successful  and  popular  scroll  sawing  machines  ever 
constructed,  and  has  been  awarded  medals  over  all  competitors  wherever  exhibited,  more 
than  one  thousand  being  in  use. 

It  is  very  heavy  and  substantial,  built  wholly  of  iron  and  steel,  and  is  intended  for 
use  in  sash  and  door,  chair,  furniture,  and  pattern  shops,  etc.,  where  its  simplicity  and 
great  efficiency  make  it  a  favorite. 

The  reciprocating  parts  are  very  light  and  self-lubricating,  so  that  the  machine  may  be 
run  at  a  high  rate  of  speed,  even  in  upper  stories,  where  they  operate  equally  as  well  as 
on  the  ground  floor. 

The  reciprocating  slide  is  made  hollow  and  octagonal  in  shape,  making  it  very  light 
and  strong.  The  pitman  is  connected  by  socket  joint  to  the  lower  end  of  the  slide.  The 
lower  end  of  the  saw  blade  is  rigidly  fastened  to  the  top  of  the  reciprocating  sHde  by 
means  of  split  pins. 

The  upper  end  of  saw  above  the  table  is  left  entirely  disconnected,  but  in  order  to 
guide  and  support  it  while  in  operation  it  is  made  to  run  between  hardened  steel  guides 
formed  in  three  parts,  viz.  :  a  back  plate  and  two  adjustable  side  plates  for  accommodating 
different  thicknesses  of  saws. 

This  is  connected  to  a  vertically  sliding  top  guide,  which  is  raised  and  lowered  to  suit 
the  thickness  of  material  being  sawed,  and  acts  as  a  hold-down  to  the  stuff  being  worked. 

The  guide  also  allows  of  freely  turning  the  work  while  the  saw  is  progressing,  a  clear 
open  space  being  left  between  the  guide  and  the  table,  and  is  also  adjustable  in  any  direc- 
tion to  keep  the  saw  square  with  the  table. 

This  is  accomplished  by  the  double  nuts  seen  on  the  rods.  The  saws  can  be  adjusted 
with  great  rapidity,  and  the  machine  is  very  easy  to  operate  and  keep  in  order. 

It  is  furnished  with  a  noiseless  fan  blower,  for  displacing  the  saw  dust,  enabling  the 
sawyer  to  work  his  lines,  six  assorted  saws,  and  is  ready  to  run  as  soon  as  received  and  the 
power  applied. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  six  inches  in  diameter 
and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  1,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


J.  A.  FAV  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No. 

Patent  Unstrained  Scroll  Saw. 

(with  patent  metal  top  guide.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


165 


No.  bV^ 
Patent  Unstrained  Scroll  Saw. 

(with  patent  metal  top  guide.) 

This  machine  is  about  the  same  in  size  and  capacity  as  the  No.  5  Patent  Scroll  Saw, 
illustrated  and  described  on  preceding  pages,  and  is  designed  for  similar  classes  of  work  in 
pattern,  furniture,  sash  and  door  shops,  etc. 

It  is  constructed  in  the  most  careful  and  thorough  manner,  and  is  considered  by  many 
as  the  best  scroll  saw  ever  made.  It  has  invariably  proven  itself  reliable  for  the  purposes 
for  which  it  is  intended,  and  is  a  favorite  with  practical  scroll  sawyers. 

The  top  is  made  of  iron  planed  perfectly  true.  It  has  our  new  style  patent  metal  top 
guide,  which  consists  of  a  brass  tube  adjustable  vertically  in  a  sleeve  for  different  thick- 
nesses of  stuff  being  worked,  the  sleeve  also  having  a  separate  adjustment  in  any  direction 
to  keep  the  saw  square  with  the  table  by  means  of  the  double  nuts  seen  on  the  rods  in 
the  engraving. 

Attached  to  the  lower  end  of  this  top  guide,  for  guiding  and  supporting  the  upper 
end  of  the  saw  while  in  operation,  is  a  hardened  steel  guide  formed  in  three  parts, 
viz  :  a  back  plate  for  receiving  the  thrust,  and  two  adjustable  side  plates  for  accommodating 
different  thicknesses  of  saws.  This  top  guide  allows  of  freely  turning  the  work  while  it  is 
being  sawed. 

The  reciprocating  slide  is  made  hollow,  octagonal  in  shape,  and  consequently  is  very 
light,  admitting  of  a  high  rate  of  speed  without  trembling.  The  pitman  is  connected  by 
socket  joint  to  the  lower  end  of  slide. 

The  lower  end  of  the  saw  blade  is  rigidly  fastened  to  the  top  of  the  reciprocating 
slide  by  means  of  split  pins.  The  amount  of  work  it  will  accomplish  is  truly  surprising, 
and  it  is  performed  with  great  smoothness,  requiring  little  or  no  finishing. 

The  saws  can  be  readily  changed,  and  the  machine  is  easily  kept  in  order  and  not 
liable  to  disarrangement,  requiring  a  very  small  expense  for  repairs.  Any  person  of 
ordinary  ability  can  learn  to  operate  them  in  less  than  one  hour's  time. 

It  is  furnished  with  the  noiseless  fan  blower,  twelve  saws  of  assorted  sizes,  full  direc- 
tions for  setting  up,  and  will  be  found  ready  to  operate  as  soon  as  placed  in  position  and 
adjusted. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  'six  inches  in  diameter 
and  three  inch  face,  and  should  make  1,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


166 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Band  Sawing  Machines. 

The  Band  Saw  has  become  an  indispensable  feature  in  the  various  branches  of  wood 
production,  and  its  economical  operation  is  so  generally  understood  that  an  argument  for 
its  adoption  or  a  history  of  its  introduction  would  be  superfluous;  yet  there  are  improve- 
ments and  changes  which  have  been  made  that  are  of  sufficient  importance  to  mention  here. 

The  original  Band  Saw  Machine  was  designed  only  for  cutting  curves  in  light  work, 
and  for  many  years  that  was  the  only  service  to  which  it  was  adapted ;  recently,  however, 
the  demands  of  the  lumber  trade  have  made  necessary  new  combinations,  and  we  have 
perfected  saws  and  machines  for  the  heaviest  class  of  work  where  the  sawing  of  the 
material  is  a  feature  of  sufficient  magnitude  to  make  an  object,  the  investment  and  care 
necessary  for  the  successful  operation  of  such  tools. 

These  saws  are  constantly  becoming  more  popular  as  the  various  improvements  make 
their  operation  more  profitable,  and  it  has  been  our  aim  in  the  varied  experience  derived 
from  the  experiments  produced  by  the  construction  of  new  machines  of  this  class  to 
adopt  the  methods  most  likely  to  produce  the  desired  result  with  the  least  cost. 

The  columns  of  the  band  saw  machines  for  scroll  work  are  cast  with  cored  sections,  in 
one  piece,  having  flanged  corners  on  the  larger  machines  to  insure  greater  stiffness,  so  that 
when  once  properly  adjusted  in  all  their  parts,  they  will  not  be  easily  disarranged. 

An  important  feature  in  our  Band  Sawing  Machines  is  the  arrangement  of  the  upper 
wheel  for  keeping  the  saw  blade  at  its  proper  tension,  allowing,  at  the  same  time,  for 
sufficient  flexibility  by  reciprocating  motion  to  compensate  sudden  strain  and  to  prevent 
breaking  the  saws  by  buckling  or  friction.  The  combination  to  accomplish  this  consists 
in  the  patent  elastic  steel  wheel,  which,  by  the  lightness  of  its  construction,  greatly  re- 
duces the  strain  on  the  saw  produced  by  starting  and  stopping  it,  and  the  patent  weighted 
lever  for  sustaining  the  upper  wheel  with  the  slide  boxes,  etc.,  giving  the  operator  a 
perfect  knowledge  of  the  amount  of  strain  upon  his  saw,  and  an  opportunity  of  controlling 
it  according  to  the  strength  of  the  blade  in  use ;  at  the  same  time  compensating  for  any 
change  in  the  length  of  the  saw  from  change  of  temperature  or  impact. 

The  patent  friction  guide  wheels,  to  receive  the  back  thrust  of  the  saw,  and  the 
adjustable  side  guides,  are  features  of  great  importance  in  the  operation  of  the  Scroll 
Sawing  Band  Saw,  and  reduces  the  friction  on  the  back  of  the  saw  to  a  nominal  quantity 
in  comparison  to  the  old  ruinous  method  of  running  the  back  of  the  saw  against  a  fixed  or 
solid  bearing. 

The  Re-sawing  Band  Saw  Machines  have,  in  connection  with  the  friction  wheels  and 
adjustable  side  guides,  an  entirely  new  principle  incorporated  to  prevent  the  saw  from 
running  and  buckling  in  wide  lumber,  by  allowing  the  saw  to  swing  free.  The  center  of 
its  motion  being  from  the  point  of  the  teeth,  keeps  the  saw  in  a  constant  line  parallel  with 
the  side  of  the  stuff  being  sawed. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


167 


These  guides  are  placed  on  a  column,  and  are  in  line  vertically,  with  no  danger  of 
displacement.  The  lower  wheels  of  the  smaller  machines  are  of  iron,  and  both  wheels 
of  the  re-sawing  machines  are  of  iron  or  have  cast-iron  arms  with  wooden  rims,  according 
to  the  size  and  character  of  the  work  to  be  done. 

The  shafts  are  of  steel,  and  run  in  patent  self-oiling  boxes  with  caps,  which  can  be 
adjusted  to  take  up  the  wear  in  the  parts.  The  vertical  guide  bar  is  provided  with  a 
retracting  spring  to  assist  in  raising  it. 

The  tables  have  an  adjustment  for  sawing  to  a  bevel. 

There  is  a  patent  shipper  and  a  frictional  brake  attached  to  the  machine  for  throwing 
the  belt  on  and  off  the  tight  pulley,  and  for  quickly  arresting  the  motion  of  the  saw. 
Also,  guards  to  prevent  contact  with  the  saw  while  in  operation. 

The  arrangement  for  guiding  the  saw  to  the  center  or  any  desirable  part  of  the  face  of 
the  band  wheels  is  very  simple  in  the  smaller  machines.  It  is  accomplished  by  throwing 
the  upper  wheel  more  or  less  out  of  a  perpendicular,  while  in  the  large  machines  the  same 
is  accomplished  by  turning  the  upper  wheel  on  a  plane  horizontal  to  its  center  of  revolu- 
tion.   This  can  be  done  while  the  machine  is  in  operation. 

For  the  economical  working  of  these  machines  the  best  saw  blades  should  be  used ; 
and  as  the  band  saw  blades  of  Messrs.  Perin,  Panhard  &  Co.,  of  France,  have  the  highest 
reputation  of  any  in  use,  we  recommend  them  without  fear  of  failure.  All  regular  sizes 
can  be  furnished  without  delay. 

The  patents  on  these  machines  owned  by  us  are  placed  on  the  machines  for  the  benefit 
of  ourselves  and  the  users  of  these  machines.  Any  infringement  of  the  same  will  be  duly 
noticed. 

The  construction,  character,  and  capacity  of  each  machine  will  be  found  in  detail  with 
the  subsequent  illustrative  descriptions.  They  are  made  in  seven  different  sizes  and  styles, 
adapted  from  the  lightest  to  the  very  heaviest  classes  of  work. 


168 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


NEW  ^^GEM" 
Patent  Band  Sawing  Machine. 

(with  lemman's  patent  rolling  guides.) 


169 


NEW  "GEM" 
Patent  Band  Sawing  Machine. 

(with  lemman's  patent  rolling  guides.) 

The  accompanying  engraving  represents  one  of  a  new  series  of  low-price  Band  Saw 
Machines  we  have  recently  perfected  and  brought  out,  designed  to  meet  not  only  this 
want,  but  all  the  requirements  of  ordinary  scroll  and  curve  cutting,  among  the  many 
thousands  of  wood-workers  all  over  the  land.  It  is  so  complete  in  its  adaptation  to  the 
general  wants  that  we  have  designated  it  the  "  Gem  "  Band  Saw  Machine. 

A  want  has  long  been  felt  for  a  machine  of  this  kind,  which,  while  possessing  the 
advantages  of  the  larger  and  more  costly  machines,  would  be  so  economical  in  price  as  to 
place  it  within  the  reach  of  all. 

It  is  cast  in  one  solid  frame.  Both  wheels  have  flexible  coverings  and  are  arranged  to 
be  adjusted  readily  with  each  other.  The  upper  wheel  has  a  vertical  adjustment  of  eight 
inches,  controlled  by  a  hand  wheel  and  screw,  and  a  novel  arrangement  for  securing  the 
proper  support  and  adjustments.  It  will  saw  to  the  center  of  sixty-six  inches,  and  to  a 
depth  of  ten  inches. 

The  vertical  guide  bar  is  fitted  with  Lemman's  patent  rolHng  guides,  consisting  of  a 
hardened  steel  roller  for  receiving  the  back  thrust  of  the  saw  in  combination  with  lateral 
supporting  side  guides,  which  invention  almost  entirely  overcomes  the  breakage  of  saws. 

The  patent  rolling  guides,  with  the  lateral  supporting  side  guides,  are  valuable 
features,  without  which  no  Band  Saw  Machine  is  complete  or  can  work  as  well.  They 
have  been  supplied  to  many  Band  Saws  of  other  makers  in  place  of  the  worthless  guides 
sent  out  with  their  machines,  the  purchasers  invariably  reporting  that  by  the  use  of 
these  guides  they  have  been  enabled  to  reduce  the  breakage  of  band  saw  blades  more 
than  fifty  per  cent. 

These  improvements  are  covered  by  letters  patent,  and  are  found  only  on  the  J.  A. 
Fay  &  Co.  Band  Saw  Machines.  They  will  be  found  complete  and  perfect  in  every 
respect.  The  price  includes  one  saw.  Scarfing  frame,  tongs,  and  clamps  are  furnished 
at  a  small  cost,  when  wanted. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  three-inch  face,  and 
should  make  375  revolutions  per  minute. 


170 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


171 


No.  0  AND  No.  1 

Patent  Band  Sawing  Machines. 

The  band  sawing  machines  represented  on  the  opposite  page  embody  most  of  the 
recent  improvements  perfected  by  us;  and  for  all  ordinary  scroll  and  curve  cutting  in 
furniture,  sash  and  door,  wheel,  plow,  and  other  shops,  will  be  found  very  advantageous 
and  labor  saving. 

The  No.  0  is  a  smaller  machine  than  the  No.  1,  but  the  general  plan  of  construction  is 
the  same,  with  the  exception  that  the  wheels  are  made  of  iron,  combining  lightness  with 
strength.  The  upper  wheel  has  a  vertical  adjustment  of  eight  inches,  the  table  is  made 
of  ash  and  black  walnut  glued  together  to  prevent  warping;  and  when  desired  it  can  be 
arranged  for  bevel  sawing. 

The  No.  1  machine  has  the  patent  elastic  steel  wheel,  with  a  vertical  movement  of 
eight  inches,  controlled  by  hand  wheel  and  screw,  which,  from  the  lightness  of  its  con- 
struction, greatly  reduces  the  strain  upon  the  saw  consequent  upon  starting  and  stopping. 

The  vertical  guide  bar,  which  receives  the  pressure  of  the  work,  is  provided  with  an 
anti-friction  roller  of  hardened  steel.  This  receives  the  back  thrust  of  the  saw  in  revolving, 
and  relieves  the  back  of  the  saw  of  all  friction,  which,  in  machines  not  provided  with  this 
device,  is  a  fruitful  source  of  the  breakage  of  saws. 

A  roller  of  similar  character  is  placed  below  the  table,  each  of  which  has  attached 
wooden  guides  for  directing  the  saw  on  the  sides.  The  table  is  planed  perfectly  true,  and 
can  be  tipped  to  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees  for  bevel  sawing. 

The  weighted  lever  which  supports  the  upper  wheel  and  creates  the  necessary  tension 
of  the  saw,  in  combination  with  the  rubber  coverings  of  the  wheels,  furnishes  a  most 
complete  compensating  arrangement  for  any  changes  in  the  length  of  the  saw  by  heat  or 
sudden  jars  against  some  harder  portion  of  the  wood  or  greater  pressure  of  the  operator. 

The  lower  wheel  is  of  cast-iron,  secured  to  its  shaft  by  a  large  nut,  and  has  all  needed 
adjustments  for  any  wear  in  its  parts.  It  has  the  patent  shipper  for  the  belt,  and  the  fric- 
tional  break  for  quickly  arresting  the  motion  of  the  saw.  There  are  proper  guards  to 
prevent  striking  the  saw  while  in  operation,  and  all  parts  for  adjustment  are  convenient  to 
the  operator.  These  machines  being  lighter  in  weight  than  the  other  sizes,  are  desirable 
ones  for  shipment  to  long  distances. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  No,  0  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  three- 
inch  face,  on  the  No.  1  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make 
375  revolutions  per  minute. 


172 


J.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  2 

Patent  Band  Sawing  Machine. 


(with  patent  elastic  steel  wheel.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


173 


No.  2 

Patent  Band  Sawing  Machine. 

(with  elastic  steel  wheel.) 

This  is  a  heavier  machine  than  the  No.  1,  and  embodies  all  our  labor-saving  features 
and  improvements  for  general  band  sawing  in  furniture,  wagon,  sash  and  door,  agricul- 
tural shops,  etc.,  and  is  strongly  recommended  for  all  classes  of  work.  All  the  improve- 
ments that  experience  and  skill  could  suggest  have  been  incorporated  to  increase  its 
capacity. 

The  column  of  the  machine  is  cast  in  one  piece  with  flanges  upon  the  corners,  giving 
great  strength,  and  preventing  vibration  when  in  operation,  and  insuring  a  certainty,  that 
when  once  properly  adjusted  in  position  it  will  remain  so. 

It  has  the  patent  elastic  steel  wheel  on  the  upper  shaft,  which,  from  the  lightness  of 
its  construction,  greatly  reduces  the  strain  on  the  saw  consequent  upon  starting  or  stopping. 

The  lower  wheel  is  of  cast  iron,  combining  in  its  design  lightness  with  great  strength. 
The  shafts  are  of  the  very  best  cast  steel,  run  in  patent  self-oiling  boxes,  with  necessary 
adjustments  to  take  up  the  wear. 

The  patent  weighting  attachment  gives  a  positiveness  to  the  amount  of  tension  the 
saw  is  receiving,  at  the  same  time  compensating  for  any  variation  in  the  length  of  the  saw 
by  a  change  in  temperature  or  strain. 

A  very  important  feature  is  the  manner  of  retaining  the  saw  at  its  proper  tension, 
allowing  at  the  same  time  some  flexibility  of  the  parts  to  compensate  for  any  sudden  im- 
pact, and  to  prevent  breakage  of  the  saw  by  buckling  or  friction  on  the  back  or  side. 

The  patent  rolling  guides  to  receive  the  back  thrust  of  the  saw  with  lateral  supporting 
side  guides  are  features  without  which  no  machine  can  be  successfully  operated. 

The  vertical  guide  bar  is  provided  with  a  retracting  spring  for  instantly  adjusting  it  to 
the  desired  width,  and  planed  iron  table  pivoted  for  bevel  sawing.  The  upper  wheel  has 
an  arrangement  for  guiding  the  saw  to  the  center  or  any  desirable  part  of  the  face  to  ac- 
commodate different  widths  of  saws.  Both  the  wheels  are  covered  with  heavy  rubber 
ground  true. 

The  patent  shipper  and  brake  for  quickly  arresting  the  motion  of  the  machine  is  at- 
tached to  the  frame  with  the  shipper  handles,  convenient  to  the  operator.  Each  machine 
is  supplied  with  one  Perin  saw  blade,  brazing  tools,  wrenches,  tongs,  etc. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and 
should  make  375  revolutions  per  minute. 


174  /  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  3 

Patent  Band  Sawing  Machine. 

(with  patent  elastic  steel  wheel.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


175 


No.  3 

Patent  Band  Sawing  Machine. 

(with  patent  elastic  steel  wheel.)  / 

This  is  our  largest  band  saw  machine  for  curved  work.  It  is  intended  for  the  heavier 
work  of  agricultural  and  car  shops,  navy  yards,  etc.,  and  embodies  all  the  recent  improve- 
ments perfected  by  us,  making  it  a  superior  machine  for  any  work  it  may  be  required 
to  perform. 

It  is  very  heavy  and  strong,  the  column  is  cast  with  cored  sections  in  one  piece 
having  flanged  corners  to  insure  greater  stiffness,  so  that  when  once  properly  adjusted  is 
not  easily  disarranged,  and  is  fully  capable  of  doing  any  work  within  its  capacity,  our  aim 
having  been  to  introduce  features  that  would  overcome  the  breakage  of  blades,  increase 
the  production,  enlarge  the  capacity,  and  lessen  the  cost  of  machines — how  well  we  have 
succeeded  we  leave  for  the  intelligent  public  to  determine. 

It  is  provided  with  all  the  recent  improvements,  viz.  : 

The  patent  elastic  steel  wheel  on  the  upper  shaft. 

The  patent  weighted  compensating  lever  to  give  the  saw  proper  tension. 
The  patent  shipper  and  brake  attachments  for  arresting  the  motion. 
The  swinging  table  for  sawing  to  a  bevel  of  thirty  degrees. 

The  patent  anti-friction  rollers  and  guides  for  receiving  the  back  thrust  of  the  saw 
above  the  work  and  below  the  table. 

The  retracting  spring  for  the  vertical  adjustment  of  the  guide  bar. 
The  roller  for  guiding  the  saw  to  the  top  wheel. 

The  canting  arrangement,  for  the  upper  wheel,  for  adjusting  to  different  widths  of 
saws  and  for  directing  their  course  on  the  wheels,  more  or  less  from  a  vertical  line,  as  the 
saw  may  need. 

The  wheels  of  this  machine  are  very  large  in  diameter,  and  covered  with  rubber 
ground  perfectly  true.  The  guide  bar  can  be  raised  to  take  in  lumber  thirteen  inches 
thick,  and  the  full  width  of  space  between  the  blade  of  the  saw  and  the  column  can  be 
utilized  for  sawing  short  curves  or  wide  lumber. 

These  improvements  and  attachments  are  indispensable  for  the  perfect  working  of  a 
band  saw.  They  are  secured  by  letters  patent,  and  found  only  on  the  J.  A.  Fay  &  Co. 
band  sawing  machines,  a  more  extended  description  of  which  has  been  previously  given  on 
pages  164  and  165. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and 
should  make  350  revolutions  per  minute. 


176  J.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


177 


No.  4 

Band  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

The  accompanying  illustration  is  a  correct  representation  of  our  No.  4  Band  Saw  with 
power  feeding  mechanism,  intended  for  light  re-sawing,  such  as  panel  and  box  work,  also 
for  curve  sawing.  The  column  is  from  our  largest  pattern,  and  is  designed  to  take  on  saws 
to  two  inches  in  width. 

The  wheels  are  both  of  cast  iron,  and  of  large  diameter ;  their  surfaces  are  covered 
with  rubber  to  give  elasticity  under  the  contact  of  the  saw  blade.  The  upper  wheel  is 
arranged  to  raise  and  lower  for  variations  in  lengths  of  blades,  and  has  the  weighted  lever 
attachment  for  compensating  for  changes  in  lengths  from  various  causes. 

It  has  the  patent  brake  and  shipper,  and  the  idler  roller  for  guiding  the  blades  on 
the  upper  wheel.  The  upper  wheel  has  the  adjustment  for  retaining  the  saw  in  its  proper 
course  over  the  pulleys. 

The  vertical  guide  bar  is  provided  with  the  retracting  spring  for  counterbalancing  its 
weight,  and  an  additional  arrangement  for  raising  the  guide  out  of  the  range  of  all  work 
that  will  pass  under  the  raising  hand  wheel.  The  patent  friction  roller  guides  arranged  to 
guide  from  the  teeth  can  be  applied  to  this  machine  when  desired. 

The  feed  works  for  re-sawing  are  mounted  on  a  table,  and  consist  of  two  feed  rollers 
strongly  geared  and  provided  with  changes  of  feed.  There  is  also  a  graduated  friction 
face  plate,  which  is  controlled  by  a  lever,  the  guide  plate  is  adjustable  by  a  hand  wheel  for 
the  thickness  to  be  cut,  and  the  feeding  rollers  are  adjustable  to  and  from  the  guide  plate. 

For  ordinary  curved  band  sawing  a  separate  table  can  be  supplied  at  small  cost.  The 
table  on  whichthe  feed  works  are  mounted  is  arranged  to  swing  for  bevel  sawing,  and  it 
can  be  removed  and  the  regular  table  applied  in  five  minutes  without  the  removal  of  a 
single  screw. 

This  machine  will  re-saw  to  fourteen  inches  in  width,  and  for  establishments  requiring 
an  amount  of  work  equal  to  its  capacity  it  will  be  found  a  valuable  addition. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and 
should  make  350  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


179 


Large  Patent  Band  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

For  re-sawing  lumber  into  panel  boards,  or  reducing  deals  to  lumber,  we  have 
designed  and  constructed  the  band  re-sawing  machine  illustrated  on  the  opposite  page. 
This  machine  is  one  of  the  heaviest  of  its  class,  and  will  saw  through  thirty  inches 
wide,  and  in  the  center  of  eighteen  inches,  or  down  to  the  very  thinnest  material  that 
admits  of  re-splitting.  The  thickness  of  the  saw  blade,  with  the  necessary  set  to  the 
teeth,  does  not  exceed  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch,  consequently  a  great  saving  of  mate- 
rial is  accomplished.  The  machine  is  adapted  to  re-saw  either  hard  or  soft  wood,  and  in 
its  construction  arrangements  have  been  made  for  such  changes  as  may  be  necessary  to 
accomplish  it  in  the  very  best  manner.  The  saw  kerf  being  only  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch 
thick,  a  saving  of  twenty  per  cent  in  lumber  is  effected,  shown  by  the  fact  that  by  the  use 
of  our  machine,  two  ^  inch  panels,  planed  on  both  sides,  can  be  produced  from  one- 
inch  lumber,  whereas  by  other  methods  1^  inch  lumber  is  required. 

The  wheels  are  five  feet  in  diameter  and  will  take  on  saws  to  four  inches  in  width. 
They  are  placed  as  close  together  as  possible  to  use  a  short  saw,  and  bring  the  guide 
supports  as  near  each  other  as  will  permit  the  desired  size  of  stick  to  pass  between  the  saw 
pulleys,  thus  leaving  but  little  of  the  saw  blade  unsupported  or  subject  to  unnecessary 
vibration. 

The  wheels  are  made  with  iron  centers  and  wooden  rims,  covered  with  rubber  or 
leather,  and  are  placed  upon  heavy  journals  running  in  long,  self-oiling  bearings.  The 
upper  wheel  is  adjustable  vertically  for  different  lengths  of  saws,  and  can  be  turned  on  an 
angle  to  the  lower  wheel  to  direct  the  saw  to  any  desirable  part  of  the  face  of  the  wheels. 

The  feeding  rollers  are  connected  by  gearing,  all  four  rollers  being  driven.  The 
gearing  is  driven  by  a  face  friction  at  the  end  of  the  machine,  the  friction  plate  being 
driven  by  a  small  friction  wheel  which  has  two  changes  of  feed.  The  feed  is  graduated 
by  means  of  these  two  changes,  and  passing  the  small  friction  wheel  over  the  friction  plate, 
giving  speeds  from  five  to  twenty-five  feet  per  minute.  The  feeding  arrangement  is  gov- 
erned by  a  lever  by  which  the  feeding  is  started  gradually  or  stopped. 

Both  pairs  of  rollers  are  adjusted  by  screws  and  hand  wheel,  the  pressure  rollers 
receiving  their  force  from  a  heavily  weighted  lever  attached  to  their  moving  screw,  the 
pressure  between  the  rollers  being  sufficient  to  retain  the  boards  straight  as  they  pass 
through. 

The  saw  is  guided  by  our  patent  friction  roller  guides,  the  roller  supporting  the  back 
of  the  saw,  the  sides  being  supported  by  adjustable  wooden  side  guides,  with  an  arrange- 
ment by  which  the  saw  is  directed  from  the  teeth.  The  guides  are  gibbed  to  a  post,  the 
upper  one  being  adjustable  for  different  widths  of  lumber,  and  is  raised  and  lowered  by  a 
lever.    Both  guides  can  be  removed  to  allow  the  saw  to  be  taken  off. 

The  saw  is  strained  by  a  combination  of  levers,  the  weight  being  close  to  the  floor, 
and  causes  no  vibration  to  its  movements.  The  strain  of  the  saw  is  evenly  distributed  on 
the  bearings  by  an  outside  bearing,  which  has  flexibility  in  its  adjustment  to  compensate 
for  any  movement  of  the  weighted  lever. 

Outside  connection,  one  saw  blade  and  full  set  of  wrenches,  foundation  plan,  and 
directions  for  setting  up  accompany  each  machine. 

Tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  thirty  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and  should 
make  300  revolutions  per  minute. 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


181 


Patent  Band  Saw  Mill. 

(for  logs.) 

This  machine  is  designed  for  sawing  lumber  directly  from  the  log,  and  is  furnished 
with  all  the  attachments  of  an  ordinary  log  saw  mill,  having  a  carriage,  tracks,  head  blocks, 
etc.,  complete,  and  is  intended  for  economical  production  of  expensive  lumber  by  the 
saving  in  the  saw  kerf,  and  the  smoothness  of  the  product  in  wide  lumber. 

The  wheels  over  which  the  band  saw  moves  are  constructed  with  an  iron  center  and 
wooden  rim.  They  are  placed  on  heavy  shafts  supported  on  iron  columns,  the  whole 
machine  set  upon  a  foundation  of  brick  or  stone  work. 

The  lower  wheel  is  driven,  the  shaft  having  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  it.  The 
upper  shaft  with  the  upper  wheel  is  adjustable  vertically  for  different  lengths  of  saws, 
and  has  a  compensating  device  for  retaining  the  saw  at  the  proper  tension  and  to  prevent 
its  variation  from  any  course. 

The  upper  wheel  can  also  be  turned  to  an  angle  with  the  lower  wheel  by  a  lever 
operating  a  cam,  which  movement  directs  the  saw  to  any  desired  point  on  the  face  of 
the  wheel.  The  upper  wheel  is  raised  and  lowered  by  a  screw  having  sufficient  movement 
to  allow  a  variation  of  two  feet  in  the  length  of  the  saws. 

The  patent  saw  guides  are  automatic  in  their  action  of  directing  the  saw,  being 

hung  to  swing  from  the  points  of  the  teeth  of  the  saw,  any  tendency  of  the  saw  to  run 

from  a  straight  line  being  immediately  counteracted  by  the  movement  of  the  guides. 
The  guides  have  our  patent  friction  rollers  and  adjustable  wooden  side  guides. 

The  lower  guide  is  fixed  in  its  position.  The  upper  guide  is  adjustable  vertically  to 
take  in  logs  to  forty-two  inches  in  diameter.  The  upper  guide  is  operated  by  a  lever  and 
counterbalanced. 

The  feeding  works  of  the  log  carriage  are  operated  by  a  lever,  by  which  the  feeding 
is  started,  reversed,  or  stopped.  The  speed  is  graduated  by  a  face  plate,  also  operated  by 
a  lever.  The  movement  of  the  carriage  is  changed  by  the  lever  in  its  forward  movement 
from  five  feet  to  twenty-five  feet  per  minute. 

The  log  carriage  is  run  upon  friction  rollers,  and  is  furnished  with  the  most  approved 
head  blocks,  which  adjusts  the  log  to  any  desired  thickness  with  the  greatest  accuracy. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  thirty  inches  in  diameter  and  eight  and  one-half-inch 
face,  and  should  make  300  revolutions  per  minute. 


182 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


"Know  all  Men  by  these  Presents:  That  we,  Perm,  Panhard  &■  Co.,  of  Paris,  PVa/ice,  have  this  day 
withdraTvn  the  agency  for  the  sale  of  our  band  saw  blades  from  Messrs.  Richards,  London  ^  Kelley,  and  Messrs.  London, 
Orton  Berry,  successors  to  Messrs.  Richards,  Loudon  6^  Kelley,  of  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  and  appoint  Messrs.  J.  A.  FA  Y 
(Sr"  CO.,  of  Cincinnati,  Ohio,  U.  S.  A.,  to  be  our  sole  2ind  exclusive  agents  for  the  entire  States  and  Territories,  with  full 
power  to  prosecute  all  infringements  and  illegal  abuse  of  our  trade  mark. ' ' 

Made  in  Paris,  France,  Jan.  i,  1878.  PER  IN,  PANHARD  CO., 

Witness  :  W.   TARAZIN.  Successors  to  PER  IN  CO. 

In  order  to  supply  our  machines  and  customers  with  the  very  best  blades  that  can  be 
found,  we  have  entered  into  a  contract  with  Messrs.  Perin,  Panhard  &  Co.,  of  Paris, 
France,  for  the  sole  and  exclusive  agency  of  the  United  States  and  Territories,  of  their 
celebrated  band  saw  blades,  with  full  power  to  prosecute  all  infringements  and  illegal  use 
or  abuse  of  the  trade  mark,  which  we  shall  be  prompt  to  do,  as  the  genuine  "  Perin  "  saw 
blades  can  only  be  procured  from  us  or  our  authorized  agents. 

The  chief  requisites  of  band  saw  blades  are  uniformity  of  temper,  width,  and  thickness, 
a  perfect  joint,  and  freedom  from  all  flaws.    They  are  liable  to  break  from  crystallization, 
imperfect  tension,  or  carelessness  of  the  operator  in  handling ;  and  as  a  certain  degree  of 
temper  is  required  for  springs  made  of  fine  steel,  so  is  the  same  temper  necessary  in 
band  saw  blades  to  insure  durability  and  efficiency. 

Band  saw  blades  not  having  uniformity  of  temper,  width,  and  thickness,  perfect 
joints,  and  free  from  flaws,  are  expensive  at  any  cost,  while  a  perfect  saw  is  sure  to 
satisfy  both  purchaser  and  user  in  the  amount  of  work  it  performs  and  smoothness  of  its 
movement. 

The  appearance  of  a  band  saw  blade  does  not  indicate  its  temper,  and  it  is  difficult  to 
distinguish  tempered  from  untempered  saws.  A  soft  saw  is  comparatively  worthless,  as  it 
will  not  retain  its  cutting  edge.  The  best  and  surest  test  is  to  bend  the  blade,  and  see  if 
its  elasticity  indicates  temper. 

The  blades  manufactured  by  Messrs.  Perin,  Panhard  &  Co.,  of  Paris,  France,  are  not 
injured  by  this  test,  but  have  invariably  proved  to  be  the  most  perfect  and  durable, 
outlasting  three  or  four  ordinary  blades. 

We  shall  carry  a  large  variety  of  sizes  in  stock,  and  orders  will  be  filled  in  turn. 
Frequent  importations  will  be  made,  and  special  orders  for  blades  of  any  other  size  or 
length  than  those  quoted  in  our  list  can  be  furnished  in  lots  of  not  less  than  one  dozen 
each  size,  in  about  forty  days  from  receipt  of  such  order,  this  being  the  quickest  time 
possible  to  deliver  them.    Large  saws  for  re-sawing  purposes  will  require  a  longer  time. 

Our  list  will  be  found  to  comprise  those  which  are  joined,  set,  and  filed,  and  those 
which  are  not.  Persons  requiring  any  special  form  of  tooth  will  need  to  send  diagram, 
and  also  state  thickness,  or  gauge. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


183 


Perin  French  Band  Saw  Blades. 


The  accompanying  price-list  embraces  both  finished  and  unfinished  saws.  The  former 
are  joined,  set,  and  filed,  ready  for  use.  The  latter  are  ground  and  toothed,  but  not 
joined,  filed,  or  set.  The  prices,  it  will  be  seen,  are  but  little  more  than  is  asked  for  the 
common  band  saw  blades.  The  finished  saws  are  joined,  set,  and  filed  in  Paris  in  so 
perfect  a  manner  that  it  is  difficult  to  detect  the  joint.  One  side  of  the  blades  will  bear 
the  trade  mark,  Perin  &  Co.,  and  the  other  J.  A.  Fay  &  Co.,  which  will  be  the  only 
sure  guarantee  that  they  are  genuine. 


Price  List. 


Width, 


Price,  . 
Width, 


Perin "  iSaws,  Joined,  Set,  and  Filed,  17  Feet  L.ong. 

♦  •  >  >^  J  _Tt_  L  ^  „  I  _      \   %    \   %  L 

15 


/4 

3  15 


Perin 


.  3  15  I  3  15  I  3  15  I  3  15  I  3  50  I  3  85  |  4  20 
Sawis,  Joined,  Set,  ami  Filed,  17  Feet  6  inches  L.ong-. 


4  65 


Price,  . 
Width, 


.  ...  3  30  I  3  30  I  3  30  j  3  30  I  3  65  I  4  05  I  4  40 
"  Perin "  Saws,  Joined,  Set,  and  Filed,  18  Feet  L<ong. 

.  .  •  •    >^    I    A    IX    I    H    IK    \    %    \  H 


4  90 


Price, 


Width, 


...  3  30  I  3  30  I  3  30  I  3  30  I  3  65  I  4  05  I  4  40 
Perin "  Saws,  Joined,  Set,  and  Filed,  20  Feet  liOn^. 

'A    \    H    \    'A    \    H    \    H    \    Vs    \    1     I  IX 


4  90  I 


Price 


Width, 


3  75  I 


3  75  I 
"  Perin 

X  I 


Price, 


Width, 


3  75   I   4  20   I   4  60   I   5  00   |  5  55   |  5  95   |   7  20 
Saws,  Joined,  Set,  and  Filed,  22  Feet  lions'. 

H  \       \  ys   I  X  I  ^   I   1  I  IX 

4  95  I  5  40  I  6  00  I  6  45  I  7  80 
and  Filed,  23  Feet  6  inches  I^ong-. 

_y  L„X_  \_Ji_  I    1    I  IX 


^  20 
IX 


..  4  05  I  4  05  I  4  50  I 
**  Perin  "  Saws,  Joined,  Set 

•  •    X    I    Xs    I    X  I 


_   

Price,   4  35  I   4  35   I   4  85    I   5  35   I   5  80   I   6  45   I   6  95   I   8  40 

"  Perin "  Band  Re-Saw  Blades,  Joined,  Set,  and  Filed  ready  for  use 

Width  of  Blade,   2)4      |  3 


8  85 


9  50 
3X 


Price  per  foot  for  No.  18  gauge  thick  and  under, 


80c 


95c 


1  10  I 


Width, 


"17  "  "   .  I     1  20 

Unfinished  Perin  Saws. 

Oround  and  Toothed,  not  Joined,  Set,  or  Filed,  18  Feet  Lon^. 

  X    I    A    I    X    I    H  IX    I    X    I  X 


1  40 


Price,  . 
Width, 


Perin 


1  90  I  1  90  I  1  90  I  1  90  I  2  25  |  2  60  |  3  00 
Saws,  not  Joined,  Set,  or  Filed,  20  Feet  lions'. 

X    I    t\    I    X    I    Xs    I    X    I    X    I  X 


3  50 


Price, 
Width, 


....  2  10  I 
'*  Perin  ' '  Saws, 

  X 


2  10  I  2  10  I  2  10  I  2 
not  Joined,  Set,  or  Filed, 

I    Xs    I    X    I    X  I 


50  I  2  90  I  3  35 
22  Feet  liong. 

X    I    X    I  1 


3  90 


Price,   2  25    I   2  25   I   2  70   I   3  15    I   3  60    I   4  20   I  4  65   I   6  00 

Perin      Band  Re-Saw  Blades,  not  Joined,  Set,  or  Filed. 

Width  of  Blade,   .   .      .   2)4    \      3     |  S}4 

Foo 


65c 


85c 


Price  per  foot  for  No.  18  gauge  thick  and  under,  ,  

Saws  of  other  widths  and  lengths  not  included  in  the  above  lists  will  be  imported  to  order,  and 
given  on  application. 


--JX 

7  00 

4  in. 

T  25 

prices 


184 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


J,  A.  Fay  &  Oo/s  Band  Saw  Setting  and  Filing  Machine. 

The  above  ingenious  device  supplies  a  want  which  has  long  been  felt  for  a  machine 
that  would  set  band  saws  with  rapidity  and  accuracy,  and  is  the  only  one  which  will  suc- 
cessfully perform  the  work. 

It  is  strong  and  durable,  will  work  any  length  saws,  can  be  quickly  changed  to  set  fine 
or  coarse  teeth,  and  to  give  more  or  less  set,  as  required.  It  will  set  an  ordinary  band 
saw  blade  in  three  minutes,  more  accurately  than  can  be  done  by  hand  in  one  hour. 

This  little  machine  will  save  its  cost  in  a  short  time,  as  the  superior  manner  in  which 
it  performs  the  work  prevents  considerable  breakage  of  saws.  It  will  be  found  indispen- 
sable in  a  shop  where  band  sawing  machines  are  used,  and  we  offer  it  to  the  public  in  the 
confident  belief  that  its  merit  can  not  fail  to  be  appreciated. 

Directions  for  Operating  the  Machine. 

The  saw  being  placed  upon  the  wheels,  set  them  far  enough  apart  to  straighten  the 
saw.  Put  the  saw  between  the  jaws  of  the  Setting  Machine,  and  loosen  the  set  screws  so 
as  to  allow  the  dies  to  slip  back  out  of  the  way. 

Adjust  the  feed  pawl  so  it  will  feed  two  teeth,  and  feed  on  one  of  the  teeth  being  set. 
Turn  the  hand-wheel  until  the  cam  is  at  its  extreme  throw  and  the  jaws  as  close  together 
as  they  will  go,  then  push  in  the  wedges  shown  in  the  cut  as  hard  as  can  be  done  with  the 
hand,  which  will  pinch  the  saws  hard  enough  in  most  cases. 

Set  the  dies  on  the  points  of  the  teeth,  and  adjust  them  with  the  set  screws  on  top. 
Keep  the  saw  down  between  the  jaws  as  low  as  possible.  This  will  set  the  points  of  the 
teeth  over  without  bending  them  at  the  roots,  preventing  the  warping  of  the  saw,  which  is 
liable  to  occur  when  setting  saws  by  hand.  Keep  the  lower  ends  of  the  cam  levers  well 
oiled. 

Special  Round  Corner  Band  Saw  Files. 
These  files  are  prepared  with  special  round  corners  to  avoid  leaving  a  sharp  angle  be- 
tween the  teeth,  which  is  a  serious  cause  of  breakage. 

Prices  and  Sizes  per  Dozen. 

4)4  inch.  5  inch.  6  inch.  7  inch. 

;^2.50  ^2.75  ;^3.00  ;^3.50 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


185 


Standard  Shape  and  Gauges  of  Circular  Saws. 

The  above  diagram  illustrates  and  numbers  not  only  the  standard  styles  of  saw  teeth 
for  rip  and  cross-cut  saws,  but  gives  the  standard  gauge,  showing  the  thickness. 


Gauge  No.  4  is      inch  scant. 
No.  5  is  I, 
"    No.  6  is  I,  full. 
No.  7  is  scant. 
No.  8  is 


Gauge  No.    9  is    inch  scant. 


No.  10  is  y 
No.  11  is  y 
No.  12  is  3' 
No.  16  is  I 


full. 

scant. 

full. 


In  ordering  circular  saws,  be  careful  to  follow  the  above  diagram,  giving  the  size, 
gauge,  number,  and  shape  of  teeth,  if  you  have  any  preference,  size  of  arbor  hole,  and 
whether  for  rip  or  cross-cutting. 


Diam.  of      Rev.  per 
Saw.  minute. 

8  inches.  4500 

10      "  3600 

12  3000 

14  2585 


Diam.  of 
Saw. 


Rev.  per 
minute. 


16  inches.  2250 

18  2000 

20  1800 

22  1636 


Diam.  of  Rev.  per 
Saw.  minute. 


24  inches. 

26 
28 
30 


1500 
1384 
1285 
1200 


Diam  of         Rev.  per 
Saw.  minute. 

1125 
1058 
1000 
950 


32  inches. 
34 
36 
38 


We  carry  in  stock  a  full  assortment  of  both  fret  and  taper 
webs,  of  the  following  sizes:  from  thirteen  to  seventeen  gauge  in 
thickness. 


Fay  &  Co.'s  Patent  Scroll  Saws. 

8  inch  $  

10    -  $  

12    -  $  

14  %  


Fay  &  Co.'.s  Pate.xt  Fret  Saws. 


^xl2^- 
^xl2  ^- 


^xl2  ^- 


5^x14^- 
^xl4  ^- 
^xl4  $- 


Over  three-fourths  inch  wide,  extra  price 


186  /.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Self-Oiling  Saw  Arbors. 


(with  expanding  device,) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


187 


Patent  Self-Oiling  Saw  Arbors. 

The  accompanying  engraving  is  a  correct  illustration  of  our  patent  saw  arbors,  con- 
structed from  new  patterns,  and  of  an  improved  form.  The  bearings  are  cast  on  a  solid 
bed,  connecting  the  two  together  in  such  a  manner  as  to  render  it  impossible  for  them  to 
o-et  out  of  line. 

o 

They  are  self-oiling,  having  a  chamber  at  each  end  connected  by  a  recess  extending 
diagonally  through  the  lining  of  the  box,  in  which  is  placed  felt  or  cotton  wicking,  through 
which  the  oil  is  conducted  to  the  journal,  whence  it  works  back  to  the  chamber,  thus 
keeping  up  a  constant  circulation  of  oil,  so  that  its  lubricating  properties  are  fully  em- 
ployed. These  patent  self-oiling  bearings  effect  a  saving  of  at  least  fifty  per  cent  in  oil 
and  labor. 

The  arbors  are  made  of  best  refined  cast  steel,  and  the  pulleys  arranged  so  as  to  take 
up  the  wear,  and  prevent  any  end  motion.  These  arbors  are  also  furnished  with  an  ex- 
panding device,  operated  by  means  of  a  screw  at  the  end,  enabling  the  operator  to  use 
saws  with  different  size  holes,  without  the  necessity  of  bushing  them,  and  are  also  pro- 
vided with  safety  device  for  locking  the  arbor,  to  prevent  its  turning  while  attaching  or  re- 
moving the  saw,  by  simply  turning  a  pin  lever. 

When  desired  for  combined  sawing  and  boring,  we  arrange  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  with  a 
boring  head  on  opposite  end  of  arbor,  as  shown  in  cut.  Our  expansion  groover  heads, 
illustrated  on  page  131,  this  book,  can  be  used  on  any  of  the  arbors. 

They  are  made  of  six  different  sizes,  with  the  pulley  at  the  end  or  between  the 
bearings,  as  customers  may  prefer,  and  furnished  with  one  steel  and  one  wrought  iron 
wrench. 

Dimensions  and  Prices. 


NO. 

Extreme  Length 
from  out  to  out  of 
Journals. 

Diameter  of 
Pulleys. 

Face 
of  Pulleys. 

Diameter  of 
Collars. 

Diameter 
of  Arbor. 

Size  of  Hole 
in  Saw. 

For  Saws 
under  inches 

PRICE. 

1 

15 

4 

2^ 

1 

^8 

10 

$17 

2 

18^ 

4 

3X 

1 

15 

19 

3 

20>^ 

5 

5 

4 

lA 

20 

21 

4 

20>^ 

5 

6 

4>^ 

IX 

24 

23 

5 

24 

6 

6 

5 

13/^ 

30 

28 

6 

24 

7 

13/8 

36 

33 

188 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Improved  Swing  Out-Off  Saw. 

This  is  a  very  complete  machine,  and  extensively  used  for  cutting  up  all  kinds  of 
rough  stock,  ready  for  working,  in  door  and  sash,  agricultural,  furniture  and  box  shops, 
planing  mills,  etc. 

It  is  made  wholly  of  iron  and  steel,  consisting  of  a  frame,  having  an  arbor  and  saw  at 
the  lower  end,  and  countershaft  and  pulleys  at  the  top,  arranged  to  be  attached  to  the  floor 
above.  It  is  very  convenient  and  handy,  occupies  but  a  small  space,  requiring  very  little 
skill  to  operate  and  keep  it  in  order. 

It  is  furnished  with  one  of  our  patent  self-oiling  saw  arbors,  with  expansive  mandrel  to 
suit  different  size  holes  in  saws  without  the  necessity  of  bushing  them.  The  saw  is  pro- 
tected by  a  shield,  and  the  machine  is  complete  and  can  be  set  up  and  put  in  operation  in 
a  few  minutes.  We  furnish  two  sizes,  the  smaller,  6I2  feet,  the  larger  TJJ  feet  long  from  the 
center  of  arbor  to  base  of  hanger. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  ten  inches  in  diameter 
and  five-inch  face,  and  should  make  500  revolutions  per  minute. 


189 


No.  1 

Railway  Outting-off  Saw. 

The  above  engraving  is  a  representation  of  our  No.  1,  Traversing  or  Railway 
Cutting-Off  Saw.  It  is  well  adapted  for  the  cutting  up  of  all  kinds  of  light  lumber,  and 
is  extensively  used  in  door,  sash  and  blind  shops,  cabinet  and  box  makers,  etc.  It  is  a 
substantial  good  tool,  for  the  purposes  designed. 

The  saw  arbor  is  made  of  refined  cast  steel,  runs  in  connected  patent  self-oiling  boxes, 
supplied  with  our  patent  expanding  device,  operated  by  means  of  a  screw  at  the  end, 
enabling  the  use  of  saws  with  different  size  holes,  without  the  necessity  of  bushing  them. 
The  size  of  the  arbor  where  the  saw  is  attached  is  I'ta  inches. 

The  gateway  carrying  the  arbor  and  saw  is  traversed  back  and  forth  by  means  of  the 
hand  lever  shown  in  the  engraving,  performing  the  operation  of  cutting,  while  the  material 
is  at  rest. 

The  arrangement  of  the  vibrating  frame  is  such,  that  a  uniform  tension  pf  the  belt  is 
always  preserved,  and  the  saw  driven  by  the  tight  part  of  the  belt. 

It  is  supplied  with  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter 
and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


190 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  2 

Medium  Size  Patent  Eailway  Cutting-OfF  Saw. 

(without  table.) 

This  machine  is  adapted  for  cutting  up  all  kinds  of  light  lumber,  box  stuff,  etc.,  and 
is  in  extensive  use  in  cabinet,  furniture,  sash  and  door  shops,  etc.,  etc. 

It  is  very  heavy  and  substantial,  the  frame  being  cast  in  one  piece,  with  a  very  broad 
base,  and  does  not  require  to  be  bolted  to  the  floor,  rendering  it  very  convenient  when  it 
is  desired  to  be  moved  from  one  part  of  a  shop  to  another. 

The  upper  part  of  the  frame  takes  the  form  of  rails,  which  support  and  guide  the 
carriage,  carrying  the  saw  in  its  traverse  movement.  The  arbor  is  made  of  best  refined 
cast  steel,  running  in  patent  connected  self-oiling  boxes,  and  the  carriage,  to  which  it  is 
attached,  traverses  on  planed  slides,  and  is  supplied  with  a  counterbalance. 

The  arbor  is  furnished  with  patent  expanding  device  operated  by  means  of  a  screw  at 
the  end,  enabling  the  operator  to  use  saws  with  different  size  holes,  without  the  necessity 
of  bushing  them,  and  is  also  provided  with  lock  attachment  to  prevent  its  turning  while 
attaching  or  removing  the  saw. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diam- 
eter and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


191 


No.  2 

Medium  Size  Patent  Railway  Cutting-Off  Saw. 

(with  table.) 

This  machine  is  designed  for  cutting  up  to  lengths  all  kinds  of  lumber  used  in  door, 
cabinet,  agricultural  and  wagon  shops,  box  factories,  etc. 

The  frame  is  formed  of  one  heavy  casting  with  a  broad  base,  requiring  no  attachments 
to  the  floor,  and  the  machine  can  readily  be  moved  from  one  part  of  the  shop  to  another. 

The  table  is  of  iron,  attached  to  and  made  a  part  of  the  machine,  and  is  provided  with 
dust  spout,  safety  guard,  and  board  measure,  spaced  by  inches,  for  the  convenience  of  the 
operator. 

The  arbor,  made  from  best  refined  cast-steel,  runs  in  patent  connected  self-oiling 
boxes,  is  provided  with  an  expanding  device,  allowing  the  use  of  saws  with  varying  sizes 
of  holes,  without  the  necessity  of  bushing  them,  and  is  also  fitted  with  lock  attachment,  to 
prevent  turning  while  attaching  or  removing  the  saw. 

The  carriage  to  which  the  arbor  is  attached  is  traversed  on  planed  guides  by  means  of 
an  adjustable  lever,  constructed  to  remain  in  any  desired  position. 

The  vibrating  arm  is  pivoted  to  the  countershaft,  and  furnished  with  an  adjustable 
counterbalance. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter,  four-inch 
face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


193 


No.  3 

Large  Oar  Railway  Cutting  OfF-Saw. 

(with  iron  frame  and  tables.) 

This  machine  is  exceedingly  strong  and  heavy,  and  is  constructed  in  every  part  in  the 
most  thorough  manner.  The  frame  is  cast  in  a  single  piece,  and  is,  as  will  be  seen,  of  a 
form  best  calculated  to  secure  strength  and  permanency. 

It  is  designed  for  use  in  railway  and  car  shops,  etc.,  and  in  all  cases  where  a  reliable 
and  effective  machine  is  required  for  cutting  up  timber  of  large  dimensions. 

The  table  is  attached  to,  and  made  a  part  of,  the  machine  ;  and  being  from  six  to 
eight  inches  lower  than  on  any  other  railway  saw  built,  it  saves  considerable  labor  in  the 
handling  of  heavy  stuff 

It  is  eight  feet  in  length,  and  is  furnished  with  floor  supports  at  each  end,  making  it 
very  solid  and  substantial.- 

It  is  also  furnished  with  dust  conveyer  and  board  gauge,  spaced  off  into  inches, 
very  convenient  for  the  operator  in  making  measurements. 

The  vibrating  pulley  frame  is  so  arranged  as  to  maintain  a  uniform  tension  of  the  belt 
at  all  times,  and  is  provided  with  an  adjustable  counterbalance. 

The  adjustable  lever  for  moving  the  saw  is  so  fitted  to  the  frame  as  to  remain  in  any 
position  most  convenient  to  the  operator. 

The  arbor  is  attached  to  a  carriage  which  is  traversed  on  slides,  planed  on  the  frame. 
It  is  of  large  diameter,  made  of  best  refined  English  steel,  runs  in  patent  connected  self- 
oiling  bearings,  is  provided  with  an  expanding  device,  allowing  the  use  of  saws  with  vary- 
ing sizes  of  holes  without  the  necessity  of  bushing  them. 

There  is  also  a  safety  device  for  securing  the  arbor  while  attaching  or  removing  the 
saw.  The  arbor  will  carry  saws  up  to  thirty-six  inches  in  diameter,  and  cut  off  stuff  up 
to  twenty-four  inches  wide. 

It  is  provided  with  countershaft,  is  complete  in  itself,  and  for  the  heavy  work  for  which 

it  is  adapted  and  intended,  will  be  found  unequaled. 

It  is  furnished  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  described  on  page  16,  which 
are  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per 
minute. 


194 


/.  A.  FAY&  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Improved  Bracket  Outting-Off  Saw. 

(with  traversing  arbor.) 

This  machine  is  designed,  in  all  its  parts,  to  endure  the  strains  it  may  receive  in 
cutting-  off  or  handling  heavy  timbers,  that  are  required  in  car  and  bridge  shops,  navy 
yards,  etc. 

The  table  is  low,  arranged  with  wrought  iron  friction  rollers  to  facilitate  moving  the 
timber  with  ease,  and  is  provided  with  a  fixed  fence  at  the  back  to  retain  the  timber  at 
right  angles  to  the  saw  when  cutting. 

The  bracket,  to  which  the  ways  are  attached  that  the  carriage  slides  upon,  is  bolted 
to  a  heavy  plate  fastened  to  the  wall  or  other  support,  and  is  adjustable  vertically,  to  com- 
pensate for  the  wearing  away  of  the  saw. 

The  carriage  which  carries  the  saw  arbor  is  gibbed  to  the  ways,  and,  by  means  of  a 
rack  and  pinion  connected  with  the  hand  wheel  in  front,  has  a  traverse  movement  over  the 
table  of  thirty-eight  inches.  Its  sawing  capacity  for  boards  is  to  thirty  inches  in  width, 
and  for  timbers  to  twelve  inches  thick  by  twenty-four  inches  wide. 

The  countershaft  is  placed  vertically  above  the  center  of  the  travel  of  the  carriage 
carrying  the  arbor,  leaving  the  floor  clear  of  all  obstructions.  Saws  of  any  size,  up  to 
thirty-six  inches  in  diameter,  can  be  used. 

The  wall  plate  and  face  of  the  bracket  are  planed  together  so  that,  as  the  bracket  is 
lowered  to  take  up  the  wear  of  the  saw,  it  remains  perfectly  true  with  the  table. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and 
should  make  390  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


195 


Improved  Carriage  Outting-Off  Saw. 

This  is  a  very  convenient  machine  for  cutting  up  sash  and  door  stuff,  panels,  boxes, 
and  other  lumber  that  requires  to  be  cut  square  and  to  accurate  lengths. 

It  is  provided  with  a  wrought-iron  carriage  similar  to  those  used  on  the  tenoning 
machines,  furnished  with  stops  aud  gauges  for  cutting  stuff  to  a  given  length,  either  square 
or  angular.  The  table  is  hung  on  hinges,  and  can  be  raised  or  lowered  to  suit  different 
kinds  of  work. 

It  is  fitted  with  our  No.  3  patent  saw  arbor,  running  in  connected  self-oiling  boxes, 
which  is  furnished  with  our  patent  expanding  device,  operated  by  means  of  a  screw  at  the 
end,  enabling  the  operator  to  use  saws  with  different  size  holes,  without  the  necessity  of 
bushing  them,  and  also  provided  with  safety  device  for  locking  the  arbor,  to  prevent  acci- 
dent while  putting  on  or  taking  off  the  saw,  by  simply  turning  a  pin  lever.  The  arbor  is 
suited  to  receive  a  twenty-inch  saw  and  under.  The  size  of  the  arbor  between  the  collars 
to  receive  the  saw  is  lie  inches. 

The  machine,  when  fitted  with  our  improved  grooving  heads,  is  quite  extensively 
used  for  cutting  gains  in  window  frames,  doors,  etc. 

We  can  furnish  a  No.  i  groover  head,  to  cut  from  to  S/q  inches  wide,  or  No.  2 
groover  head,  to  cut  from      to  i}4  inches  wide,  as  may  be  wanted. 

The  pulley  on  the  saw  arbor  is  five  inches  in  diameter  and  five  inches  face,  and  should 
make  2,500  revolutions  per  minute. 


106 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  JLLU:^TRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  1  AND  2 

Iron  Frame  Ripping  Saw  Tables. 

These  machines  are  similar  in  design,  and  the  frames  substantial  in  their  con- 
struction. The  table  for  No.  1  is  five  feet  six  inches  long  by  thirty  inches  wide,  and  for 
the  No.  2.  six  feet  six  inches  long  by  three  feet  wide,  glued  up  of  alternate  strips  of 
cherry  or  maple  and  black-walnut.  The  No.  1  will  take  in  saws  to  sixteen  inches  in 
diameter.    The  No.  2  will  take  in  saws  to  twenty-four  inches  in  diameter. 

The  tables  are  hinged  at  one  end,  and  have  a  raising  screw  at  the  other  with  slotted 
supports  held  by  bolts  and  hand  wheels  to  hold  the  tables  at  any  required  height.  The 
arbor  bearings  are  formed  in  the  cross  girt  of  the  frame,  and  are  provided  with  self- 
lubricating  arrangement  and  a  safety  lock  to  prevent  the  spindle  turning  while  changing 
saws. 

The  fence  is  arranged  to  form  a  bevel  of  forty-five  degrees,  and  is  attached  to  a 
graduated  index  slide.  The  arbor  pulleys  are  outside  of  the  tables,  and  can  be  belted  in 
any  direction.  An  expanding  device  is  placed  in  the  spindle  to  accommodate  saws  having 
different  holes. 

The  arbor  pulley  to  the  No.  1  is  four  inches  in  diameter  and  four  and  one-half  inch 
face,  and  should  make  2,600  revolutions  per  minute. 

The  arbor  pulley  to  the  No.  2  is  five  inches  inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and 
should  make  2,200  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


197 


Column  Ripping  Saw. 

This  is  a  machine  intended  for  the  use  of  cabinet  makers,  pattern  makers,  or  where 
any  Hght  cutting  or  ripping  is  to  be  done.  The  saw  arbor  is  fixed  in  bearings  in  the  top 
of  the  column,  and  driven  by  a  countershaft  near  the  base,  making  it  complete  and  easy  to 
run  direct  from  the  line  shaft. 

The  table  is  adjustable  vertically  by  means  of  a  screw  operated  by  the  hand  wheel 
at  the  front.  The  table  is  of  maple  or  cherry  and  black  walnut,  in  alternate  strips;  it  is 
hinged  for  lifting  it,  for  removing  or  replacing  the  saw. 

The  fence  is  provided  with  a  graduated  index  slide,  and  is  adjustable  to  cut  angles  to 
forty-five  degrees.  There  is  a  cutting-off  slide,  which  is  adjustable  to  cut  mitres  at  any 
angle. 

The  machine  will  take  in  saws  to  fifteen  inches  in  diameter.  The  arbor  is  provided 
with  an  expanding  device  to  accommodate  saws  with  different  sized  holes. 

It  is  supplied  with  a  countershaft,  having  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  upon  it, 
which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make  825  revolutions 
per  minute. 


198 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


• 


No.  2 

Standard  Rip  and  Cross-Out  Saw  Bench. 

For  ripping,  cross-cutting,  grooving,  cutting  miters,  bevel  sawing,  and  many  other 
functions  for  which  a  saw  can  be  adapted,  this  machine  is  pecuHarly  fitted.  The  frame  is 
constructed  with  two  soh'd  ends,  and  a  ribbed  plate  connection,  bolted  solidly  together. 

The  saw  arbor  is  swung  upon  an  arm  attached  to  the  central  plate  ;  the  bearings  are 
cast  in  one  piece  with  the  arm,  guided  and  held  to  its  place  by  a  bolt  through  a  slotted 
hole  in  the  central  plate.  The  surfaces  coming  in  contact  on  the  central  plate  and  arbor 
frame  are  planed  true  to  insure  the  saw  always  being  perfectly  square  with  the  table,  and 
a  handled  nut  on  the  bolt  screws  the  arbor  frame  to  its  position  when  set. 

The  saw  is  raised  and  lowered  by  means  of  a  segmental  screw-gear  and  screw, 

operated  by  a  hand  wheel  at  the  end  of  the  machine.    The  tension  of  the  belt  is  produced 

by  an  idler  pulley  on  a  swinging  arm,  and  operated  by  a  bar,  the  handle  of  which  projects 

at  the  end  of  the  machine. 

The  table  is  of  iron,  and  furnished  with  our  patent  adjustable  saw  gauge,  which  slides 

upon  a  graduated  index  bar,  and  is  arranged  for  sawing  to  a  bevel  or  at  right  angles,  as 

may  be  desired.    The  table  is  provided  with  a  sliding  guide  or  fence  for  cross-cutting 

square,  or  at  an  angle  for  mitering. 

It  is  provided  with  a  countershaft,  and  can  be  belted  from  any  direction.  The  machine 
will  receive  saws  to  twenty  inches  in  diameter ;  the  arbor  has  an  expanding  device  to  suit 
different  sized  holes  in  the  saws  without  the  necessity  of  bushing. 

The  countershaft  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  ten 
inches  in  diameter  six  inch  face,  and  should  make  700  revolutions. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


199 


Double  Revolving  Saw  Table. 

(rip  and  cross-cut.) 

This  machine  is  designed  for  ripping  or  cross-cutting,  and  is  especially  adapted  to  the 
requirements  of  carpenters,  pattern  makers,  cabinet  makers,  or  any  establishment  where 
frequent  changes  are  made  in  the  character  of  the  work. 

The  machine  is  arranged  to  use  saws  to  fourteen  inches  in  diameter.  There  are  two 
arbors  placed  in  a  revolving  frame,  which,  in  moving  around,  brings  either  the  rip  or  cross- 
cut saw  into  use,  as  may  be  desired.  The  frame  is  revolved  by  means  of  a  hand-wheel 
moving  a  worm  and  gear.  The  saws  are  operated  by  frictions,  which  are  regulated  in  their 
contact  by  the  arbor  frame  moving  against  a  circular  guide  under  the  table.  The  guide  is 
so  placed  that  when  the  saws  are  both  below  the  table  they  do  not  run,  but  when  either  is 
made  to  project  through  the  table  it  is  in  motion. 

There  is  a  fence  for  ripping,  which  can  be  set  to  saw  beveling  to  an  angle  of  forty-five 
degrees,  and  grooves  are  planed  in  the  table  to  receive  slides  for  cross-cutting.  The 
fences  on  the  slides  can  be  planed  at  any  angle  for  mitering  and  work  on  both  sides  of  the 
saw. 

The  machine  can  be  belted  in  any  direction,  and  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and 
loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  four  inch  face,  and  should  make  900 
revolutions  per  minute. 


200 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Large  Size  Patent  Ripping  Saw  Table. 

(with  elevating  mandrel.) 

This  is  a  very  heavy  and  substantial  machine,  designed  for  the  heaviest  class  of  work  in 
railway,  car,  wagon,  and  agricultural  shops,  ship  yards,  etc.,  where  a  machine  is  needed 
which  possesses  great  strength  and  durability. 

The  frame,  which  supports  the  saw  and  table,  consists  of  two  solid  ends  bolted  to  a 
heavy  ribbed  plate  connection,  upon  which  the  saw  frame  is  gibbed,  giving  it  great  solidity, 
at  the  same  time  leaving  all  parts  easy  of  access. 

The  top  is  made  of  wood  or  iron,  (to  suit  purchasers,)  planed  true,  fixed  rigidly  to  the 
frame,  and  is  low,  to  allow  the  heavy  lumber  worked  upon  it  to  be  easily  handled. 

The  arbor  is  made  of  best  refined  cast-steel,  has  a  patent  expanding  device,  and  runs 
in  connected  patent  self-oiling  boxes,  having  arms  which  are  fastened  at  the  ends  to  the 
frame.  It  is  raised  and  lowered  by  means  of  a  segmental  screw  gear  and  screw,  connected 
with  a  hand  wheel,  conveniently  placed  at  the  end  of  the  machine,  so  that  the  saw  may 
be  adjusted  for  different  thicknesses  of  stuff,  as  may  be  desired. 

A  uniform  tension  of  the  belt  is  maintained  by  a  tightener  pulley,  which  takes  up  all 
looseness  of  the  belt  wherever  the  saw  may  be  placed. 

It  is  provided  with  our  patent  adjustable  saw  gauge,  the  slide  of  which  is  graduated, 
for  convenience  of  measurement,  into  inches  and  parts  of  an  inch. 

The  gauge  is  fastened  by  a  bolt,  which  moves  in  a  slot  in  the  end  of  the  table,  leaving 
the  face  of  the  table  free  of  all  slots  or  bolt  holes.  It  is  adjustable  for  sawing  beveled 
work,  and  can  be  set  to  a  right  angle  without  squaring. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and 
three-inch  face,  and  should  make  450  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


201 


No.  2 

Self-Feeding  Standard  Saw  Table. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  edging  and  ripping  up  lumber  for  the  flooring  machine, 
and  also  for  all  kinds  of  work  usually  performed  on  a  common  ripping  saw  table.  It  has 
the  advantages  of  a  first-class  self-feed  edging  saw,  and  also  a  hand  feed  ripping  saw. 

The  feeding  roll,  which  is  placed  back  of  the  saw,  is  strongly  geared,  is  readily  ad- 
justable for  different  thicknesses  of  lumber,  and  its  pressure  on  the  stuff  graduated  by 
means  of  a  weighted  lever.  When  desired  for  use  as  a  common  rip  saw  table,  the  feed 
roll  can  be  instantly  thrown  back  out  of  the  way. 

The  saw  arbor  is  hung  to  a  movable  arm  which  is  raised  and  lowered  by  a  hand 
wheel  at  the  front  end  of  the  machine,  enabling  the  operator  to  elevate  the  saw  so  as  to 
just  cut  through  the  board,  thus  economizing  the  power,  by  a  reduction  of  the  friction  on 
the  saw,  presenting  a  better  cutting  angle  of  the  teeth,  and  consequently  making  a 
smoother  cut,  and  requiring  less  sharpening  of  the  teeth. 

The  fence  or  gauge  is  quickly  adjusted  for  different  widths  without  the  necessity  of 
measuring,  the  table  being  provided  with  a  gauge  spaced  into  inches  and  parts  of  an  inch. 

The  machine  will  make  a  straight  cut  without  any  guide,  by  simply  letting  the  feed 
roll  take  the  board  through  as  started.  This  feature  will  be  appreciated  when  sawing 
boards  with  a  crooked  edge,  which  require  straightening  before  other  strips  can  be  sawed 
from  them.  It  will  receive  saws  sixteen  inches  in  diameter,  is  provided  with  planed  iron 
table,  countershaft,  etc.,  and  can  be  belted  from  any  direction. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  six- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  700  revolutions  per  minute. 


202 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Improved  Carriage  Edging  Saw. 

For  planing  mills  or  manufactories  where  lumber  is  ripped  into  strips,  requiring 
straight  and  parallel  edges,  this  machine  is  indispensible. 

The  machine  is  operated  by  placing  the  board  to  be  edged  or  straightened  upon  the 
movable  table  and  passing  it  by  the  saw. 

If  it  is  desired  to  rip  the  lumber,  the  table  can  be  left  fixed,  and  the  adjustable  guide 
on  the  fixed  table,  back  of  the  saw,  set  for  ripping  to  different  widths. 

The  frame  of  the  machine  is  of  iron,  with  planed  ways.  The  movable  table  is  of 
wood,  furnished  with  rollers,  a  part  of  which  are  grooved  to  fit  one  of  the  planed  ways 
on  the  frame,  insuring  a  perfectly  straight  motion  of  the  table. 

The  table  running  upon  friction  rollers,  gives  it  a  motion  so  easy  that  almost  any 
length  of  table  can  be  used  with  but  little  exertion.  The  usual  sizes  are  twelve,  sixteen, 
twenty,  or  twenty-four  feet  tables.  These  are  made  in  lengths,  so  that,  if  desired,  a  short 
table  can  be  used  on  a  long  machine. 

A  large  size  patent  saw  mandrel,  running  in  patent  self-oiling  bearings  provided  with 
patent  expanding  device,  operated  by  means  of  a  screw  at  the  end,  enabling  the  operator 
to  use  saws  with  different  sized  holes,  without  the  necessity  of  bushing  them,  is  furnished 
with  the  machine,  and  the  table  is  furnished  with  necessary  stops  and  handles. 

The  pulley  on  the  mandrel  is  five  inches  in  diameter,  six-inch  face,  and  the  periphery 
of  the  saw  should  make,  for  soft  wood  about  10,000  feet,  and  for  hard  wood,  9,000  feet, 
per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


203 


Improved  Edging  Saw. 

(with  single,  double,  and  triple  saws.) 

This  machine  is  designed  for  the  use  of  mills,  where  flooring  is  a  specialty,  or  where 
great  quantities  of  strips  of  parallel  widths  are  needed ;  it  may  also  be  used  for  ripping  off 
scantling  from  the  plank.  It  is  self-feeding,  the  feeding  rolls  are  behind  the  saws,  and 
arranged  to  carry  the  lumber  entirely  away  from  the  saws  after  it  is  cut.  It  is  made  to 
use  one,  two,  or  three  saws,  as  may  be  desired. 

The  feed  is  driven  from  the  saw  arbor;  the  upper  roll  is  adjusted  to  different  thick- 
nesses by  a  worm  gear,  and  worm  connected  to  a  rod  and  hand  wheel  in  the  front  end  of 
the  machine,  and  will  take  in  to  four  inches  in  thickness  and  twenty-six  inches  in  width. 

The  guide  for  the  lumber  is  fixed  in  its  position,  the  saws  are  adjustable  to  saw  any 
width  of  strips  from  two  inches  to  eight  inches,  and  will  rip  off  a  narrow  and  a  wide  strip 
at  the  same  time,  if  desired. 

The  saws  are  moved  on  the  arbor  by  a  rack  and  pinion ;  the  saw  next  the  guide  being 
moved,  the  other  saw  will  be  moved  with  it,  they  remaining  at  a  constant  distance  apart ; 
the  second  saw  can  also  be  separately  adjusted  by  its  own  rack  and  pinion. 

The  racks  and  pinions  are  worked  by  a  spring  handle,  a  pin  on  which  is  inserted  into 
a  hole  in  a  dial  plate,  and  indicating  by  figures  the  distance  from  the  fence,  or  between 
the  saws.    It  will  feed  one  hundred  feet  per  minute. 

The  pulley  on  the  saw  arbor  is  six  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should 
make  2,800  revolutions  per  minute. 


204 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Shingle  Machine. 

The  above  engraving  represents  the  original  Evarts'  Patent  Shingle  Machine  with 
improved  taper  works.  It  is  made  entirely  of  iron  and  steel,  very  heavy,  substantially 
built,  and  not  liable  to  get  out  of  order.  It  has  a  self-tilting  table,  so  the  operator  need 
use  but  one  hand,  save  to  move  the  carriage. 

Any  desired  thickness  of  shingle  can  be  made,  both  butt  and  top,  and  the  taper  or 
thickness  adjusted  in  one  minute's  time.  With  this  machine  one  or  several  shingles 
can  be  cut  without  change  of  taper  ;  by  this  means  the  bolt  can  always  be  kept  true,  and 
the  shingles  all  be  cut  with  the  grain  of  the  wood.  This  is  done  without  the  slightest 
delay  or  extra  labor  of  the  operator. 

The  saw  being  secured  to  the  arbor  by  one  screw  only,  it  can  be  taken  off  and 
another  put  on  in  two  minutes,  so  no  running  time  is  lost  in  filing  saws  when  more  than 
one  saw  is  sent  with  machine. 

Three  sizes  are  made.  The  36-inch  saw  makes  shingles  from  16  inches  to  20  inches 
long;  the  40-inch  and  42-inch  saws  make  shingles  16  inches  to  24  inches  long.  Heading, 
box  stuff,  etc.,  are  made  with  equal  facility.  The  42-inch  saw  machine  is,  more  properly, 
a  heading  machine.  It  has  an  advantage  over  other  machines  in  its  adaptation  to  the 
sawing  of  tight  barrel  heading,  thick  at  the  sap  edge  and  thin  at  the  heart. 

The  working  capacity  of  this  machine  30,000  to  40,000  shingles  per  day  from  green 
logs  of  white  pine  or  cypress,  and  in  yellow  pine  12,000  to  15,000  per  day,  depending  on 
the  skill  of  the  operator.  Variations  from  these  figures  may  occur  from  attendant  circum- 
stances, and  not  due  to  the  machine. 

The  arbor  pulley  is  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  six-inch  face,  and  should  make  1,100 
revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


205 


No.  1 

Circular  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

(will  saw  in  the  center  or  from  the  side.) 

For  resawing  or  making  bevel-siding  and  weather  boarding,  the  accompanying  en- 
graving represents  a  cheap  machine  which  gives  entire  satisfaction  wherever  used.  It  is 
constructed  in  a  substantial  manner,  and  its  adjustable  parts  are  easy  of  access  and  con- 
venient to  the  operator. 

The  lumber  is  fed  to  the  saw  by  four  rollers,  which  are  expansively  geared  in  pairs, 
so  that  at  whatever  point  they  may  be  placed,  the  gearing  has  the  same  effective  feeding 
force. 

The  rollers  are  hung  upon  ball  and  socket  joints,  which  gives  them  an  adjustment  for 
bevel  sawing,  and  presents  the  center  of  the  stuff  to  the  saw,  no  matter  how  varying  the 
thickness.  There  are  also  adjustable  springs  for  retaining  the  rollers  at  the  proper  pressure 
for  feeding  the  lumber. 

The  saw  arbor  is  steel,  running  in  patent  self-oiling  boxes,  connected  and  arranged 
to  move  to  the  rollers  as  the  saw  is  worn  away,  and  has  a  patent  lock  attachment  for  pre- 
venting the  arbor  from  turning  while  attaching  or  removing  the  saw. 

The  machine  will  saw  in  the  center  of  lumber  from  three-eighths  of  an  inch  to  five 
inches  in  thickness,  and,  if  desired,  a  thin  strip  can  be  taken  from  the  side  of  the  material. 

There  are  three  changes  of  feed  speeds  to  accommodate  for  different  widths  of 
lumber  being  re-sawed. 

The  pulley  on  the  arbor  is  seven  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and  should 
make  1,500  revolutions  per  minute. 


206 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


(with  jointing  attachment  and  simultaneous  adjustment  of 

ROLLS  FOR  bevel  SIDING.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


207 


No.  2 

Solid  Frame  Circular  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

(with  jointing  attachment  and  simultaneous  adjustment  of 

FEED  rolls  for  BEVEL  SIDING,  j 

This  machine  is  designed  for  re-sawing,  or  making  bevel  siding,  weather  boarding, 
jointing  the  bottom  side  after  it  is  split,  etc.  It  is  very  compact  and  occupies  compara- 
tively small  space  upon  the  floor,  and  it  is  believed  to  be  one  of  the  most  powerful 
machines  yet  made,  unexcelled  for  its  simplicity,  durability,  and  the  rapidity  of  its 
working,  and  general  adaptation  to  the  requirements  of  planing  mills,  box  factories,  etc. 

The  frame  is  very  heavy  and  cast  in  one  piece,  insuring  strength  and  solidity.  The 
working  parts  are  all  made  in  a  thorough  and  substantial  manner.  The  feed  works  are  very 
powerful,  and  consist  of  four  six-inch  feed  rolls  all  strongly  geared  and  heavily  weighted, 
mounted  on  a  swinging  frame  which  is  so  arranged  as  to  not  only  self  center  the  material, 
but  to  admit  of  cutting  from  the  side  when  desired. 

It  will  do  any  kind  of  re-sawing  and  center  any  thickness  of  material,  from  one- 
quarter  to  six  inches,  with  perfect  precision.  By  simply  turning  one  screw,  all  four  feed 
rolls  can  be  set  to  any  bevel  required,  or  quickly  changed  for  different  thicknesses  of 
lumber. 

The  arbor  is  of  large  diameter,  runs  in  self-oiling  boxes,  which  are  arranged  to  be 
adjusted  to  the  feed  rolls,  as  the  saw  is  reduced  in  size  by  wear,  or  when  it  is  desired  to 
use  a  saw  of  less  diameter. 

It  has  also  a  jointing  head,  placed  on  the  extreme  end  of  the  machine,  driven  from 
the  saw  arbor,  for  jointing  the  bottom  edges  of  bevel  siding  after  it  has  passed  the  saw.  It 
is  very  simple  and  convenient,  and  it  is  only  necessary  to  slip  off  the  belt  when  not 
required  for  use. 

It  is  furnished  with  a  24-inch  taper  ground  Disston  saw,  and,  for  perfect  accuracy  of 
sawing,  is  unrivalled.    Some  of  its  distinguishing  features  are,  viz  : 
1st.  It  has  four  feed  rolls  with  power  applied  to  all. 

2d.    Both  sets  of  feed  rolls  can  be  made  yielding,  or  either  side  rigid  for  splitting 
even  thicknesses,  and  have  both  lateral  and  transverse  adjustments. 
3d.   The  rolls  can  be  opened  to  admit  six-inch  lumber. 

4th.  The  movement  of  a  single  screw  adjusts  the  rolls  laterally  upon  either  side. 

5th.  The  saw  is  arranged  to  run  close  between  the  rolls,  and  can  be  moved  forward 
as  it  is  reduced  in  size  by  wear,  and  can  be  quickly  detached  without  removing  the  arbor. 

6th.  By  a  novel  arrangement  of  the  frame  that  sustains  the  feed  works,  they  can  all 
be  inclined  by  one  movement  to  varying  angles. 

7th.  It  has  changes  of  feed,  and  will  re-saw  ninety  feet  per  minute  at  its  fastest  speed. 

The  arbor  pulley  is  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  eight-inch  face,  and  should  make  1,500 
revolutions  per  minute. 


208 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  4 

Large  Circular  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

WITH 

WEIGHTED  PRESSURE  FEED  ROLLS 
AND  TAPER   GROUND    FLANGES    ON  SAW. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


209 


No.  4 

Large  Circular  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

WITH  WEIGHTED  PRESSURE  FEED  ROLLS  AND  TAPER  GROUND  FLANGES  ON  SAW. 

The  machine  illustrated  in  the  accompanying  engraving  has  been  designed  and  per- 
fected after  careful  study  of  the  requirements  of  a  first-class  circular  re-sawing  machine; 
adapted  for  re-sawing  thin  stuff,  such  as  mirror  and  picture  frame  backing,  cabinet,  carriage 
and  box  work,  and  is  regarded  as  one  of  the  most  powerful  and  complete  machines  made. 

It  is  built  in  the  most  substantial  and  compact  manner,  and  possesses  many  important 
improvements,  as  well  as  special  features  and  advantages,  which  render  it  superior  to  any 
machine  of  the  kind  in  use. 

The  frame  is  made  in  one  solid  casting,  securing  solidity  and  strength.  The  feed 
rolls  are  of  large  diameter  and  heavily  geared,  and  are  so  arranged  as  to  self-center  the 
material,  and  to  admit  of  cutting  from  the  side  when  desired.  It  is  also  provided  with  a 
pair  of  friction  rolls  near  the  top  line  of  the  saw  for  steadying  and  guiding  wide  lumber 
during  the  process  of  cutting,  which  will  be  found  very  advantageous. 

Some  of  the  most  important  features  may  be  enumerated  as  follows: 

1st.  The  feed  rolls  are  of  large  diameter,  heavily  geared,  and  have  both  lateral  and 
transverse  adjustments. 

2nd.  The  feed  rolls  are  perfectly  self-centering,  or  can  be  made  rigid  on  one  side. 

3rd.  It  can  be  quickly  adjusted  to  slab  from  the  side  of  the  lumber,  from  four  to  six 
inches  in  thickness,  when  required. 

4th.  The  rolls  can  be  opened  almost  instantly  to  any  desired  thickness. 

5th.  The  saw  is  arranged  to  run  close  up  between  the  rolls,  and  can  be  adjusted  to  the 
feed  rolls,  as  it  is  reduced  in  size  by  wear. 

6th.  The  saw  is  detached  without  disturbing  the  arbor. 

7th.  The  movement  of  a  single  screw  adjusts  the  rolls  laterally  upon  either  side. 

8th.  The  rolls  are  retained  in  position  by  an  ingenious  arrangement  of  lever  and  weight. 

9th.  By  the  novel  arrangement  of  the  frame  that  sustains  the  feed  works,  and  simply 
turning  one  screw,  the  rolls  are  inclined  to  varying  angles. 

10th.  The  arbor  is  very  heavy,  made  of  the  best  refined  cast  steel,  and  runs  in  patent 
self-oiling  journals. 

11th.  It  is  furnished  with  a  36-inch  Disston  saw  fitted  with  taper  ground  flanges, 
securing  great  strength,  and  also  admitting  the  use  of  a  much  thinner  blade  than  ordinary 
re-sawing  machines. 

Perfect  accuracy  of  sawing  with  this  machine  is  assured.  It  is  so  simple  that  any 
mechanic  of  ordinary  capacity,  who  has  sufficient  intelligence  to  file  and  keep  the  saw  in 
order,  can  do  good  work. 

A  careful  examination  of  its  merits,  w^e  think,  is  sufficient  to  convince  any  one  of  its 
simplicity  and  effectiveness  for  all  re-sawing  purposes. 

The  pulley  on  the  saw  arbor  is  twelve  inch  diameter,  eight-inch  face,  and  should 
run  about  1,000  revolutions  per  minute,  depending  upon  the  size  of  the  saw  used. 


210 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Portable  Vertical  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

WILL  RE-SAW  UP  TO  THIRTY  INCHES  WIDE  AND  SIX  INCHES  THICK. 

(WITHOUT  PIT.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


211 


Portable  Vertical  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

(will  re  saw  up  to  thirty  inches  wide  and  six  inches  thick.) 

This  re-sawing  machine  is  self-contained,  and  is  adaptable  for  positions  in  which  it 
would  be  inconvenient  or  impracticable  to  have  an  excavation  made  to  receive  a  pitman 
below  the  floor. 

It  is  driven  from  a  countershaft  overhead,  the  fly-wheels  being  used  as  driving  pulleys 
on  the  machine.  The  saw  frame  and  connections  are  made  of  wood,  to  have  as  little 
weight  as  possible  in  the  reciprocating  parts. 

The  feed  works  are  driven  from  the  countershaft,  and  has  two  changes  of  feed.  The 
feeding  is  started  and  stopped  by  means  of  a  lever  and  clutch.  The  feeding  rollers,  of 
which  there  are  four,  are  all  driven,  and  in  their  adjustment  the  gearing  acts  with  them  in 
their  movement,  and  are  driven  the  same  at  all  points. 

The  feeding  rollers  are  adjusted  to  different  thicknesses  of  stuff  by  levers  attached  to 
their  sliding  frames,  and  operated  by  handwheel  and  screw.  They  can  be  adjusted  to  saw 
in  the  center,  or  one  pair  of  rolls  can  be  fixed  as  guide  rollers,  and  any  thickness  sawed 
from  the  guide  side. 

The  pressure  on  the  feeding  rollers  is  obtained  by  a  spring  on  the  screw  which  regu- 
lates their  distance  apart. 

The  saw^  is  supported  at  the  bottom  of  the  cut  by  wooden  side  guides,  and  there  is 
an  adjustable  weight  for  holding  down  the  stuff  as  it  is  fed  through. 

A  very  thin  saw  can  be  used,  making  a  saving  in  the  waste  from  the  kerf.  The 
capacity  of  the  machine  is  to  thirty  inches  in  width  and  to  six  inches  in  thickness. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and  eight  and  one-half 
inch  face,  and  should  make  550  revolutions  per  minute. 


212 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Large  Vertical  Re-Sawing  Machine. 


(with  pitman  below  floor.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


213 


Improved  Vertical  Re-Sawing  Machine. 

(with  pitman  below  floor.) 

This  machine  is  exceptionally  strong  and  heavy  in  all  its  parts,  and  is  designed  for 
re-sawing  all  kinds  of  wide  lumber  into  thin  boards.  It  is  constructed  entirely  of  iron 
and  steel,  with  the  exception  of  the  pitman,  in  the  most  thorough  manner,  and  for  an 
effective  and  labor-saving  machine  for  use  in  planing  mills,,  agricultural,  cabinet,  and  box 
shops,  it  has  no  superior. 

It  is  made  to  re-saw  up  to  twenty-eight  and  thirty  inches  wide  and  six  inches  thick, 
and  owing  to  the  very  thin  gauge  saw  used,  it  removes  a  very  thin  kerf. 

The  feed  works  are  detachable  from  the  main  column,  and  are  of  the  strongest  possi- 
ble kind. 

All  four  feed  rollers  are  driven  and  expansively  geared  in  an  improved  manner,  and 
the  feed  is  graduated  for  wide  or  narrow  sawing. 

It  can  be  changed  to  cut  from  the  side  of  a  plank  or  board  without  stopping  the 
machine,  with  ease  and  facility. 

The  crank  and  pitman  work  from  below  ;  the  gate  in  which  the  saw  is  fastened  runs 
in  planed  V  guides,  and  the  saw  is  readily  accessible  for  sharpening  and  putting  it  in  order. 

It  is  furnished  with  fly-wheel,  shaft,  pitman,  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  one  saw,  and 
is  complete  in  all  respects,  and  ready  for  use  when  received  and  set  up. 

There  are  other  improvements  over  the  machines  hitherto  offered  to  the  public  which 
we  have  not  enumerated,  but  which  purchasers  will  readily  notice  and  appreciate. 

It  is  supplied  with  our  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  twenty  inches  in 
diameter  and  eight  inch  face,  and  should  make  275  revolutions  per  minute. 


214 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Column  Hand  Planer  and  Jointer. 

This  is  a  very  compact  handy  little  machine  for  planing  out  of  wind,  jointing, 
beveling,  chamfering,  squaring  bed  posts,  table  legs,  etc.,  or  any  other  work  within  the 
capacity  of  the  machine,  which  may  suggest  itself  to  the  intelligent  operator. 

It  is  constructed  entirely  of  iron  and  steel,  in  the  most  substantial  manner.  The 
working  parts  are  placed  upon  a  cylindrical  column  occuying  but  little  space  on  the  floor, 
with  all  its  parts  easily  accessible  while  in  operation.  The  cylinder  is  made  of  wrought 
iron,  runs  in  self-oiling  bearings,  and  will  plane  twelve  inches  in  width.  It  is  provided 
with  two  tables,  both  being  adjustable  on  an  angle,  which  retains  the  end  of  the  table  in 
close  proximity  to  the  cutters. 

In  operating,  one  of  them  is  at  an  elevation,  on  the  same  plane  with  the  periphery  of 
the  cutter,  the  other  is  lowered  to  the  thickness  of  the  cut  to  be  taken  off.  The  fence  can 
be  moved  over  the  cutters  or  adjusted  for  angle  cutting  on  cross-grained  lumber,  or  set  at 
an  angle  to  the  face  of  the  table  for  cornering 

For  cheapness  and  the  excellence  of  the  work  performed,  it  is  unsurpassed  and  will  at 
once  commend  itself  to  those  who  see  it  in  operation 

The  cylinder  pulley  is  four  inches  in  diameter,  and  four-inch  face,  and  should  make 
4000  revolutions  per  minute. 


215 


SOLID  FRAME 
TJniversal  Hand  Planer  and  Jointer. 

The  great  popularity  of  these  machines  is  evidenced  by  the  fact  of  their  general  intro- 
duction into  the  best  wood-working  shops.  They  are  remarkably  simple  and  compact, 
effective  in  operation,  and  are  warranted  to  give  satisfaction  wherever  used. 

They  are  made  of  five  different  sizes,  viz.:  to  work  either  8,  12,  16,  20,  cr  24  inches 
wide,  and  will  dress  either  straight  or  out  of  wind,  corner,  chamfer,  bevel,  make  perfect 
glue  joints,  etc.,  and  in  their  adaptation  to  all  the  general  requirements  in  sash  and  door, 
furniture,  agricultural,  coffin  and  other  manufactories  have  no  equal. 

The  frame  is  heavy  and  substantial,  being  cast  in  one  piece,  giving  it  great  strength  and 
solidity.  The  cylinder  is  made  of  best  refined  wrought-iron  and  runs  in  long  self-oiling 
bearings,  filled  with  the  very  best  lining  metal. 

The  tables  are  made  of  good  length,  perfectly  true,  and  are  adjustable  vertically 
and  laterally  to  and  from  the  path  of  the  cutter  to  suit  the  thickness  of  the  cut,  and  also 
to  close  up  the  gap  between  them,  enabling  the  operator  to  produce  most  accurate  and 
beautiful  work. 

The  table  frames  are  provided  with  an  independent  lateral  adjustment,  so  that  cutters 
working  in  a  larger  circle  than  the  ordinary  knives  can  be  used.  The  adjustable  fence  and 
bevel  rest  is  so  arranged  that  it  can  be  used  laterally  across  the  face  of  the  table,  to  accom- 
modate the  wear  of  the  cutters.  A  countershaft,  hangers,  and  pulleys  furnished,  at  an 
extra  charge,  when  wanted.  The  pulley  on  the  cylinder  is  four  inches  in  diameter,  four- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  4000  revolvtions  per  minute. 


216 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Bracket  Sand-Papering  Machine. 

This  sand-papering  machine  can  be  hung  to  the  wall  or  to  a  post,  as  may  be  desired. 
It  is  adapted  to  all  kinds  of  surface  sand-papering,  particularly  for  doors,  sash,  blinds,  etc. ; 
also,  for  cabinet,  car  and  agricultural  shops,  or  work  of  a  similar  character. 

The  driving  shaft  is  placed  vertically  with  the  tight  and  loose  pulleys  at  the  top,  or  it 
may  be  run  through  the  floor  and  belted  from  below.  The  flexible  frame  is  hung  on  the  coun- 
tershaft, and  is  movable  in  all  directions.  The  table  is  built  to  suit  the  height  the  machine 
is  set.  The  revolving  sand-paper  disk  is  adjustable  to  different  thicknesses  of  lumber,  and 
has  a  spring  handle  to  regulate  the  pressure  on  the  surface.  An  exhaust  fan  is  attached  to 
the  disk,  and  carries  away  the  dust  from  the  operator. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  four  inch  face,  and  should 
make.  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


217 


Door  Sand-Papering  Machine. 

(with  adjustable  disk,  flexible  arms,  exhaust  fan,  etc.) 

This  machine  can  be  used  to  great  advantage  in  carpenter  shops  for  finishing  doors, 
bhnds,  sash,  etc.,  and  in  car,  cabinet,  piano,  or  other  manufactories  where  there  are  large 
surfaces  to  be  finished. 

Its  construction,  with  a  number  of  elbow  joints,  makes  it  flexible  in  any  direction, 
and  it  is,  therefore,  thoroughly  fitted  for  finishing  large  frames  or  surfaces  of  large  area. 

The  work  is  performed  by  a  disk  of  sand-paper,  which  is  attached  to  a  head-block, 
and  revolved  at  a  suitable  speed,  and  moved  by  the  operator  in  any  direction,  producing  a 
perfectly  flat  and  smooth  surface  without  tearing  or  breaking  the  corners. 

The  flexible  arms  are  attached  to  a  column,  which  can  be  placed  in  any  desired  posi- 
tion in  a  factory,  the  tight  and  loose  pulleys  being  arranged  to  receive  the  belt  directly 
from  the  line-shaft. 

The  table  accompanying  the  machine  has  a  fixed  top.  The  adjustment  for  different 
thicknesses  of  work  is  obtained  by  the  movable  end  of  the  arm  being  raised  or  lowered  by 
the  hand-wheel  and  screw. 

An  exhaust  fan  is  operated  by  the  revolution  of  the  head-block,  which  removes  all 
dust  from  the  surface  of  the  work,  and  keeps  it  clean  for  the  inspection  of  the  operator. 

It  is  furnished  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft,  which  are 
eight  inches  in  diameter  by  four  inches  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


218 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Improved  Drum  Sand-Papering  Machine. 

This  machine  is  intended  for  producing  a  smooth,  even  surface,  free  from  marks  and 
scratches,  upon  hard  wood  lumber,  and  which  will  admit  of  varnishing  without  raising  the 
fiber  of  the  wood. 

It  is  unsurpassed  in  its  adaptations  to  the  wants  of  all  classes  of  manufacturers  having 
straight  and  light  articles  on  which  a  straight  and  smooth  surface  is  desired. 

For  furniture,  coffin,  and  piano  manufacturers,  and  car  and  agriculture  implement 
makers,  it  will  be  found  exceedingly  valuable  and  useful.  It  will  produce  a  more  even 
surface,  than  can  possibly  be  obtained  by  the  ordinary  hand  process. 

The  machine  has  a  very  heavy  substantial  iron  frame  of  box  form  almost  air-tight, 
inside  of  which  is  placed  the  cylinder  provided  with  a  flexible  covering,  carrying  the 
sand-paper. 

The  table  or  platen  is  of  good  length,  made  in  two  sections,  the  ends  provided  with 
steel  points  and  arranged  to  adjust  the  cylinder  which  has  a  vertical  adjustment  to 
regulate  the  amount  of  surface  to  be  removed.  There  is  also  an  exhaust  fan  which  carries 
away  all  the  dust,  leaving  the  work  perfect  and  clean,  at  the  same  time  relieving  the 
operator  from  the  annoyance  of  sand  and  dust,  so  common  with  other  machines. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter,  four- inch  face,  and  should 
make  350  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


219 


Power  Feed  Sand-Papering  Machine. 

This  is  a  continuous  feed  machine,  being  arranged  with  feeding  rollers  all  of  which 
are  driven.  It  is  designed  for  flat  surfaces  which  can  be  fed  in  as  in  a  planing  machine, 
and  is  adapted  for  the  use  of  coffm  makers,  cabinet  and  piano  manufacturers,  or  any 
work  having  even  thickness,  . 

The  table  of  the  machine  [is  swung  on  hinges  and  can  be  removed  easily  with  the 
feeding  rollers,  which  are  attached  to  it,  for  getting  to  the  cylinder,  for  replacing  the 
paper.  The  cylinder  is  adjustable  for  more  or  less  cut  on  the  stuff,  by  set  screws  under 
the  bearings.  The  upper  rollers  are  adjustable  to  different  thickness  of  stuff  by  a  hand 
wheel  which  operates  the  four  raising  screws  at  once. 

The  cylinder  has  a  flexible  covering  over  which  the  paper  is  placed.  The  cylinder 
is  inclosed  in  a  covering  with  a  pipe  to  be  attached  to  an  exhaust  fan  to  carry  off  the  dust. 

The  capacity  is  two  and  a  half  inches  thick,  and  twenty-four  inches  wide. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter,  and  four-inch  face,  and 
should  make  800  revolutions  per  minute. 


220 


/.  A.  FAY&  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Mitering  Machine. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  cutting  moldings  of  all  kinds  to  a  miter  for  picture 
frames,  or  mitering  for  panel  moldings  in  doors  or  work  of  a  similar  character.  It  is 
quickly  operated,  and  the  work  produced  is  finished  at  one  operation.  The  machine  is 
constructed  on  a  substantial  iron  table  supporting  a  frame  in  which  there  are  two  vertical 
rods,  and  is  moved  down  and  up  by  a  hand  lever. 

The  knives  are  placed  at  right  angles  to  each  other.  Their  cutting  edges  have  an 
angle  to  the  face  of  the  table,  forming  a  shelving  cut,  and  making  perfectly  smooth  work. 
There  is  a  fence  to  hold  the  molding  in  position  while  being  cut.  The  fence  can  be  made 
adjustable,  if  desired,  for  varying  the  angles. 


Small  Boring  Machines. 

The  above  engraving  represents  our  small  boring  arbors.  They  are  very  popular  and 
convenient  little  machines  for  all  classes  of  light  boring,  especially  where  parties  have  but 
a  small  amount  of  work  to  do,  and  do  not  care  to  incur  the  expense  of  one  of  the  large 
size  machines. 

They  are  made  with  cast  steel  arbors  and  hard  metal  boxes,  with  pulley  between,  and 
are  provided  with  stops  to  gauge  the  depth  of  the  hole. 

We  make  three  sizes:  No.  i,  which  has  pulley,  (2^x25,)  should  make  2,000  revolu- 
tions; No.  2,  with  pulley,  (2|x4,)  should  make  1,600  revolutions;  No.  3,  with  pulley, 
(4x4 J,)  should  make  1,400  revolutions. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


221 


Radial  Chair  Boring  Machine. 

This  machine  is  intended  for  boring  dowel  holes  in  chair  seat  frames,  or  where  holes 
are  to  be  made  at  regular  distances  apart,  and  will  bore  two  holes  at  one  operation. 

The  arbors  are  swung  radially  from  a  center  attached  to  the  circular  frame,  and  can  be 
moved  to  any  part  in  its  circumference,  and  the  holes  can  be  bored  from  seven-eighths  of 
an  inch  to  six  inches  apart,  and  at  any  angle  desired. 

The  table  is  adjustable  vertically  by  a  screw  and  hand  wheel,  and  slides  to  and  from 
the  bits  on  its  support.  There  is  a  stop  to  regulate  the  depth  of  the  holes,  and  any 
gauges  for  special  work  can  be  fastened  to  the  sliding  table. 

There  is  attached  to  the  column  of  the  machine  a  countershaft  with  tight  and  loose 
pulleys,  making  the  machine  complete  and  in  condition  for  work,  and  can  be  run  directly 
from  the  line  shaft. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  five  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter,  two-inch  face, 
and  should  make  450  revolutions  per  minute. 


222 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Automatic  Blind  Stile  Borer  and  Mortiser. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  boring  holes  for  rolling  blinds,  and  making  the  mortise  for 
stationary  slats,  in  inside  or  outside  blinds,  for  doors  and  windows.  It  occupies  but  a  small 
floor  space,  is  perfectly  automatic  in  its  operation,  the  operator  having  only  to  put  in  the 
stiles  and  start  the  machine,  and  will  perform  the  work  in  the  most  rapid  and  perfect  manner. 

The  stiles  are  bored  or  mortised  in  pairs,  the  boring  spindles  acting  by  means  of  a  cam, 
and  when  the  holes  are  bored  or  the  mortise  completed  they  drop  to  their  original  position 
ready  for  the  next.  It  will  bore  150  holes  or  make  60  mortises  per  minute  for  stationary 
slats,  and  is  capable  of  making  any  style  of  mortise  and  of  any  length  from  to  2}^ 
inches,  and  of  any  width,  depth,  or  angle  desired.  The  depth  is  easily  regulated  by  a 
vertical  adjustment  of  the  spindles.  The  distance  between  the  holes  or  mortises  is  governed 
by  the  rack,  to  which  the  spindles  are  attached. 

The  stiles  are  held  rigidly  while  being  worked,  and,  by  a  combination  in  the  feeding 
mechanism,  are  released  as  they  are  fed  forward,  and  again  clamped  tightly  as  before. 
Being  worked  from  the  bottom  side,  the  work  is  left  thoroughly  clear  from  chips. 

The  cutters  for  boring  and  mortising  are  simple  and  cheap,  not  liable  to  break,  cost 
but  a  few  cents,  and  can  be  made  by  most  any  workman.  Full  instructions  for  operating 
accompany  each  machine. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft  are  six  inches  in  diameter  three- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  500  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


223 


Universal  Horizontal  Boring  Maohing. 

(with  quick  return  spindle,  and  radial  adjusting  table.) 

This  machine  is  cast  with  cored  section,  making  it  very  substantial.  It  combines  all 
the  requirements  of  a  first-class  machine  for  either  straight  or  angular  boring.  The 
different  adjustments  can  be  made  with  great  rapidity,  and  the  machine  is  universal  in 
its  adaptability  for  horizontal  and  radial  boring  in  agricultural  implement,  wagon,  furniture, 
and  chair  shops,  etc. 

The  table  is  gibbed  to  slides  cast  on  the  column,  is  adjustable  vertically  to  accommodate 
different  thicknesses  of  stuff,  by  means  of  a  single  screw,  and  has  a  radial  adjustment  for 
boring  at  any  desined  upward  or  downward  angle.  The  fence  moves  in  planed  slides,  is 
adjustable  for  different  widths,  and  for  boring  at  any  desired  angle. 

The  traversing  steel  spindle  is  operated  by  means  of  a  powerful  jointed  treadle,  fitted 
with  an  improved  step,  which  is  provided  with  a  steel  point,  forming  a  bearing  for  the  end 
of  the  spindle,  thus  greatly  reducing  the  wear  caused  by  the  spindle  pressing  against  the 
shoulder,  as  in  the  case  with  most  boring  machines.  It  is  fitted  with  cone  pulley,  for 
changes  of  speed,  and  adjusting  collars  to  graduate  the  depth  of  the  hole  to  be  bored. 
When  required  for  boring  large  holes  in  hard  wood,  a  screw  rod  can  be  attached  for 
traversing  the  spindle  by  hand ;  also,  side  fences  for  end  boring. 

The  treadle  has  a  weighted  counter-balance,  giving  a  quick  return  to  the  spindle. 

The  machine  is  provided  with  countershaft,  is  complete  in  itself,  easy  to  operate  and 
keep  in  order.     Full  set  of  wrenches  and  five  auger  bits  accompany  each  machine. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  three- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  1,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


224 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


SINGLE  SPINDLE 
Vertical  Universal  Boring  Machine. 

(with  countershaft  attached.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


225 


SINGLE  SPINDLE 
Vertical  Universal  Boring  Machine. 

(with  countershaft  attached.) 

This  machine  is  designed  and  intended  for  use  in  chair,  furniture,  agricultural,  and 
wagon  shops,  and  will  be  found  well  adapted  for  straight  boring,  also,  when  required,  for 
boring  at  an  angle  with  the  face,  or  diagonally  through  the  stuff 

The  column  is  substantial  and  of  neat  construction,  the  machine  is  strong  and  durable 
in  every  part,  and  is  self-contained  and  ready  to  operate  without  any  attachments  but  to 
the  floor,  and  will  be  found  very  superior  in  all  respects  for  the  purposes  designed. 

The  table  is  gibbed  to  planed  ways,  cast  upon  the  column,  and  raised  and  lowered  by 
a  screw,  the  actuating  hand  wheel  of  which  is  under  the  table,  within  easy  reach  of  the 
operator. 

The  table  has  an  angle  adjustment  to  thirty  degrees,  and  the  fence  is  adjusted  by  slid- 
ing the  holding  bolts  in  slots  in  the  face  of  the  table.  When  in  operation  the  table  is  fixed 
in  its  position. 

The  boring  spindle  is  brought  down  to  the  work  by  a  treadle,  worked  by  the  foot, 
and  is  returned  from  the  work  by  the  counter-weighted  lever  connected  to  the  top. 

The  spindle  has  a  movement  of  eleven  inches,  and  the  depth  of  boring  is  gauged  by 
a  stop  rod  in  the  column,  held  in  its  place  by  a  set  screw. 

The  countershaft  is  attached  to  the  base  of  the  column,  with  the  tight  and  loose  pul- 
leys in  a  position  to  receive  the  belt  from  any  direction. 

The  boring  spindle  is  at  right  angles  to  the  countershaft,  and  receives  the  belt  over 
two  idler  pulleys,  making  the  machine  self-contained  and  ready  to  operate,  without  any 
attachments  but  to  the  floor. 

It  is  supplied  with  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in 
diameter  three  inch  face,  and  should  make  750  revolutions. 


226 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Three  Spindle  Vertical  Oar  Boring  Machine. 


WITH  COUNTERBALANCED  LATERAL  AND  VERTICAL  ADJUSTING  SPINDLES,  ETC. 
(will  BORE  HOLES  UP  TO  TWO  AND  ONE-HALF  INCH  DIAMETER.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


227 


THREE  SPINDLE 
Vertical  Oar  Boring  Machine 

WITH  WROUGHT  IRON  TABLES, 
COUNTERBALANCED  LATERAL  AND  VERTICAL  ADJUSTING  SPINDLES,  ETC. 

This  is  a  heavy  machine,  made  suitable  for  railway,  car,  or  heavy  agricultural  work, 
and  will  bore  holes  up  to  2^  inches  in  diameter. 

Its  advantages  are,  the  avoidance  of  changing  augers  so  frequently,  as  in  the  single 
spindle  machines,  the  convenience  of  all  its  parts  to  the  operator,  and  the  rapidity  and 
ease  of  adjustment. 

It  is  arranged  for  three  augers,  ot  different  sizes,  and  is  capable  of  boring  holes  two 
and  a  half  inches  in  diameter. 

The  spindles  with  their  mountings  are  placed  on  a  heavy  column,  to  which  the  table 
is  attached,  making  the  machine  complete  in  itself,  requiring  no  attachments  to  the  build- 
ing, but  to  belt  from  the  countershaft,  which  is  vertically  above  the  center  of  the  machine, 
leaving  the  floor  clear  of  all  obstructions. 

The  spindles  have  a  lateral  motion  over  the  timbers  of  ten  inches,  their  frames  are 
placed  upon  plain  slides,  the  central  one  being  worked  by  a  screw,  the  outside  ones  by 
rack  and  pinion,  each  having  a  convenient  hand  wheel,  and  are  adjustable  separately. 

The  boring  spindles  have  a  vertical  motion  of  eighteen  inches,  with  collars,  for  indi- 
cating depths  to  be  bored.  They  have  handles  for  operating  and  counterbalanced  levers  to 
return  them  after  boring. 

The  spindles  are  all  driven  by  one  belt.  The  center  spindle  has  a  large  pulley,  and 
is  intended  to  be  run  at  a  less  speed  than  the  others,  as  it  is  designed  for  the  largest  bits. 

The  table  has  a  series  of  rollers,  to  move  the  timbers  upon,  a  guide  at  the  back, 
and  stops  above,  to  prevent  the  timbers  from  lifting  when  being  bored. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  ten  inches  in  diameter,  four  inches  in  face,  and  should 
make  475  revolutions  per  minute. 


228 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Horizontal  Gar  Boring  Machine. 

(with  traversing  steel  spindle,  wrought  iron  tables,  etc.) 


This  machine  is  intended  for  general  framing  purposes,  more  particularly  for  car  and 
other  railroad  work,  including  bridge  and  heavy  truss  framing,  and  has  no  superior. 

It  is  built  from  original  designs,  and  in  the  most  heavy  and  substantial  manner,  wholly 
of  iron  and  steel,  including  the  table,  the  rails  of  which  are  wrought  bars. 

The  timber  rests  on  rolls,  and  is  always  on  the  same  plane.  The  boring  head  and  bit 
is  arranged  to  adjust  vertically  without  altering  the  belt  tensions. 

The  spindle  is  cast  steel,  of  large  diameter,  and  has  a  movement  of  17  inches; 
bored  to  receive  a  }^  inch  shank,  and  is  provided  with  a  steel  bush  to  reduce  the  chuck  to 
inch  for  smaller  bits. 

The  head  is  counterbalanced  by  a  weight,  and  is  quickly  adjusted  by  a  hand-wheel 
and  screw  of  coarse  pitch.  By  this  means  of  adjustment,  the  bit  is  brought  to  a  point 
with  accuracy  and  with  great  ease. 

No  friction  clutches  or  other  perishable  devices  are  used,  and  all  the  machinery  is 
above  the  platen,  therefore  free  from  chips.  The  whole  running  parts  consists  of  the 
spindle  and  two  idler  pulleys,  which  run  on  steel  taper  bearings,  fitted  in  gun  metal  boxes. 

The  machine  is  furnished  with  nineteen  auger  bits  and  small  countershaft  with  pulleys, 
and  is  complete  in  every  particular.  The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft  are  8 
inches  in  diamter  4-inch  face,  and  should  make  500  revolutions. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


229 


Eadial  Horizontal  Oar  Boring  Machine. 

(for  radial,  straight,  and  end  boring.) 

This  is  a  new  machine,  and  is  designed  particularly  for  car  and  bridge  work,  for 
straight,  angle,  and  end  boring.  It  is  well  known  in  car  shops  that  the  holes  in  truck  and 
body  bolsters  for  the  truss  rods,  are  among  the  most  difficult  to  be  bored. 

This  machine  will  bore  every  kind  of  straight  or  angle  holes  required  with  the  greatest 
ease  and  facility  and  without  moving  the  timber,  all  the  necessary  adjustments  being  made 
with  the  head  and  spindle  carriage.  The  boring  spindle  has  a  horizontal  movement  of 
twenty-four  inches,  allowing  holes  to  be  bored  to  that  depth. 

The  head  or  carriage  has  a  horizontal  movement  in  planed  sides  in  the  frame,  which 
permits  it  to  be  brought  close  up  to  the  stuff  when  doing  angle  work.  The  head  is  raised 
and  lowered  by  a  hand  wheel,  geared  to  a  screw  of  coarse  pitch,  by  which  means  the 
auger  is  brought  to  the  exact  point  desired  without  changing  the  position  of  the  timber. 

The  belt  is  kept  at  the  proper  tension  by  means  of  a  weighted  pulley  hung  in  a  slack 
loop  of  the  belt,  which  allows  the  boring  arbor  to  be  moved  either  up  or  down,  or  to  any 
angle  desired. 

The  countershaft  is  so  constructed  as  to  allow  the  head  to  be  moved  horizontally  on 
the  frame,  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys  eight  inches  in  diaineter  and  four-inch  face,  and 
should  make  500  revolutions  per  minute. 


230 


Power  Feed  Rod  Machine. 

This  machine  is  constructed  from  new  designs  and  patterns,  designed  for  turning  all 
kinds  of  rods,  stretchers,  or  other  sticks.  It  is  mounted  on  an  iron  column,  the  counter- 
shaft being  directly  under  the  pulley  and  chuck,  with  the  driving  pulley  in  the  center 
and  entirely  out  of  the  way. 

The  arbor,  through  which  the  sticks  are  fed,  and  into  which  the  chucks  are  fitted,  is 
cast  in  one  piece,  and  fitted  into  bearings  cast  solidly  to  the  column.  We  furnish  with  the 
machine,  either  the  receiving  rolls  to  receive  the  square  sticks,  or  the  discharging  rollers, 
grooved  to  receive  and  feed  out  the  finished  rod,  or  both,  as  may  be  desired. 

The  rollers  are  geared  and  driven  from  one  belt ;  are  easily  adjusted  to  the  required 
pressure  for  feeding  the  stuff,  and  easily  removed  for  different  sizes.  The  receiving 
rollers  can  be  turned  out  of  the  way  when  changing  the  chucks,  or  clearing  them  of 
broken  rods.  We  make  three  sizes,  to  turn  from  15  to  25  ft.  per  minute;  viz:  No.  4, 
to  work  1  inch  and  under;  No.  5,  to  work  1 inch  and  under;  No.  6,  to  work  2  inches 
and  under. 

Each  machine  is  furnished  with  three  heads  and  cutters.  It  has  the  patent  tight  and 
loose  pulleys  which  are  nine  inches  in  diameter,  three  and  one  half  inch  face,  and  should 
make  750  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


231 


Hand  Feed  Rod  Machine. 

This  machine  is  of  great  convenience  for  rounding  stretchers,  rods,  dowels,  etc., 
smoothly  and  accurately. 

The  hollow  mandrel,  or  arbor,  combining  pulley  and  journals,  through  which  the 
articles  being  rounded  are  passed,  is  made  to  receive  different  sized  chucks. 

There  is  a  guide  and  holder  for  the  different  sized  rods,  which  prevents  the  stick  from 
turning  in  the  hands  of  the  operator,  while  passing  it  through  the  chuck. 

The  bearings  in  which  the  journals  revolve,  are  of  best  metal,  arranged  for  perfect 
lubrication.    There  are  three  sizes  of  these  machines,  as  follows : 

No.  1,  for  ^  in.,      in.,  and  5^  in.  rods. 
No.  2,  for  ^  in.,  7/q  in.,  and  1  in.  rods. 
No.  3,  for  lin.,  ly^  in.,  and        in.  rods. 
One  size  of  chuck  only  is  sent  with  each  machine.    The  pulley  on  the  arbor  is  three 
and  one-half  inches  in  diameter  and  face,  and  should  make  3000  revolutions  per  minute. 


Improved  Concentric  Slide. 

These  slides  are  intended  to  be  attached  to  any  ordinary  lathe  that  is  sufficiently  strong 
for  turning  rake,  fork,  hoe  and  broom  handles,  jockey  poles,  etc. 

The  iron  ways  sent  with  the  slide  are  to  be  attached  to  shears  as  may  be  most  convenient. 
The  article  turned  is  finished  to  its  correct  form  by  the  knife  on  the  swinging  arm,  which 
passes  over  a  pattern  fastened  to  the  shears  in  front.  The  slide  is  made  to  have  an 
authomatic  feed  by  means  of  a  knife  attached  to  the  slide,  which  can  be  adjusted  for  any 
desired  speed  of  feed.    We  make  two  sizes  as  follows  : 

No.  1,  to  turn  from  ^  to  2  inches  in  diameter;  No.  2,  to  turn  from  1  to  3  inches  in 
diameter.  They  can  be  fitted  up  at  little  expense,  are  easily  kept  in  repair,  and  will  turn 
from  800  to  1500  pieces  per  day  more  perfectly  than  can  be  done  by  hand. 


232  /  A.  FAY  &  CO/S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


No.  1.  .  .  .  12-Inch  Swing-. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  countershaft  are  6X3,  and  should  make  1,000  revolutions. 


No.  2.  .  .  .  14-Inch  Swing 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  countershaft  are  8X3,  and  should  make  725  revolutions. 


No.  3.  .  .  .  16-Inch  Swing. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  countershaft  are  8X3,  and  should  make  625  revolutions. 


No.  4.  .  .  .  20-Inch  Swing. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  countershaft  are  8X4,  and  should  make  550  revolutions. 


No.  5.  .  .  .  24-inch  Swing.    Special  Pattern  Makers'  Lathe. 

(WITH  DOUBLE  FACE  PLATES.) 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  countershaft  are  8X4,  and  should  make  500  revolutions. 

Patent  Victor  Wood-Turning  Lathes. 

(with  patent  conical  steps  and  self  lubricating  bearings,  etc.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


233 


Patent  Victor  Wood  Turning  Lathes. 

(with  conical  step  bearings,  etc.) 

The  turning  lathes  represented  by  the  engravings  on  the  opposite  page,  of  which  we 
make  six  sizes,  are  designed  and  especially  adapted  for  all  classes  and  variety  of  wood 
turning  in  cabinet,  sash  and  door,  pattern  shops,  etc. 

The  ordinary  lathe  for  hand  turning  having  only  a  rotary  motion,  it  would  seem  that 
there  was  but  little  to  do  to  make  them  more  perfect  in  their  construction  than  they  have 
been ;  but  the  heavy  bodies  revolving  with  them,  besides  the  weight  of  the  cone  pulleys 
and  the  pressure  of  the  stuff  between  the  centers,  creates  a  variety  friction  on  the  journals, 
requiring  some  care  to  overcome.  This  has  been  accomplished  to  a  remarkable  degree  in 
our  lathes,  especially  those  which  have  our  patent  adjustable  conical  step  box  on  the  back 
end  of  the  spindle. 

In  the  Nos.  1  and  2  lathes  the  end  of  the  spindle  rests  in  a  hardened  steel  screw  of 
large  diameter,  which  receives  all  the  pressure  of  the  tail  stock,  and  has  adequate  arrange- 
ments for  oiling  and  taking  up  the  wear. 

The  tail  stock  spindle  is  operated  by  rack  and  pinion,  enabling  the  pieces  to  be  turned 
to  be  put  in  and  removed  instantly,  and  when  desired  can  be  bored  out  its  entire  length 
and  arranged  for  boring  handles. 

The  cones  on  the  head  stocks  are  made  of  metal  and  perfectly  balanced,  and  with  fair 
usage  no  part  of  the  lathe  can  be  worn  out. 

The  Nos.  3,  4,  and  5  are  special  heavy  lathes.  The  two  former  have  our  patent  coni- 
cal step  box,  which  is  adjustable  to  the  tapered  bearing  of  the  spindle  by  a  screw  attached 
to  the  end  of  the  box,  in  the  end  of  which  there  is  a  large  gun  metal  screw,  which  has  a 
separate  attachment  held  to  its  place  by  a  set  nut. 

This  screw  comes  in  contact  with  the  end  of  the  bearing,  in  a  self-lubricating  chamber, 
which  furnishes  the  step  with  a  constant  supply  of  oil.  It  receives  the  entire  thrust  of  the 
tail  stock,  and  relieves  the  collars  of  the  other  bearing  of  friction. 

The  front  box  is  well  arranged  for  oiling,  and  the  bottom  of  the  head  and  tail  stocks 
are  accurately  planed  upon  centers,  so  that  they  will  be  true  to  line  when  set  on  the  shears. 

The  No.  5  lathes  are  designed  for  the  use  of  pattern  makers,  railway  and  furniture 
shops,  etc.,  and  has  a  double-face  face  plate  on  each  end,  together  with  long  and  short 
rest  for  plain  turning,  floor  stand  and  rests  for  outside  turning,  over-head  countershaft 
hangers  and  pulleys,  with  improved  tight  and  loose  pulleys. 


234 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Iron  Frame  Pattern  Makers'  Lathe. 

This  lathe  is  made  entirely  of  metal,  and  complete  in  all  its  parts,  having  shears,  head 
and  tail  stocks  with  bolts,  and  convenient  screws  for  fastening  to  the  shears,  rests  and 
sockets,  countershaft,  hangers,  etc. 

The  No.  3  Patent  Victor  Lathe  is  the  size  usually  furnished ;  they  are  fitted  to  the 
shears  upon  planed  ways,  which  retain  the  centers  exactly  in  line,  in  any  position  the 
head  and  tail  stocks  may  be  placed. 

The-head  stock  is  fitted  up,  when  wanted,  with  an  extra  screw  on  the  back  end  of 
the  spindle,  same  as  shown  in  the  engraving  of  the  No.  5  lathe,  page  132,  made  to  fit  a 
face-plate  with  a  left  hand  screw.  Being  clear  of  the  end  of  the  shears,  large  circles  can  be 
turned,  a  separate  stand  being  furnished  to  receive  a  rest,  which  can  be  adjusted  to  ac- 
commodate the  size  of  circle  being  turned. 

To  receive  the  back  thrust  of  the  stuff  being  turned  there  is  a  take-up  at  the  back  end 
of  the  head-stock,  fitted  with  a  screw  of  gun  metal  for  relieving  the  collars  of  the  spindles 
of  all  friction. 

This  can  be  quickly  removed  when  the  face-plate  is  used  for  turning  large  diameters. 
Pattern  Lathes  No.  4  and  5  of  20-inch  or  24-inch  swing  can  be  fitted  to  these  shears,  or 
plain  Victor  lathes  for  ordinary  turning,  of  16-inch,  20-inch,  or  24-inch  swing,  as  may  be 
desired. 

It  has  an  overhead  countershaft,  with  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which,  on  the  16-inch 
lathe,  are  8x3,  and  should  make  625  revolutions  per  minute,  and  on  the  20-inch  lathe  they 
are  8x4,  and  should  make  550  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


235 


Automatic  Gauge  Lathe. 

(for  chair  work.) 

This  is  a  very  accurately  fitted  and  perfectly  constructed  machine,  and  can  be  worked 
by  any  ordinary  machine  operator.  It  will  turn  all  kinds  of  chair  work  and  other  irregular 
forms  with  great  rapidity  and  exactness. 

It  consists  of  an  iron  frame  with  planed  ways,  upon  which  are  head  and  tail  stocks, 
a  tool  rest  and  apron,  carried  back  and  forth  by  a  heavy  screw. 

The  head-stock  carries  a  steel  spindle  in  long  bearings,  a  cone  pulley  with  two  speeds 
for  driving,  and  a  small  pulley  for  the  feed  belt.  There  is  a  self-centering  attachment, 
which  receives  and  centers  the  material  without  stopping  the  machine. 

The  tail-stock  center  is  arranged  to  revolve  with  the  turning-stick,  making  both 
centers  live.  It  can  be  oiled  and  adjusted  easily,  and  the  frame  which  carries  it  is  moved 
on  planed  ways  on  the  tail-stock  by  a  hand  wheel  and  screw. 

The  tool  rest  is  gibbed  to  the  planed  ways  of  the  frame ;  it  carries  three  cutters  and 
the  supporting  ring,  and  is  moved  either  by  hand  or  automatically  fed  by  a  heavy  screw, 
speeded  from  the  head  spindle.  The  automatic  feed  is  slipped  off  or  on  by  a  handle  in 
the  apron  in  front. 

The  patterns  are  usually  cut  from  sheet-iron,  and  can  be  changed  and  replaced  in- 
stantly without  the  trouble  incident  to  the  ordinary  mode  of  adjustment,  and  are  an  exact 
profile  of  the  finished  article. 

Each  lathe  is  furnished  with  five  die  rings  and  one  extra  tail  spindle.  Countershaft 
is  extra. 

It  has  the  patent  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and 
five-inch  face,  and  should  make  750  revolutions  per  minute. 


i 

/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Iron  Frame  Broom  Handle  Lathe. 

(with  concentric  slide.) 

The  above  cut  represents  an  iron  frame  lathe  with  a  concentric  slide  and  ways 
attached.  It  is  one  of  the  most  simple  machines  for  automatic  turning.  It  has  an  iron 
frame  corresponding  in  length  to  the  length  of  the  articles  to  be  turned,  whether  rake, 
broom,  hoe,  or  fork  handles,  single  trees,  jockey  sticks,  or  chair  stuff.  It  has  the  No.  4 
or  Victor  lathe  head  and  tail  stock,  with  long  centers,  to  allow  the  slide  knives  to  clear  the 
end  of  the  stick  being  turned. 

The  ways  are  a  round  rod  which  is  fitted  into  semi-circular  grooves  in  the  guide  arms 
of  the  slide,  and  a  flat  bar  upon  which  the  elevating  screw  travels,  and  are  arranged  to  be 
detached,  and  the  lathe  to  be  used  for  ordinary  hand  turning. 

The  stick  is  turned  down  to  the  size  of  a  guide  hole,  which  sustains  it  in  a  central 
position  while  the  finishing  knife  completes  it  to  the  size  and  form  desired.  The  finishing 
knife  is  attached  to  a  vibrating  arm  which  moves  over  a  pattern  attached  to  the  front  way 
of  the  machine. 

The  slide  has  a  knife,  which,  when  set  at  a  proper  angle  to  the  stuff,  makes  it  self- 
feeding  ;  this  knife  is  adjustable  to  make  it  feed  as  may  be  desired. 

The  holes  in  the  guide  plate  of  the  slide  are  made  to  receive  from  one-half  inch  to 
three-inch  sticks,  according  to  the  size  of  the  machine.  Extra  long  centers,  face  plate, 
rests,  countershaft  and  hangers  are  furnished,  when  wanted,  when  fitted  with  a  No.  4  lathe. 

The  overhead  countershaft  has  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in 
diameter  and  three-inch  face,  and  should  make  550  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


237 


Sash  Clamping  Machine. 

This  machine  we  have  gotten  up  at  the  solicitation  of  our  customers,  who  have  long 
felt  the  want  of  a  good,  strong,  reliable  machine  that  would  stand  the  rough  usage  incident 
to  this  kind  of  work  without  frequent  breakage. 

It  is  designed  for  clamping  sash  together,  for  gluing,  wedging,  and  pinning.  It  is  con- 
structed entirely  of  metal,  is  very  heavy  and  strong,  and  all  its  working  parts  carefully 
fitted  to  perform  with  accuracy  the  work  to  be  done. 

The  sash  is  clamped  at  one  movement  of  the  treadle  which  moves  all  the  corners  at 
the  same  time. 

The  side  clamps  are  operated  by  four  bell  crank  levers,  at  the  same  time,  the  ends 
are  moved  by  the  treadle. 

The  treadle  is  held  in  place  by  means  of  a  notched  segmental  bar  which  catches  as  the 
treadle  is  pushed  down.  On  being  released  the  treadle  is  raised  and  held  in  position  by  a 
spring.    The  machine  is  easily  operated,  and  does  its  work  in  a  thorough  manner. 

The  capacity  of  the  machine  is  for  sash  up  to  four  feet  nine  inches  wide  by  six  feet  six 
inches  long. 


238 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Improved  Door  Clamping  Machine. 

This  machine  is  made  in  a  most  thorough  manner  of  wrought  and  cast  iron,  intended 
for  the  hardest  service  required,  and  will  clamp  any  size  door  up  to  four  feet  wide  and 
nine  feet  in  length. 

There  are  two  T  rails  or  bars  of  sufficient  length  to  receive  the  largest  door,  upon 
which  are  placed  adjustable  clamping  jaws,  which  can  be  placed  to  give  greater  pressure  to 
the  tenons. 

Extending  lengthwise  the  machine  is  a  wrought- iron  bar,  provided  at  one  end  with  a 
crank  screw  and  at  the  other  a  movable  jaw,  which  is  adjustable  to  suit  the  length  of  the 
door.    By  turning  the  crank  at  the  end  rails  of  the  door  can  be  clamped  as  hard  as  desired. 

The  pressure  on  the  sides  is  given  by  two  foot  treadles,  with  notched  radial  bars, 
which  securely  hold  them  when  the  pressure  is  on.  When  they  are  released,  the  treadles 
return  to  their  position  by  the  action  of  spiral  springs. 

The  ends  are  clamped  by  a  screw  operated  by  a  crank.  It  works  in  the  most  rapid 
manner,  and  all  the  adjustments  are  easily  and  quickly  made. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


239 


Croft  Patent  Belt  Clamping  Machine. 

This  very  useful  and  desirable  little  machine  is  intended  for  drawing  belts  together 
for  lacing.  It  will  do  the  work  in  one-tenth  the  time  of  the  old  way,  and  will  be  found  of 
great  utility  in  any  shop.  It  consists  of  two  pairs  of  clamps,  which  are  connected  by  two 
screws  having  length  enough  to  allow  room  between  the  clamps  for  putting  in  the  lacing. 

The  clamps  are  fastened  in  position  on  the  belt  by  thumb  screws  at  each  end,  the 
surface  of  the  clamp  being  concave  and  convex  to  give  them  more  adhesive  power.  After 
the  clamps  are  fastened  they  are  drawn  together  by  nuts  on  the  connecting  screws,  pro- 
vided with  ratchets  and  pawls,  by  which  they  are  both  screwed  or  unscrewed,  or  one 
screwed  and  one  unscrewed,  at  the  same  time,  the  motion  of  the  nut  being  governed  by 
the  position  of  the  pawls,  which  are  set  into  two  levers,  operated  by  a  connecting  handle. 

These  belt  clamps  are  made  of  the  following  sizes,  viz : 


No.  1,  for  belts  12  inch  and  under. 
No.  2,  15 


No.  3,  for  belts  20  inch  and  under. 
No.  4,  24  " 


Carpenters'  Sash  and  Door  Clamp  Screws. 

Two  sizes  of  these  clamping  screws  are  made,  the  largest  for  clamping  up  doors, 
and  the  smallest  for  clamping  up  sash  with  either  wheels  or  cranks,  as  may  be  wanted. 
They  are  very  convenient  for  carpenters,  sash,  door,  and  blind  makers'  use  to  clamp  the 
work  and  draw  the  joints  into  place. 


240 


/  A.  FAV  &  CO.'S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Wheel  and  Carriage  Machinery. 

In  the  manufacture  of  wheels,  as  in  the  manufacture  of  furniture,  chairs,  and  other 
special  articles,  tools  are  required  which  are  especially  adapted  for  the  production  of  the 
largest  amount  of  perfect  work  with  the  smallest  exertion  of  manual  force. 

In  our  wheel  machine  department,  the  tools  are  constructed  to  meet  the  known  wants 
of  hub,  spoke,  felloe,  and  wheel  makers,  taking  the  material  in  the  rough  state  and  carrying 
it  through  all  the  different  operations  till  the  finished  article  is  produced.  Every  machine 
will  perform  its  work,  in  the  hands  of  an  operator  of  ordinary  skill,  in  the  most  perfect  man- 
ner, pieces  being  exact  duplicates  when  finished. 

There  are  many  machines  used  for  other  purposes,  which,  with  or  without  special  adapt- 
tations,  are  used  by  wheel  makers,  such  as  Rip  and  Cross-Cut  Saws  of  different  styles. 
Band  Saws,  Scroll  Saws,  Surfacing  Planers,  Boring  Machines,  Turning  Lathes,  Tenoning 
Machines,  etc.  These  require  but  little  modification  in  their  construction  to  meet  the  wants 
of  wheel  manufacturers. 

The  specialties  are  numerous  for  a  full  line  of  tools. 

For  making  hubs  a  Cut-Off  Saw  will  be  required.  The  swinging  frame  is  usually  the 
most  convenient,  where  the  timber  is  received  in  logs;  also  a  Hub  Rougher,  Turning  Lathe, 
Hub  Boring  Machine,  and  a  Hub  Mortising  Machine. 

For  finishing  spokes  from  the  rough  timber,  would  require  a  Center  Sawing  Machine, 
Spoke  Lathe,  Tenoning  Machine  with  cutting-off  attachment,  and  Sand  Belt  Machine ; 
these  could  make  the  ordinary  spoke. 

For  finishing  common  wheels,  would  require  a  Tenon  Truing  Machine,  Sand 
Belt  Machine,  and  Wheel  Tenoning  Machine.  For  patent  wheels.  Spoke  Tenoning,  Spoke 
Throating,  Spoke  Sizing,  and  Bevel  Felloe  Planing  Machines  will  be  needed  in  addition. 

For  finishing  the  wheels  complete,  Boring  and  Doweling  Machine,  Felloe  Cutting-Off 
Saw,  Spoke  Driving  Machine,  Felloe  Rounder,  Wheel  Facing  Machines,  Bevel  Felloe 
Planer  and  Felloe  Planers  of  other  kinds,  for  the  sides  of  the  wheel,  or  the  inside  or  out- 
side of  the  Felloe,  according  to  the  finish  and  style  of  the  wheels. 

In  the  following  pages,  will  be  found  descriptions  in  detail  of  the  most  prominent 
special  machines  for  all  departments  of  wheel  making.  Those  which  could  be  better 
described  in  their  own  classification,  will  be  found  by  reference  to  the  pages  given. 

We  would  call  attention  to  the  Bevel  Felloe  Planer,  which  planes  both  sides  of  the 
Felloe  to  the  correct  bevel,  and  the  outside  to  the  exact  width  for  the  tire ;  the  Inside  and 
Face  Planer  for  facing  one  side  and  the  inside  of  the  felloe,  and  the  Baker  Felloe  Planer 
for  finishing  the  outside  of  the  felloe.    These  are  self-feeding  machines. 

The  Patent  Spoke  Driving  Machine  is  especially  worthy  of  attention.  The  blow 
struck  by  the  mallet  on  the  spoke  can  be  graduated  to  the  exact  force  desired,  and 
controlled  as  perfectly  as  a  blow  struck  by  a  hand  mallet.  For  heavy  wheels  this  machine 
is  indispensable,  and  for  lighter  wheels  alone,  it  is  a  most  valuable  addition  to  the  econom- 
ical working  of  the  manufactory. 

The  Automatic  Patent  Wheel  Machine  is  an  entirely  new  combination.  It  not  only 
drives  the  spoke  into  the  hub,  but  cuts  it  off  to  its  proper  length,  and  at  the  same  time 
rounds  the  tenon  on  the  end  of  the  spoke  for  the  reception  of  the  felloe. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY.  241 


It  is  automatic  in  its  operation.  With  one  attendant  it  will  drive  the  spokes,  cut  off, 
and  round  the  tenons  on  the  end  ready  for  the  felloe  at  the  rate  of  from  three  hundred  to 
five  hundred  wheels  per  day.  For  agricultural  work  it  is  unrivalled.  It  will  do  the  work 
of  twenty  men  far  better  than  can  be  done  by  hand. 

The  Universal  Wheel  Facing  Machine,  for  the  same  purpose  as  the  Bevel  Felloe 
Planer,  is  a  power  feed  machine,  and  the  felloes,  instead  of  being  planed  before  they  are 
placed  on  the  spokes,  are  planed  to  the  bevel  after  the  wheel  is  put  together.  It  planes 
the  tread  and  one  face  at  the  same  time,  and  the  joints  of  the  felloe  can  be  left  the  highest 
if  desired.    It  is  a  valuable  labor-saving  machine. 

The  Patent  Oval  Tenon-Forming  Machine  is  for  making  tenons  on  the  spokes  to  enter 
the  felloes,  having  a  longer  diameter  with  the  grain  of  the  wood  in  the  felloe  than  across 
it,  obviating  the  use  of  wedges,  and  decreasing  the  risk  of  splitting  the  felloes.  It  works 
with  the  utmost  precision. 

The  Felloe  or  Rim  Planer  is  used  for  dressing  up  sawed  or  bent  felloes  and  reducing 
to  a  thickness.  The  Cornering  and  Sizing  Machine  for  sizing  bent  stuff  in  carriage  shops 
and  for  rounding  and  finishing  wagon  gear.  The  Concave  Felloe  Sawing  Machine 
works  both  the  inside  and  outside  of  the  circle,  and  will  be  found  an  important  acquisition 
in  reducing  expense  and  saving  material  for  getting  out  felloes. 

An  important  addition  to  our  extensive  list  of  wheel  machinery  is  the  Morris  Patent 
Bending  Machine  for  felloes  and  carriage  work.  It  is  adapted  to  every  requirement  of 
bending,  from  the  smallest  chair  stock  and  carriage  material  to  the  largest  work  required 
in  ship-building.  Many  hundreds  are  in  use,  and  they  have  nearly  superseded  every  other 
machine.    Full  descriptions  will  be  found  with  the  engravings. 

Several  important  machines  necessary  in  wheel  and  carriage  work  are  grouped  in  their 
respective  classes,  and  will  be  seen  by  referring  to  the  pages  indicated  below : 


Surface  Planer,  appropriate  for  wheel  work,           .  .  see  page  .  30. 

Molding  and  Squaring-Up  Machine,  No. 3;^  Triple  Molder,        "  .  75. 

No.  2  Patent  Variety  Wood  Worker,        .           .  •  .88. 

No.  3  Shaping  and  Molding  Machine,            .  .               "  .  107 

Special  Spoke  Tenoning  Machine,                        •  .         «<  WAl. 

Hub  Mortising  and  Boring  Machine,               .  .              "  148,  150. 

Patent  Scroll  Saw,  for  felloes,         .           .           .  .         "  .  160. 

No.  2  Patent  Band  Sawing  Machine,    .           .  .              "  .  172. 

Railway  Cut-Off  Saw,         .           .           .           .  .         -  .  191. 

Rip  Sawing  Machine,    .           .           .           .  .  196,200. 

Boring  Machines,    .....  .        "  223,  234. 

Wood  Turning  Lathes,     .        .           .           .  .             "  .  232. 


Every  machine  is  erected  in  the  very  best  manner,  and  many  of  them  have  features 
original  with  us,  which  are  indispensable  for  the  best  quality  of  work. 


242 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


LARGE  SIZE 
Improved  Blanchard  Spoke  Turning  Lathe. 


WITH  DETACHED  COUNTERSHAFT,   HANGERS,   AND  PULLEYS,   ECCENTRIC  CENTERS,  CUT 
GEARING,    STEEL  FACED  VIBRATING  REST,  ETC. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


243 


LARGE  SIZE. 
Improved  Blanchard  Spoke  Turning  Lathe. 

(with  detached  countershaft,  hangers  and  pulleys,  eccentric  centers,  cut 

GEARING,  steel  FACED  VIBRATING  REST,  ETC.) 

This  form  of  the  Blanchard  Lathe,  for  turning  irregular  shapes,  is  designed  more  espe- 
cially for  turning  spokes  of  all  sizes,  although  other  forms  can  be  turned  from  suitable  pat- 
terns, when  required.  It  is,  without  doubt  the  most  perfect  machine  in  use  for  turning 
all  kinds  of  spoke,  pick,  hammer,  and  other  handles. 

It  is  constructed  in  a  heavy  and  substantial  manner  from  improved  patterns,  the  base 
being  made  of  iron  and  the  vibrating  frame  of  hard  wood,  so  put  together  as  to  be  strong 
and  durable. 

The  cutting  head  is  of  peculiar  construction  and  carries  eight  knives,  which  are  so 
arranged  upon  its  surface  as  to  leave  the  spoke  or  piece  being  turned  smooth  and  compar- 
atively free  from  ridges,  requiring  but  little  finishing  on  the  sand  belt. 

The  head  is  attached  to  and  runs  in  a  heavy  sliding  carriage,  which  is  traversed  on 
planed  slides  by  a  worm  feed,  and  provided  with  a  changeable  feed  for  tapering  work. 

The  motion  of  the  cutter  head  carriage  is  arrested  at  any  desired  point  by  means  of 
a  buffer  attached  to  the  frame. 

The  vibrating  frame  is  fitted  with  heavy  cut  gearing,  for  revolving  the  pattern  and 
piece  to  be  turned.  The  vibrating  rests  are  faced  with  steel  and  are  retained  to  their  posi- 
tions by  means  of  a  heavy  variable  steel  spring. 

The  movable  center  is  operated  by  means  of  an  eccentric  and  lever,  which  is  kept  in 
its  desired  position  by  means  of  a  ratchet. 

The  countershaft  is  made  separate  from  the  machine  and  provided  with  floor  supports, 
and  the  drum  over  which  the  cutter  head  belt  travels  is  made  of  iron,  rendering  it  light 
and  durable. 

All  the  journals  are  of  large  diameter,  made  from  best  refined  cast  steel,  and  run  in 
self-oiling  bearings ;  the  centers  are  of  steel,  and  the  wing  nuts  made  of  wrought  iron. 

The  capacity  of  the  machine  varies  from  400  to  900  spokes  per  day,  depending  upon 
the  size  required,  and  in  its  operation  and  durability  has  given  entire  satisfaction  where- 
ever  used. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter,  four-inch  face  and  should 
make  400  revolutions  per  minute. 


244 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


ii 

1 

 ^ 

Hosier's  Patent  Spoke  Driver, 

(with  adjustable  guide, 
graduated  driving  power,  etc.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


245 


Hosier's  Patent  Spoke  Driver. 

(with  graduated  driving  power,  adjustable  gauge,  etc.) 

This  machine  is  designed  for  driving  all  kinds  of  spokes  into  the  hubs,  and  making 
any  kind  of  wheel  required  in  wheel,  wagon,  or  carriage  shops.  It  has  been  in  constant 
use  in  some  of  the  very  largest  wagon  and  wheel  manufactories  in  this  country  for  the  past 
seven  years,  giving  unqualified  satisfaction. 

It  is  built  in  the  most  thorough  manner,  upon  a  heavy  iron  column,  with  a  view  to  the 
hard  work  it  has  to  perform.  It  requires  but  one  man  to  operate  it,  and  is  easily  man- 
aged, and  any  mechanic  of  medium  capacity  can  learn  to  operate  it  successfully  in  a  few 
hours. 

The  frames  which  hold  the  hubs  will  receive  any  size  up  to  twelve  inches  in  diameter, 
(at  the  large  end,)  and  are  adjustable  to  hubs  sixteen  inches  in  length,  and  to  the  height 
of  the  wheel  by  hand-wheel  and  screws. 

The  blows  are  given  by  swinging  mallet  or  hammer,  similar  to  the  blows  given  by 
hand,  only  with  much  greater  force  and  rapidity,  which  are  obtained  by  the  pressure  of 
the  foot  upon  a  treadle. 

The  blows  can  be  changed  instantly  from  heavy  to  light  and  from  quick  to  slow,  or 
one  blow  can  be  struck  very  quick  and  heavy,  and  the  next  one  light  and  slow ;  indeed, 
they  are  as  easily  governed  as  if  the  operator  had  the  mallet  in  his  own  hands. 

The  graduation  of  the  blow^s  is  so  quickly  accomplished  that  the  stroke  can  be  changed 
after  the  mallet  is  started,  by  changing  the  pressure  of  the  foot  on  the  treadle. 

There  is  an  adjustable  guide  for  guiding  and  truing  the  spoke  being  driven,  which 
sets  the  spoke  into  the  exact  position  desired,  and  which  is  raised  out  of  the  way  when 
not  in  use. 

This  machine  is  adapted  to  wheels  from  tw^o  to  six  feet  in  diameter,  and  is  very 
quickly  changed  from  one  size  to  another.  It  will  do  the  work  of  from  eight  to  ten  men 
on  medium  or  heavy  wheels,  and  do  it  in  a  more  perfect  manner,  and  for  the  purposes 
intended  will  be  found  unequaled. 

The  driving  pulley  is  twenty  inches  in  diameter,  five-inch  face,  and  should  make  120 
revolutions  per  minute. 


246 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Gorr's  Patent  Automatic  Wheel  Machine. 


(for  driving,  cutting  off  and  tenoning  the  spokes  in  the  wheel  without  removal.) 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


247 


Oorr's  Patent  Automatic  Wheel  Machine. 

(for  DRIVING,  CUTTING  OFF  AND  TENONING  THE  SPOKES   IN   THE   WHEEL  WITHOUT  REMOVAL.) 

In  manufactories  where  great  numbers  of  the  same  class  and  size  of  wheels  are  made, 
a  machine  is  needed  for  driving  the  spokes,  sawing  them  off,  and  tenoning  ready  to  receive 
the  felloes.  We  have  recently  constructed  such  a  machine,  in  which  the  combinations  are 
such,  that  all  these  operations  are  performed  by  movements  mostly  automatic  and  com- 
pleted without  removal  from  the  machine. 

The  first  operation  in  this  machine  is  driving  the  spokes.  This  is  done  by  placing  the 
hub  upon  a  stud  or  shaft  near  the  center  of  the  vertical  frame,  having  an  outside  bearing 
movable  at  its  foot  by  a  lever.  The  spokes  are  driven  by  a  mallet,  the  force  of  the  blow 
coming  from  a  spring  and  eccentric  which  forces  the  mallet  down  after  being  raised  by  a 
cam,  the  mallet  striking  one  blow  at  each  revolution.  A  spring  stop  serves  to  hold  it 
when  not  in  use.  The  force  of  the  blow  is  regulated  at  will.  The  spoke  is  supported  on  its 
rear  side  by  a  guide  which  is  adjustable  to  suit  the  angle  or  dish,  and  to  hold  it  steady 
while  being  driven  by  means  of  a  forked  lever  the  prongs  of  which  act  on  each  side  of  it. 
Upon  the  the  right  hand  of  the  machine  is  mounted  a  supplemental  frame  attached  to  the 
frame  pivoted  to  the  stud  or  shaft  to  which  the  hub  is  attached. 

This  frame  carries  the  apparatus  for  sawing  off  and  tenoning  the  spokes.  The  outer 
end  is  provided  with  a  screw  and  bevel  gears  for  raising  and  lowering  the  frame  and 
making  such  adjustments,  as  may  be  necessary  to  suit  different  sized  wheels.  The 
object  of  this  adjustment  is,  that  while  one  spoke  shall  stand  vertically  directly  under 
the  hammer,  and  is  being  driven,  the  saw  shall  be  directly  oposite  the  end  of  one  already 
driven,  so  it  may  be  operating  upon  it  at  the  same  time. 

As  the  frame  moves  upon  a  center,  which  is  the  center  of  the  wheel,  it  will  be  readily 
seen  that  with  the  slightest  adjustment,  the  saw  will  always  be  in  line  with  the  spoke 
to  which  it  may  be  opposite.  Gibbed  to  this  hinged  frame  is  another  having  a  lateral  move- 
ment, on  which  is  mounted  the  cutting-off  saw,  and  tenoning  aparatus.  The  hollow  auger 
is  provided  with  cutting  lips  for  forming  the  tenon  on  the  end  of  the  spoke  combining 
the  sawing  and  tenoning  tools  in  one.  The  sliding  movement  of  this  frame  is  effected  by 
means  of  a  treadle  near  the  base.  The  operator  can  at  any  time,  by  simply  pressing  his 
foot  on  the  treadle  move  the  sliding  frame  outward,  and  thus  bring  the  saw  in  contact  with 
the  spoke  and  cut  it  off.  The  saw  with  its  frame  being  carried  back  as  soon  as  the  foot 
is  removed  from  the  treadle,  by  a  weight.  After  the  spoke  is  driven,  the  hub  is 
revolved  and  another  driven  and  the  hub  moved  over  again,  when  the  first  spoke  passes 
between  guides  which  hold  in  the  line  of  the  hollow  auger.  By  depressing  the  foot  lever, 
the  combined  saw  and  hollow  auger  move  forward  sawing  off  the  spoke  and  holding  it 
between  two  horizontal  guides,  when  the  hollow  auger  arrives  in  line  with  the  spoke  it  is 
automatically  moved  up  by  a  screw  cutting  the  tenon  complete.  These  operations  con- 
tinue until  the  entire  wheel  is  completed. 

With  this  machine  one  man  can  drive,  and  saw  off,  and  make  the  round  tenon  on 
the  end  ready  for  the  reception  of  the  felloe  at  the  rate  of  from  thirty  to  forty  wheels  per 
hour,  depending  upon  the  size,  saving  the  labor  of  several  men. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft  are  fourteen  inches  in  diameter  and 
five-inch  face,  and  .'should  make  200  revolutions  per  minute. 


248 


/  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Improved  Spoke  Tenon  Truing  Machine. 

This  machine  is  intended  for  truing  or  sizing  the  tenons  of  spokes,  and  for  cutting 
off  the  tenons  to  the  desired  length  at  one  and  the  same  operation.  The  upright  spindle 
has  two  cutter-heads,  the  upper  one  having  a  vertical  adjustment  for  the  variations  in  the 
thickness  of  tenons  as  required.  This  adjustment  is  obtained  by  means  of  the  large  nut 
on  top  of  the  spindle. 

The  spoke  to  be  worked  is  laid  on  the  small  sliding  table,  held  firmly  by  the  hand, 
and  passed  by  the  saw  which  cuts  off  the  end  of  the  tenon,  and  then  passed  between  the 
two  cutter  heads  which  brings  the  tenons  to  the  proper  size. 

The  rest  on  outer  end  of  the  sliding  table  is  adjustable  up  and  down  for  different 
sizes  of  spokes. 

The  rest  near  the  saw  is  made  thin  on  its  upper  edge,  and  the  shoulder  of  the  tenon 
is  pressed  firmly  against  it. 

The  knives  on  the  cutter-heads  are  set  out,  so  as  to  just  clear  the  rest,  in  order  to  cut 
as  near  the  shoulder  as  possible. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should 
make  420  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


249 


Spoke  Throating  Machine. 

This  machine  is  intended  for  shaping  and  smoothing  the  throats  or  necks  of  spokes, 
preparatory  to  insertion  in  the  hubs. 

It  has  an  iron  frame,  and  is  strong  and  durable  in  all  its  parts.  The  cutter-head  re- 
volves on  a  steel  shaft,  running  in  self-oiling  boxes,  and  can  be  so  constructed  as  to  make 
the  throat  of  any  desired  shape  . 

The  frame  upon  which  the  spoke  to  be  throated  rests  is  made  of  wrought  iron,  and 
hinged  on  a  slide  bar  which  passes  back  and  forth  over  a  guide,  which,  in  connection  with 
the  knives  on  the  cutter-head,  regulates  the  shape  of  the  throat. 

The  spoke  is  placed  under  a  lever  and  held  firmly  while  passing  back  and  forth.  Ordi- 
nary spokes  can  be  throated  on  both  sides  by  simply  changing  the  guard,  which  is  accom- 
plished by  the  hand  lever  at  the  end  of  the  machine,  in  easy  reach  of  the  operator. 

All  the  adjustments  are  easily  made,  and  it  will  be  found  well  adapted  to  the  require- 
ments of  wheel  manufacture. 

The  pulley  on  the  arbor  is  three  inches  in  diameter  and  one-half  inch  face,  and  should 
make  4,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


250 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Spoke  Facing  and  Jointing  Machine. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  facing  common  spokes,  or  for  facing  patent  spokes,  and 
finishing  the  miter  joint  on  them.  It  consists  of  a  large  cast  iron  disk,  in  which  are  placed 
three  cutting  knives. 

The  disk  is  revolved,  and  the  spoke,  being  placed  in  position  on  the  table,  is  brought 
into  contact  with  the  cutters,  finishing  it  instantly  to  the  desired  surface  or  angle. 

The  table  is  light  and  moved  on  parallel  ways,  placed  at  right  angles  to  the  face  of 
the  disk,  and  has  a  spring  which  returns  it  from  the  disk  when  the  cut  is  completed.  It  is 
furnished  with  necessary  stops  and  guides,  and  for  the  work  designed  has  no  superior. 

The  pulley  on  the  disk  shaft  is  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should 
make  1,440  revolutions  per  minute. 


251 


Spoke  Bevel  Tenoning  and  Facing  Machine. 

(for  agricultural  wheels.) 

This  machine  is  intended  for  preparing  spokes  which  are  to  be  placed  in  iron  or  wood 
hubs,  and  is  suited  to  every  kind  and  class  of  wagon,  carriage,  or  agricultural  implement 
wheels. 

•The  arbor  is  placed  on  a  strong  and  heavy  frame,  and  runs  in  bearings  arranged  for 
perfect  lubrication.  There  are  three  heads  with  two  knives,  one  of  which  is  used  for 
jointing  the  edges  of  the  spoke. 

The  stops  on  the  blade  are  adjusted  to  correspond  to  the  bevel  of  the  mortise,  and 
also  stops  arranged  to  regulate  the  width  of  the  spoke.  Two  of  the  heads  are  placed  facing 
each  other.  The  faces  of  the  heads  are  made  at  an  angle  to  suit  the  angle  of  the  sides  of 
the  mortise. 

The  length  of  the  bevel  on  the  spoke  is  determined  by  the  distance  between  the  heads, 
and  the  arrangement  of  the  stops  allowing  the  table  to  pass  between  the  heads.  The 
sliding  tables  are  very  light  and  easy  to  handle. 

There  is  an  adjustment,  vertically,  of  the  tables  for  changing  the  angle  of  the  cut  so 
that  a  clean  surface  may  be  made. 

The  pulley  on  the  arbor  is  five  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should  make 
2,000  revolutions  per  minute. 


252 


y.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Improved  Automatic  Wheel  Tenoning  Machine. 

This  is  an  invaluable  machine  for  wagon,  carriage,  and  agricultural  implement  shops. 
It  is  designed  to  saw  off  the  spokes  in  the  wheels  to  a  uniform  length  after  they  are  driven 
into  the  hub,  and  also  at  the  same  time  to  make  the  round  tenon  on  the  end  for  the  felloe. 

The  hubs  of  wheels  for  wagon  and  carriage  work  are  made  to  hold  between  taper 
cups.  For  agricultural  wheels  the  hubs  are  held  on  an  arbor  by  a  spring  catch  to  facili- 
tate quick  removal. 

The  frame  carrying  the  cut-off  saw  and  hollow  auger  swings  from  the  center  of  the 
hub,  and  can  be  quickly  adjusted  to  work  any  diameter  of  wheel  up  to  forty-eight  inches. 

The  machine  is  entirely  automatic  in  its  operation,  positive  and  sure.  When 
the  wheel  is  in  position,  by  pressing  upon  the  lever  in  front,  the  saw  moves  forward  and 
reduces  the  spoke  to  its  proper  length.  The  instant  this  is  done  the  hollow  auger  moves  for- 
ward and  forms  the  round  tenon  to  any  length  required,  and  returns  to  its  position 
ready  for  the  next. 

With  this  machine,  one  man  can  cut  off  and  tenon  from  one  to  two  thousand  wheels 
per  day,  depending  upon  the  size. 

It  is  supplied  with  countershaft  with  tight  and  loose  pulleys  twelve  inches  in  diameter, 
and  five-inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


253 


Patent  Oval  Tenon  Forming  Machine. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  making  oval  tenons  on  the  ends  of  spokes  where  they 
enter  the  felloe.  The  diameter  of  the  tenon  is  longer  with  the  grain  of  the  wood  than 
across  it.  The  oval  form  of  tenon  reduces  the  risk  of  splitting  the  felloe  in  driving  it  on  the 
tenon,  and  insures  the  necessary  friction  to  hold  the  felloe  to  its  place  without  the  necessity 
of  wedging. 

The  wheel  is  held  between  chucks  which  receive  the  ends  of  the  hubs,  and 
are  supported  on  a  sliding  frame,  which  can  be  adjusted  to  cut  the  spokes  to  the 
desired  length.  The  spoke  being  operated  on,  is  held  betv/een  two  geared  clamps, 
which  open  and  close  simultaneously,  bringing  the  center  of  any  sized  spoke  to  the  center 
of  the  revolving  disks. 

The  upper  part  of  the  machine  which  carries  the  cutter-heads,  has  two  disks,  which 
are  revolved  by  a  series  of  cut  gearing,  governed  by  a  lever  for  the  foot,  which  acts  upon 
friction  pulleys  and  under  control  of  the  operator. 

The  arbor  on  which  the  cutter-head  and  saw  are  secured,  passes  through  the  revolv- 
ing disks  near  their  peripheries,  the  boxes  in  which  it  runs  being  secured  to  the  disks,  but 
adjustable  by  means  of  cams  for  the  different  tenons. 

The  upper  part  of  the  machine  in  which  the  disks  revolve,  has  a  vibrating  motion 
given  to  it  by  the  weighted  hand  lever.  By  depressing  this  lever,  the  cutter-head  is 
brought  forward,  the  saw  cutting  off  the  end  of  the  spoke  and  bringing  the  cutter-head 
up  to  the  spoke,  cutting  the  oval,  which  may  be  varied  in  size,  to  suit  the  work  required. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  nine  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should 
make  355  revolutions  per  minute. 


254  J.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Patent  Concave  Felloe  Sawing  Machine, 

This  machine  is  especially  designed  for  sawing,  fronn  the  plank,  all  kinds  of  felloes. 
Economy  is  shown  by  rapidity  of  execution,  small  amount  of  waste,  and  the  fact  that  high- 
priced,  skilled  labor  is  unnecessary,  as  any  person  can  operate  the  machine  and  produce 
perfect  work.  The  main  arbor  is  of  large  diameter,  supported  at  one  end  in  a  pivoted 
bearing,  capable  of  adjustment  and  movement  in  a  vertical  plane  on  the  axis  of  its  bearing. 

It  has  two  concavo-convex  saws,  secured  to  a  heavy  arbor  by  fixed  and  movable 
collars,  so  arranged  that  the  collars  will  only  bear  at  their  outer  edges  which  are  rounded, 
the  curves  being  less  than  the  curvature  of  the  saw.  Any  size  saw  can  be  used,  and 
quickly  changed  for  cutting  felloes  for  wheels  of  various  sizes ;  each  set  of  saws  being  nec- 
essarily curved  for  felloes  of  wheels  of  one  size. 

The  timber  is  secured  upon  a  vibrating  carriage,  which  is  supported  on  a  stud,  and  is 
readily  adjusted  to  or  from  the  saws,  for  felloes  of  different  diameters.  The  support  itself 
forms  a  slide  upon  which  the  carriage  is  moved  to  and  from  the  saw,  and  the  plank  is  en- 
tirely cut  up,  without  waste  or  resetting  after  once  being  clamped. 

The  work  from  this  machine  is  as  true  as  a  turned  piece.  Any  desired  radius  is 
quickly  obtained  without  possibility  of  deviation  from  a  true  circle. 

It  is  simple  in  construction  and  operation,  and  will  last  a  life-time.  It  will  easily  saw 
from  2,500  to  3,000  wagon  felloes  per  day. 

The  pulley  on  saw  arbor  is  eight  inches  in  diameter,  and  six  inch  face,  and  should 
make  875  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


255 


Morris  Patent  Wood-Bending  Machine. 

This  Machine  is  intended  for  bending  all  kinds  of  felloes,  chair,  wagon  and  plow  ma- 
terial,  etc.    The  principle  involved  is  the  bending  by  levers  from  the  center  outward. 

The  levers  connect  with  an  iron  bending  band  their  inner  ends  supported  on  ful- 
crum pins,  projecting  from  the  lower  ends  of  two  links  pivoted  to  the  face  of  each  stan- 
dard. The  levers,  when  level,  form  a  table  upon  which  the  wrapper  is  laid  to  receive  the 
straight  timber ;  the  wrappers  or  band  heads,  with  the  lever  abutments,  control  the  end 
expansion  of  the  wood  while  being  bent. 

The  abutments  are  adjusted  by  means  of  eccentrics  and  cranks,  but  oftener  by  wedg- 
ing in  the  slots.  A  wheel  and  drum,  on  which  the  cord  is  wound,  revolves  on  a  shaft 
having  proper  bearings.  The  cord  is  connected  to  the  outer  end  of  the  levers  and 
reeved  through  the  eye  of  the  wheel  over  the  sheves. 

The  wheel  is  driven  by  a  worm  and  shaft  having  two  loose  pulleys,  that  are  clutched 
by  means  of  a  shifter,  for  raising  and  lowering  the  levers. 

The  Bending  form  is  made  in  two  parts,  upper  and  lower,  the  lower  part  when  bend- 
ing remains  on  the  machine,  and  any  desired  number  of  upper  parts  of  the  form,  to  match 
the  lower  part,  can  be  used  in  lieu  of  whole  forms,  the  upper  part  being  always  taken  off 
with  the  bent  wood  which  is  held  in  true  shape  inside  the  wrapper-band  by  catches  or 
loops  until  the  new  shape  is  set. 

The  hand-wheel  beneath  sets  the  wood  up  to  the  form  at  the  point  of  beginning  to  bend. 
For  light  bending,  hooks  are  riveted  on  the  ends  of  the  band,  and  match  hooks  on 
the  levers,  so  that  when  hooked  together,  the  ends  of  the  levers,  form  the  abutments. 
These  are  chiefly  used  for  chair  rims,  buggy  seat  rails,  thwart  knees,  carline  braces,  some- 
times for  shaft  heels,  and  plow  handles. 

But  in  all,  the  lever  supports  and  guides  the  timber  around  the  non-rotative  form,  led 
by  the  cord,  whilst  being  wound  upon  the  drum,  effecting  the  bending  from  any  point 
within  the  length  outward  towards  the  end  or  ends  of  timber. 


256  /.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Inside  and  Outside  Rim  Planing  Machine. 

(for  bent  or  sawed  felloes.) 

This  machine  is  constructed  in  the  most  substantial  manner,  almost  entirely  of  iron 
and  steel,  and  is  intended  for  making  the  first  cut  on  bent  or  sawed  wheel  rims.  It  planes 
the  inside  and  one  of  its  sides  square  with  each  other  at  the  same  operation 

It  has  a  vertical  and  a  horizontal  arbor  on  which  the  cutter-heads  are  secured ;  also 
vertical  and  horizontal  feed  rolls. 

The  cutter-heads  are  easily  accessible,  and  can  be  taken  out  in  an  instant,  by  simply 
loosening  two  set  screws,  for  the  purpose  of  changing,  grinding,  or  setting  the  knives. 

The  under  head  is  raised  or  lowered  by  means  of  hand  wheels,  and  the  upright  head 
is  arranged  so  as  to  take  a  larger  or  smaller  cut,  as  may  be  desired. 

It  is  adjustable  for  all  different  sizes  of  rims,  is  indispensable  in  a  wheel  shop,  and 
will  pay  for  itself  in  a  short  time. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  ten  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should 
make  780  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


257 


Improved  Bevel  Felloe  Planer, 

(for  tapering  bent  rims.) 

This  machine  planes  at  one  operation  both  sides  of  felloes  or  bent  rims,  either  square 
or  beveling,  as  may  be  desired,  and  performs  the  work  much  more  rapidly,  and  almost  as 
smoothly,  as  can  be  done  by'hand. 

It  can  be  easily  adjusted  to  different  sizes  of  felloes  and  rims,  from  one  bevel  to  another, 
or  from  square  to  bevel  work,  and  effects  a  great  saving  of  hand  labor,  it  being  calculated 
that  one  machine  will  save  the  labor  of  six  finishers  in  a  factory  turning  out  fifty  sets  of 
wheels  per  day. 

It  bevels  the  rims  before  they  are  rounded  inside,  allowing  the  sand  belts  to  finish  the 
work  which  has  to  be  done  by  hand  when  the  rim  is  put  on  before  being  beveled.  It  also 
saves  the  operation  of  one  or  two  other  machines,  no  other  work  being  required  on  the 
side  of  the  felloes  after  passing  through  this  machine. 

It  has  a  very  strong  feed  easily  regulated,  the  spindle  and  cutter  heads  are  made  of 
steel,  the  boxes  are  self-oiling,  and  it  will  be  found  durable  and  effective  in  all  its  parts. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face,  and  should 
make  750  revolutions  per  minute. 


258 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Vertical  Felloe  Planer. 

This  machine  has  a  circular  disk  set  vertically  to  the  stuff  to  be  planed.  It  is  adap- 
table to  many  classes  of  work,  and  will  plane  straight  and  tapering,  square  up,  and  take 
out  of  wind. 

It  can  be  arranged  for  circular  work,  as  on  the  various  kinds  of  felloe  planing,  or 
work  of  a  similar  character,  and  is  a  valuable  machine  for  carriage  and  wagon  manufac- 
turers, builders,  cabinet  makers,  etc. 

The  cutting  disk  is  provided  with  bits  for  finishing  the  lumber  to  a  smooth  surface. 
The  feeding  roller  receives  its  pressure  from  a  spring,  and  is  provided  with  three  speeds  of 
feed. 

The  thickness  of  the  stuff  is  regulated  by  a  sliding  fence  operated  by  a  hand  wheel. 
Special  arrangements  are  attached  for  felloe  and  circular  work.  The  head  should  make 
2,500  revolutions  per  minute. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulley,  if  a  countershaft  is  wanted,  will  be  ten  inches  in  diameter 
and  five-inch  face,  and  should  make  625  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


259 


Special  Cornering  or  Rounding  Machine. 

This  is  a  simple  and  substantial  machine  for  cornering  work  preparatory  to  placing  it 
on  the  sand  belt,  and  is  adapted  to  rounding  all  classes  of  carriage  and  agricultural  imple- 
ment work,  or  anything  of  corresponding  character. 

It  works  with  great  rapidity  and  certainty,  and  will  not  only  perform  triple  the  amount 
of  work  of  a  shaper,  but  dispenses  with  the  necessity  of  patterns,  A  boy  can  operate 
it,  and  for  the  purposes  designed  it  has  no  equal. 

The  several  heads  on  the  spindle  are  each  provided  with  different  shaped  cutters,  ac- 
cording to  the  work  to  be  done.  The  amount  of  the  corner  to  be  taken  off  is  governed 
by  the  distance  the  bevel  guards  are  set  apart,  they  being  adjustable,  and  retained  in  their 
position  by  a  set  screw  in  the  foot  of  each.  A  chamfer  of  any  bevel  may  be  made  by 
having  the  guards  of  a  bevel  to  correspond  to  it. 

The  pulley  on  the  spindle  is  three  and  one-half  inches  in  diameter  and  four-inch  face, 
and  should  make  4,800  revolutions  per  minute. 


260  /.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Felloe  Rounding  Machine. 

This  machine  is  designed  for  cornering  and  finishing  the  inner  curve  of  the  felloes 
of  wheels,  after  they  are  bent  and  bored  for  the  spoke.  The  cutters  are  placed  in  an 
adjustable  head,  their  edges  made  so  as  to  form  a  semi-circular  groove  in  their  periphery. 

Between  the  heads  is  a  stationary  guide  rest  to  prevent  the  felloe  from  being  cut 
away  more  than  required.  Upon  the  periphery  of  the  rest  is  a  gauge  and  pin  for  regu- 
lating the  distance  from  the  spokes  at  which  the  cutting  of  the  corners  shall  begin,  a 
portion  of  the  felloe  about  each  spoke  being  left  square. 

In  operating  the  felloe  is  passed  through  the  cutters  with  the  pin  in  one  of  the  spoke 
holes  and  then  moved  outward  until  it  presses  upon  the  rest  and  catches  the  next  hole  up- 
on the  pin,  and  so  on  until  the  whole  of  the  piece  is  rounded  upon  one  side,  and  all  the 
spoke  holes  full  half  way  to  the  succeeding  holes,  when  the  stick  is  reversed  and  the  pro- 
cess repeated,  completing  the  operation. 

The  felloe  is  easily  secured  in  the  cente.r  of  the  cutter-head  and  the  guides  are  adjus- 
s;able  :f(5r  rfei^oee:  ^  Jdiffe/^ht  Jlj^ScJcue^Jseft):  Itor  very  great  differences  other  guides  can  be 
used.*'  L  I  \  1 1  I      •  •  • 

A  countershaft^is  cpnnect.efi.\Yil!]^  the  machine,  having  tight  and  loose  pulleys,  which 
are  eight  jitches  ii)  djarrieto,  tHrET^-irtch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


261 


Felloe  Boring,  Cutting-Off,  and  Dowelling  Machine. 

This  is  a  very  convenient  and  simple  machine,  intended  for  sawing  off  both  ends  of 
felloes  to  the  proper  size ;  also  for  boring  holes  for  the  round  tenons,  and  making  the 
dowels  in  the  ends  of  same. 

It  is  built  on  a  substantial  iron  frame,  with  the  arbors  extending  across  the  machine 
from  one  side  to  the  other.  On  the  front  side  the  two  outer  arbors  carry  each  a  circular  saw, 
which  projects  through  the  table,  on  which  there  is  a  supplemental  table  with  forms  to  suit 
the  circle  of  felloe  to  be  worked. 

This  table  slides  on  the  main  table  carrying  the  ends  of  the  felloe  past  the  saws, 
reducing  both  ends  to  a  uniform  length  by  a  slight  motion  of  the  carriage. 

On  the  opposite  side  are  the  boring  arbors,  three  in  number.  On  this  side  the  holes 
are  bored  in  the  felloe  for  the  round  tenon  on  the  end  of  the  spoke ;  also  the  dowel  holes  in 
the  ends  of  the  felloes. 

There  are  adjustable  stops  for  the  different  thicknesses  of  felloes,  and  the  table 
has  a  vertical  adjustment  also. 

The  machine  has  a  countershaft,  which  drives  all  the  arbors,  and  carries  tight 
and  loose  pulleys,  which  are  eight  inches  in  diameter  and  five-inch  face,  and  should  make 
900  revolutions  per  minute. 


262 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


263 


Universal  Wheel  Finishing  Machine. 

(for  dressing   both  tread  and  face  of  wheels.) 

This  is  a  useful  combination,  made  with  our  universal  wood-worker,  designed  to  finish 
the  rims,  side,  and  tread  of  wheels,  and  isvery  perfect  in  itsoperation. 

For  bent  rims,  the  outside  can  be  made  a  true  circle,  but  for  sawed  felloes  the  joints 
are  liable  to  crush,  making  a  depression.  This  is  avoided  by  making  the  felloes  of  a 
larger  circle  than  the  circle  of  the  wheel,  causing  the  joints  to  stand  out,  so  that  when  the 
tire  is  placed  on  the  wheel  it  forms  a  perfect  circle. 

In  planing  wheels  with  sawed  felloes,  the  hub  is  placed  in  a  screw  chuck  on  a  stand 
with  adjustments  for  angles,  distances,  and  height.  The  chuck  is  made  with  a  cam  attached 
to  correspond  to  the  number  of  felloes  on  the  wheel,  and  the  proper  shape  to  give  the  re- 
quired circle  to  the  felloes. 

The  outside  head  is  of  peculiar  construction,  cutting  against  and  with  the  grain  of  the 
wood  equally  well.  The  main  head  of  the  machine  faces  the  side  of  the  wheel  which 
may  be  up. 

The  feeding  roller  carries  the  wheel  around  against  the  cutters  and  holds  the  cam 
against  the  guide  roller  and  finishes  the  side  and  periphery  at  one  operation. 

For  bent  rims,  a  true  circle  may  be  used  in  the  chuck  instead  of  the  cam.  The  wheel 
planing  arrangement  can  be  detached  easily  and  quickly,  and  the  heads,  feed  rollers,  and 
outside  bearing  for  the  molder  side  of  the  universal  wood-worker  replaced,  on  which  mold- 
ings to  eight  inches  can  be  made,  it  being  furnished  with  all  attachments  necessary  for 
that  work. 

The  wood-worker  side  is  complete  for  squaring  up  and  truing  to  nine  inches  wide, 
gaining,  grooving,  rabbeting,  and  all  work  usually  done  on  machines  of  its  class,  as  de- 
scribed in  our  wood-worker  articles.  In  addition,  attachments  can  be  put  on  for  sawing 
off  and  boring  felloes. 

This  machine  is  complete  in  all  respects.  Both  sides  can  be  operated  at  the  same 
time,  or  either  stopped  without  interfering  with  the  other,  making  the  operators  entirely 
independent  of  each  other. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter  and  five- 
inch  face,  and  should  make  600  revolutions  per  minute. 


264 


/.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Corr's  Improved  Hollow  Auger. 

(with  interchangeable  cutters  and  bits.) 

The  above  engraving  represents  an  improved  hollow  auger,  intended  for  making  the 
round  tenon  on  spokes  after  they  are  driven  into  the  wheel.  They  can  be  furnished  with 
a  square  shank,  permitting  their  use  in  an  ordinary  wheel-wright's  brace,  worked  by 
hand,  or  can  be  applied  to  power  machines. 

It  is  a  very  simple  and  effective  tool.  The  cutters  of  the  augers  or  chuck  are  made  of 
steel,  the  face  of  the  chuck  being  recessed  for  the  reception  of  the  cutters,  which  can  be 
almost  instantly  interchanged  from  one  size  of  tenon  to  another  without  removal  from 
the  machine. 

The  bits  are  made  of  very  heavy  steel,  forged  under  a  drop  with  the  cutting  lips 
raised  in  such  a  way  as  to  get  a  shearing  cut  on  both  corners,  and  allow  of  sharpening 
with  a  file. 

The  size  of  the  tenon  is  never  changed  by  sharpening  the  cutters.  When 
provided  with  a  suitable  assortment  of  cutters,  it  will  be  found  to  answer  all  the  purposes 
of  the  expansive  augers,  or  even  a  full  set  of  the  ordinary  hollow  augers. 

Its  chief  points  of  advantage  are 

1st.  Its  remarkable  simplicity  of  construction. 

2nd.  Its  cheapness  when  compared  with  all  expansive  augers  in  use. 
3rd.  Its  durability,  cutters  not  being  so  liable  to  get  out  of  repair  as  other  augers. 
4th.  The  facility  with  which  it  can  be  changed  for  different  sized  tenons. 
5th.  Its  perfect  accuracy  in  producing  tenons  without  the  slightest  variation  from  the 
use  or  wearing  away  of  the  cutters,  so  common  with  ordinary  hollow  augers. 


OF  WOOD-WORKING  MACHINERY. 


265 


Wheel  Screwing  Machine. 

This  is  an  improved  machine  for  boring  the  holes  and  driving  the  screw  in  the  rims 
or  felloes  of  wheels,  to  prevent  them  from  splitting  or  cracking  where  the  spokes  enter. 
It  has  two  spindles  running  at  different  speeds,  that  which  runs  at  the  highest  speed  carry- 
ing an  auger  for  boring  the  holes.  The  other  spindle  is  cupped  out  in  the  lower  end  and 
split,  in  which  is  clamped  a  strip  of  steel  for  driving  the  screws,  the  cup  serving  to  guide 
the  screw-heads  to  the  driver. 

The  wheels  are  held  in  a  chuck,  which  is  raised  or  lowered,  to  suit  different  lengths  of 
hubs,  by  a  screw  and  hand-wheel,  and  brought  to  or  from  the  machine,  to  accommodate 
different  sizes  of  wheels,  by  means  of  rack  and  pinion.  This  frame  traverses  on  two  slides 
fastened  to  the  floor. 

The  belt  which  drives  the  boring  spindle  is  slack  enough  to  allow  the  spindle  to  stop 
when  the  foot  is  taken  off  the  treadle.  The  other  spindle  runs  constantly  with  the  coun- 
tershaft. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  countershaft  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter,  and 
three-inch  face,  and  should  make  400  revolutions  per  minute. 


\ 

266  /.  A.  FAY  &  CO:S  ILLUSTRATED  CATALOGUE 


Hub  Boring  Machine. 

This  machine  is  arranged  for  boring  the  hole  through  the  center  of  either  large  or 
small  hubs.  The  hub  is  held  between  two  jaws,  which  are  self-centering,  and  moved  to- 
gether or  separated  by  a  right  and  left  screw,  worked  by  a  hand  wheel. 

The  ways  upon  which  the  jaws  are  moved  are  planed  perfectly  true,  and  the  frame 
upon  which  the  ways  are  cast  is  placed  upon  parallel  planed  ways  upon  which  it  slides,  when 
the  hub  is  being  moved  to  the  auger  while  boring. 

The  movement  of  the  hub  is  effected  by  a  rack,  attached  to  the  sliding  frame ;  the 
rack  is  moved  by  a  pinion  on  the  shaft  of  the  large  hand-wheel. 

The  boring  mandrel  is  driven  by  a  two  speed  cone  pulley.  The  bearings  in  which  the 
mandrel  runs,  are  the  same  described  for  the  Victor  Wood  Lathe,  and  are  thoroughly  ar- 
ranged for  oiling  and  reducing  friction. 

The  machine  is  placed  upon  a  substantial  frame  and  is  well  finished  throughout. 

Two  pairs  of  jaws  are  sent  with  each  machine. 

The  tight  and  loose  pulleys  on  countershaft  are  twelve  inches  in  diameter,  five-inch 
face,  and  should  make  750  revolutions  per  minute. 


,'v 


GETTY  CENTER  LIBRARY 


3  3125  00141  0451 


